Home

System Administrator`s Manual Voice Processing System

1. processed first A High priority list processes before a Normal or Low priority 1 10 System determines condition of call answered ringing busy For optimum results use with Confirmation or Accept This call type strictly follows its program settings For best results set up calls to repeat or use with Confirmation Number of times the prompt plays before continuing with the call flow Use a setting that will allow the system to detect calls being answered Number of times the system will repeat an ID ex to report ID of absentee students System queries for a DTMF response to confirm the caller is present not an answering machine or wrong number Length of time the system allows the person called to enter the ID Maximum number of call backs allowed System calls out until this number of acceptances are received ex school needs 2 substitute teachers calls will stop after receiving 2 acceptances Length of time the system allows the called person to accept Keys assigned for called party to use to acknowledge accept message Maximum number of attempts called party has to enter specified Accept Key C 12 Chalk Talk Message O Optional O Mailbox O Max Length O Goto Q amp A Disconnect Prompt Person called is given a choice to leave a message Mailbox number to receive the voice mail messages Amount of time that a person called has to record a message Syste
2. 3 14 Phone System Set Up Starplus SPD 2856 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the STARPLUS SPD 2856 digital in band integration Oo oO One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each 4 x 8 SLT card provides eight ports One DTMF Receiver module The DTMF is installed on the 4 x 8 SLT card or other 4 x 8 cards The DTMF provides one DTMF receiver One Ring Generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS SPD 2856 include Oo Oo n n Station forward to a personal greeting Message waiting On Off LEDs Outdial to pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Stations transfer callers directly to mailbox Phone System Set Up Table 3 6 Starplus SPD 2856 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD
3. Figure 5 48 Edit Menu Window for a menu named Banking 5 88 Menu Settings 2 The menu name is listed at the top of the editing window Configure fields and options in the general pane as follows Password Specify the password to protect the on line recording action This password is required when a caller accesses the action Record Prompts Description Enter a brief description of the menu s function to remind you of its purpose Time Out Specify the length of time after which if the caller presses no key the specified action is to run Time Control Calls are often processed differently in the evening during the weekend or on holidays than they are processed during regular business hours The time control function lets you define a set of alternative actions that PathFinder performs for calls during defined time periods Refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 for more information on time controls If you do not intend to use time controls set this value to None Use caution when configuring this option as it may cause unexpected behavior Retries Specify the number of times a caller can initiate an invalid option If the caller initiates more than the maximum number of allowed invalid options the Max Retries key action is taken The maximum value for this field is 999 Settings in the voice prompts pane describe information played for callers to assist them in deciding which ke
4. Ea rath tinder Voice Processing System System Administrator s Manual Includes Optional Modules and Installation Forms Issue 3 May 2001 Issue Release Date Changes 2 04 99 Content contains revised material 3 05 01 O Content has been updated with new screens and descriptions O Material has been reorganized and reformatted O Manual includes Optional Modules and Installation Forms LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS POLICY VODAVI Technology Inc products are not authorized for and should not be used within Life Support applications Life Support systems are equipment intended to support or sustain life and whose failure to perform when properly used in accordance with instructions provided can be reasonably expected to result in significant personal injury or death VODAVI Technology Inc warranty is limited to replacement of defective components and does not cover injury to persons or property or other consequential damages Copyright 2001 VODAVI Technology Inc All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by VODAVI Technology Inc Any unauthorized reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of the Copyright Laws of the United States 17 U S C Section 101 et seq VODAVI reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without notice The information furnished by VODA
5. Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String Notify Action Does notification for the global mailbox Description This is used to restart notification for the global mailbox if PathFinder has not extinguished the notification retries This is similar to the Pager Uses Retries field in the COS record Pager Uses Retries is not active for command file paging Use the Notify command to force using retries DtmfRead lt count gt lt terminate gt lt time gt Reads DTMFs PathFinder either waits for these digits or if the digits are already in the buffer the caller has already entered the digits PathFinder does not have to wait The command waits for 3 terminating conditions lt count gt digits are read one of the digits specified in the lt terminate gt parameter is read or lt time gt seconds passes An example of a command is DtmfRead 5 7 10 Where PathFinder waits for 5 digits 7 is the terminating digit and PathFinder waits 10 seconds Related Commands Dtmf lt String gt WriteDtmf Dtmf lt String gt lt Command gt WriteDtmf lt FileName gt lt path gt Reads Branch on Dtmf Appends Dtmf contents to file If the lt String gt value matches the value received in DtmfRead then perform the lt Command gt Dtmf 34567 Dial 7701234567 If PathFinder receives the string 34567 from the DtmfRead command it dials the DIMF number 7
6. 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt gt L73 17 17 L73 17 17 L73 17 17 d 7 17 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 SM SMTPOUt SM SM SMTPOUt SM SM SMTPOUt SM SMTPOut TPOut TPOut rPOut TPOut TPOut TPOut TPOut TPOut TPOut TPOut Connect To ESIHELLO 10725 Recv lt 220 H NT UMP Gateway SMTPIn gt Recv lt 220 ESMTP spoken here gt Recv lt 220 UMP 1 0 spoken here gt UMP Spoken on other end gt EHLO Recv lt 250 XUMP gt Recv lt 250 Hello gt gt MAIL FROM 100 SKELLY NT A Recv lt 250 OK Mail From 100 SKELLY NT A gt gt RCPT TO 1221 ESIHELLO Recv lt 250 OK Rcpt To 1221 ESIHELLO gt DATA 15642 Recv lt 354 UMP accepting 15642 end with X UMP ID XXXXXX XXX X UMP Category Voice X UMP Status X UMP Flags X UMP Size 0 00 05 X UMP Priority 3 TO From Date MIME version 1 0 Content type audio adpcm Point To Point Messaging C 93 17 25 16 02 12 gt gt Content length 15408 17 25 16 02 12 2 25 MTPOut gt Content encoding Binary 17 25 16 02 12 MTPOut 17 25 16 02 12 17 25 16 02 12 i MTPOut 17 25 16 02 12 MTPOut Recv lt 25
7. Master List Detail Belonging to Group Teachers Print Date 5 25 2001 Name ID Language Phone Number Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Dryden Daniel 500005 O English 623 998 1244 Teachers English Dryfhout Art 510085 O English 623 559 7724 Teachers Math Dublak Ed 500000 O English 623 587 9987 Teachers Math Dubner James 500050 O English 602 889 9874 Teachers Sub Teachers Hanision Kristal 502050 O English 602 658 9512 Teachers English Tannite lli lan 500020 1 Spanish 623 889 2556 Teachers Math TOTAL LIST ENTRIES 6 De od N a 6 Figure C 8 Master List Detail Report amp Use the envelope icon to export the file to another application 7 4 Use the printer icon to print the selected report C 18 Chalk Talk Database Options The Database contains user and group parameters that are used to create and modify the Master List for Call Lists and Reports MASTER LIST To delete add or change Master List settings 1 Click DATABASE 2 Then click MASTER LIST previously stored entries display 3 Click the ADD button to create a new Master List entry or the PROPERTIES button to edit an existing entry Call List Admin Build 50 Create Edit Remove entries for the Master List i ES ey a1 Carter Dawn 480 443 6000 100000 Carpio Alexis 602 443 7889 100001 El Carter z z Master List Carpexo Carpina f D Donaldson First Name Alexis Carr Group 1 Students 7 Groups Carra Last
8. c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev IMPORTANT If Call Screening is used with Mach I then Auto Callback must be disabled in the phone system FLASH 01 Button 17 Phone System Set Up infinite DVXPlus II Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite DVX PLUS II in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX PLUS Il include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 39 Table 3 18 infinite DVXPlus II Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial gt and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then pres
9. Designing a Menu 5 84 Detection Settings 5 23 Determining System Size 2 3 Determining Tone Type 5 25 Device Status 7 8 Device Type 7 8 Dial Hold Sequence 5 80 Dial Source 5 70 Dialog 4 2 5 2 7 2 27 Dialogic Drivers 2 5 2 20 2 21 Products 2 7 Program Group 2 25 Software 2 25 Voice Ports 7 1 Dialogic based Troubleshooting 7 8 Dial out 2 13 Digit Lengths 4 6 5 1 Digit Time 5 15 Direct Attachment to the Central Office 2 12 Directories 4 6 5 16 Directory 5 5 5 7 5 100 Directory Report 4 7 6 30 Disabled Key 5 91 Display 2 2 Distribution Lists 6 1 Do Always 5 54 Do Not Disturb 2 25 Drive 2 2 Drive Size Formula 2 4 DTMF Keys 4 9 Pound 4 9 Star 4 9 iv Index Tones 2 7 Dual Tones 5 28 Dutch 5 13 E Edge 5 28 Edit Menu 4 6 Edit Options 7 5 Editing IVR Time Period Settings 5 19 Menus 5 87 System Lists 6 6 Time Controls 5 96 User Setups 5 46 Enable Point to Point Messaging C 87 Error Log 6 34 Error Messages 8 2 Essex Line 2 12 Event Counters 5 60 Event Group 5 107 C 37 C 87 Event Handler Group 5 74 Exit Button 4 9 Exiting Configuration Utility 2 42 expansion slot cover 2 11 EXT List C 102 Extended Options 5 79 Extension Settings Detail Report 6 22 Summary Report 6 21 Extension Usage Report 6 13 Extensions 5 44 5 90 5 100 5 105 Length 5 2 Settings 5 51 F Fax 5 64 Adding Voice Description to a Facsimile Document C 42 Configuration C 35 Create Key to Run Fax On Demand C 38 Databas
10. Other MAINT Settings 5 39 Registry Item Fields The following fields are used to add or edit Registry items Field Description Name The Registry item to add or modify This entry is case sensitive Value The current value for the setting Default Specifies a default value for this setting Description A general description of the setting Type Select the options that apply to this Registry item O Defaults if you assigned a value in the Default field o Reloadable to indicate that PathFinder should be reloaded when this parameter changes O INI Parameter if the value is to be written to an INI file O Write Empty if the value is to be written to even if empty INI File Settings Select the options that apply o INI File If INI Parameter was checked above use this field to enter the name of the INI file to write to O Section If writing to an INI file specify the section in which to write 5 40 User Settings User Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the users e g subscribers functions available through the Edit menu in MAINT Users or subscribers are people who have a mailbox and an extension on PathFinder Subscribers can leave forward and retrieve messages They can have a voice mail greeting and mailbox signature and certain subscribers have access to administrator options All
11. PIER FRIGERIO Voice 15 Saved 1 4 meg 470 5 sec Page 2 Saved 6 6 meg 0 0 sec FAX z 2 Saved 6 6 meg 6 6 sec SONYA O CAIN Voice 21 New 2 Saved 4 1 meg 1435 9 sec CHASTITY MULDROW Voice 1 Nev 2 Saved 6 7 meg 241 7 sec Figure 6 26 Message Summary Report Example 6 36 Messages Reports Data The following fields are displayed with the message summary report Mailbox Mailbox owner name and mailbox number New Total number of new messages Saved Total number of saved messages Time Total time for all messages Disk Space Used Total occupied disk space per owner Use This report shows the total messages stored on the hard drive for each mailbox It can help determine if messages are being stored too long or if PathFinder resources are being monopolized by any one user Message Detail The Message Detail report allows the system administrator to select a mailbox and view its current status Report 502 Notepad File Edit Search Help 6 14 96 15 56 38 Mailbox Msg Type MIKE FORD Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Voice Figure 6 27 Message Detail Report Example Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Saved Message Detail Mailbox Range File Name US1626 UJ6 US1626 Q6 US1626 596 V 1626 LA6 V 1626 LG6 V 1626 0L6
12. Pm PlayFirstMessage followed with d Delete s Save n New Ne ProcessNextEvent Za Zap erase all messages Ap Abort if no pages Rp Restart if pages exist No Notify Tw Where field is timed placed before Dw Rn Restart if new messages Technical Notes A 11 Example QuickCommand O0fS11DwS13DpS110nNeQu is equivalent to OffHook Sleep 1 Sleep 2 OnHook DialMailboxWhere ProcessNextEvent Sleep 3 Quit DialMailboxBeeperFile Even though this is not as quickly it works Combining Commands You may also combine Quick Commands and regular commands as follows QuickCommand OfS11DwS13 DialMailboxBeeperFile Sleep 1 QuickCommand OnNeQu Technical Notes When creating a command file for pager notification the timing of the digits to be sent from the voice mail system to the pager is critical The command file must be sychronized with the timing of the pager being used When determining the timing of the pager 1 Call the paging company 2 Calculate the amount of time from when you dialed the last digit to the pager company and the time the pager company asks for the digits to be sent to the pager 3 Modify the Sleep time to be the time you calculated for the digits to be sent to the pager For further information contact technical support A 12 Pre Defined Command Files Pre Defined Command Files The self contained voice mail unit has several pre defined command f
13. This option provides the mailbox owner with more control over the forwarding of the mailbox and extension Without this option on the owner can only modify extension settings With this option on the owner can specify a destination mailbox or extension Hold Type This setting determines what callers hear if an extension is busy and they elect to be put on hold O Setting this to Silence keeps the call connected but the caller hears nothing while on hold 5 80 Class of Service Settings o Dial Hold Sequence causes PathFinder to execute a flash hook when the caller is placed on hold if provided by the phone system the flash hook activates background music o If set to Play Hold Files the caller hears recorded messages prepared for PathFinder Up to nine hold files can be recorded Hold files are saved in the VOX subdirectory and have the following naming convention O HELLONT VOX AAHOLD O o HELLONT VOX AAHOLD 1 o HELLONT VOX AAHOLD 2 Hold Interval This setting determines how long PathFinder waits before retrying a busy extension For example if PathFinder attempts to ring a busy extension and if the hold interval is set to ten seconds it retries the extension every ten seconds until a connection is made or until the retry limit is reached The time is measured in seconds with a maximum interval of 999 seconds Call Queuing This option allows multiple calls to be placed on hold for a single extension Tur
14. To disconnect press 9 105 Please enter your teacher ID password followed by pressing 106 You have entered an invalid teacher password 107 You are editing the homework assignment for ID 108 To hear current assignment press 1 109 To record a new assignment press 2 110 To accept newly recorded assignment press 4 111 To go back and enter a new teacher ID press 112 To disconnect press 9 113 After the tone start recording the new assignment 113 Press to stop recording 114 This assignment was recorded on 115 The following is the current assignment 116 The following is the newly recorded assignment 117 New assignment has been accepted C 26 Chalk Talk Question amp Answer Sessions The Question and Answer Sessions is a PathFinder application that allows the system to be configured for either voice or DTMF response questions The responses are stored as a voice message for a specified mailbox The QA module allows up to 99 questions Installation Configuration Since a questionnaire MUST be present to start the QA Admin application a sample questionnaire was set up using the following criteria Ask for a voice name and a DTMF telephone number and then send results to mailbox 100 Activating the QA Application Select Start gt Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt Q amp A Admin The following Questionnaires scre
15. and so on Menus are often designed to branch to other menus submenus PathFinder plays an introduction prompt for only the very first menu accessed Any introduction for a submenu must be recorded as part of the body prompt or the instruction prompt if there is no body prompt For example a Sales submenu instruction prompt might be Thank you for calling the sales department For distribution sales press 1 for direct sales press 2 The ellipses button displays a list of all user recorded prompts This allows you to select a pre recorded prompt The bottom part of the window addresses Key Actions Key actions determine the response invoked when a particular key is pressed Each dial pad key has an accompanying key action field There is a special field labeled Time Out The Time Out field indicates what happens when the caller does not press any keys before the time out period elapses The Max Retries key action is another special field The Max Retries setting indicates what happens when the caller presses an invalid key one time more than the retries setting 5 90 Menu Settings Clicking any Key Action button displays the list of options When you select an option further options display in the right side of the window when appropriate Define each key in this window Refer to Key Action Definitions on page 5 90 Key Action Definitions Define key actions in the Edit Menu window by clic
16. jul jul jul The class of service name and description General settings Voice mail and Auto Attendant settings including notification settings Ej Report 230 Notepad File Edit Search Help ATONCE BASIC Class of Service Settings 06 14 96 15 40 14 Page 61 COS Range ATONCE to COSOF Once Demo COS Time NONE User Type 65 Language English Restrict 99 digits Greeting Type Personal Greeting Length 60 secs Msg Type Voice Page FAX Msg Type Default Voice sg Type Henu On Msg Length 300 secs Msg Count 108 sg Retention 999 days Record Options 0n Send Options Urgent amp Private Last Options 0n First Time Help 0n Say Date Time Manual Natural Msg Order FIFO Owner Play Save Skip Msg Owner Send Urgent Private Future Outside Sys List Receipt Owner Edit Password Greeting Name Sig Owner Edit Guest Mbx Owner Edit Transfer Menu HUI OFF Event Handler Grp 6 Msg Cascade 0FF Notify Interval 5 min Notify Attempts 6 Pager Retries No Call Options Blind Supervised Screening Holding Hold Interval 5 secs Hold Type Silence Call ueueing 0FF Screen Length 1 secs General ESI Class Time NONE Figure 6 16 Class of Service Settings Report Example 6 24 Setting Reports Use Use the COS report to review and maintain class of service options Menu Settings The Menu Settings report provides a complete description of each menu and the action programmed for each key Report 240 Notepad File Edt
17. press Btn 3 press HOLD 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group Btn 9 is the disconnect table programming for VM group 440 9999999 is the disconnect code used by 4 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports PathFinder into a VM group 440 447 8 Perform the following at each station 5 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table a Press SPEED twice as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve b Press the flexible button to be Table as Table 1 programmed 6 Leave Table Programming c Dial 440 on the keypad a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 d Press the ON OFF button b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each 0is a prefix digit SLT port by using the volume up or down code TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause This provides additional control for both internal timer and external calls into PathFinder 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Subscribers are defined as users with a mailbox and extension on PathFinder The subscriber does 7 Retrieve Table Programming not have to use both the mailbox and or a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 extension b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus 3 42 Phone System Set Up infinite DVXPlus IV Hardware Requirements The f
18. 005 Generic PBX 3 Digit Blind Xfer 006 Generic PBX 3 Digit Supervised Xfer 007 Generic PBX 4 Digit Blind Xfer 008 Generic PBX 4 Digit Supervised Xfer 100 Vodavi Starplus 2448EX 101 Vodavi Starplus S6EX Do Not Change Help Select the phone system that the voice processing system will be connected to Figure 5 23 PBX Integration Window The above window displays the current PBX selection Other MAINT Settings 5 35 After you have selected a PBX from the list the following window which allows you to select what options to install is displayed PBX Integration r Install 004 GENERIC PBX 2 DIGIT SUPERVISED XFER IK PBX Settings Transfer MWls etc X Subscriber Information Class of Services Cancel dig r Remove Help 108 VODAVI TRIAD 2 3 DIGIT EXT Remove information before installing new Figure 5 24 PBX Integration next Window If the Remove information before installing new option is selected then the previous PBX s options are removed Optional Modules Optional modules are purchased separately from the standard PathFinder software package Some of these optional modules can be configured here in the Configuration menu of MAINT If you have purchased Point to Point or Fax Options these menu choices are available for modification in the Configuration menu Refer to the Appendix C Optional Modules for more inf
19. 07 30 98 2 51 03 Engine Serial Number 900680 07 30 98 250317 enabling tcp ip inbound telnet 07 30 98 s5 AT tcpip you are known as esivmail 07 30 98 51 18 Fast function trigger rate is 50 07 30 98 51 18 Default thread priority 0 07 30 98 15218 Main process priority 0 07 30 98 51 18 Main thread priority 2 07 30 98 RE tcpip memupdates on 07 30 98 51 38 tcpip memupdates off 07 30 98 51 39 tcpip memupdates off 07 30 98 2 51 41 Hello Terminating B B B B B B B B B P P P B Figure 8 1 Error Log Example The first ten lines indicate that the voice processing engine was started correctly The last three lines indicate that the voice processing engine was terminated correctly This is just a sample your situation may be different System Maintenance Log The maintenance log is made up of separate files Each day that the MAINT application is accessed it generates a separate file The files are stored in the HELLONT LOGS directory The name of the file is MTyymmdd LOG where yy is the year mm is the month and dd is the day For example the log for May 7 1999 would be named MT990507 LOG The maintenance log file can keep track of unauthorized user access to MAINT Each time MAINT is accessed it generates log lines indicating what the maintenance user did MAINT outputs maintenance activity log lines similar to those found in the Error log 8 4 System Activity Log In general each log line h
20. Field Take a Message Description Records messages in the mailbox for later retrieval Forward to another Mailbox Sends the caller to an alternate mailbox where a message may be left The mailbox to which the caller was forwarded dictates which Notification and MWI settings apply Forward to Sends the caller to an extension The mailbox to which the Extension caller was forwarded dictates which Extension settings apply Forward to Sends the call to a menu where further options may be Menu provided to the caller Refer to Menu Settings in this chapter for more information on menus Forward to Time Control Causes PathFinder to execute the assigned time control and take the appropriate action Refer to Time Control Settings in this chapter Forward to Automatically runs another module when the mailbox is Module accessed Special applications only Mailbox is Off Disables the mailbox s ability to take messages This option plays the Mailbox is off prompt to the caller Mailbox is Full Plays a message to the mailbox owner stating the mailbox cannot record any new messages until old ones are deleted This option plays the Mailbox is full prompt to the caller User Settings 5 51 Notification Notification refers to external numbers e g pager mobile not Message Waiting Indicators Refer to Notification Settings on page 5 73 Select the type of notificati
21. The quickest way to demonstrate Point to Point s capabilities is to complete the following test procedure 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Call in to PathFinder Access a mailbox s owner functions Press 2 to send Record the message then press 1 to accept Enter the remote mailbox location number Enter the area code Enter the mailbox number then press Press to confirm Press to stop send Wait approximately one minute while the message is sent Call into the remote system Access the mailbox number to which the message was sent Press 1 to hear message After listening to the message press 5 to reply Listen to the address Press to confirm C 90 Point To Point Messaging Troubleshooting If messages are not being delivered use the following methods to diagnose and solve the problem o Make sure that the two systems are both running PathFinder and PathFinder Mailer Diagram the IP names and ports for all the connections Use telnet exe to connect to the PathFinder Mail and PathFinder Monitor applications O Check the passwords for consistency O Use Ping to see if one system can see another o Refer to Check Logs on page C 90 Check Logs You can check logs as follows O Message is sent from a subscriber s mailbox to another system C 17 18 59 803 01 H DBASE Info Remote location code 771 mail box 1221 address esihello port 10725 C 17
22. o Menu The selected menu that is the subject of the report n Time Time of day that the menu was accessed o Key Pressed The caller s key selection while in the menu Use This information may be useful to others besides the system administrator For example with the following menu Press 1 for information on product X press 2 for information on product Y the sales manager may be interested in the number of requests for each option The Menu Activity report includes the total number of requests for each menu key 6 16 Activity Reports Fax Documents If your PathFinder implementation has the optional fax support module installed and you have created a Fax On Demand application you may have discovered how confusing it can be keeping track of the fax documents The Fax Documents report handles this chore for you B Report 140 Notepad File Edit Search Help 06 14 96 15 28 42 File Name Date Be FAX Documents 777 TIF BAD TIF 1000 TIF 1100 TIF 1200 TIF 1300 TIF 2121 TIF 2122 TIF 2123 TIF 2124 TIF 2144 TIF 2241 TIF 2243 TIF 2245 TIF 2247 TIF 2249 TIF 2251 TIF 2300 TIF 12 05 94 10 27 95 62 17 95 12 09 94 63 10 95 12 15 94 12 09 94 12 09 94 12 13 94 12 09 94 12 09 94 12 12 94 12 12 94 12 12 94 12 12 94 12 12 94 12 12 94 12 13 94 Page 81 FAX Range All Time Size 10 16 05 47K 11 11 08 20K 14 06 06 161K 11 58 62 103K 10 27 27 102K 10 51 16 83K 13 56 16 145K 14 15 22
23. 1 HOLD First 1 is the table number assigned Second 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber 8 10 11 12 d Enter 8 0 9999999 HOLD 8 is the disconnect table 0is a required entry 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder Press Flash 40 Btn 4 enter the CO line range dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines To ring CO lines directly to VM program VM extensions into a UCD group in addition to the VM group UCD group programming a Press Flash 19 Btn 11 b Enter the station numbers into the UCD group then press HOLD Program CO lines to ring the UCD group a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 9 enter the UCD group number 890 then press HOLD Press Flash 90 then press HOLD to update and exit the programming mode Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 690 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button Disconnect digits are not sent for internal calls They are only sent for disconnecting CO calls when Loop Supervision is enabled 3 8 Phone System Set Up Starplus 96EX Hardware Requirements O One SIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SIB card provides eight po
24. 1 Select REPORTS 2 Then select the type of call list needed for the report Master List Call List Admin Build 50 File View El j Master List DO Group List Call List Call Results DO Members Group List or Call List The selected screen displays slal x View or print a report of the Master List View all master list records View all master list records created in the last week View all master list records created in the last month View all master list records created in the last pear Report Options JV Select only records created by AutoLogin IV Select records in Group zi Class of 2004 Teachers Sub Teachers View Report Figure C 7 Reports Master List Chalk Talk 3 Select the appropriate view master list for the time period needed n jul jul n o Select only records created by AutoLogin all records records created in the last week records created in the last month records created in the last year 4 To further define the report choose one of the following O Select records in Group groups display in drop down box 5 Click the VIEW REPORT button to display the details for the report parameters selected EXAMPLE View all master list records created by the person using the AutoLogin for a group called Teachers will produce this report gt gt m amp amp froox 7 Total 6 100 6 of 22 siel
25. Each extension is defined by the following o Extension owner Associated mailbox number o Username O Transfer options o Action options 6 22 Setting Reports Use This information is helpful in resolving problems with extensions such as transfer and forwarding problems Extension Settings Detail The Extension Settings Detail report provides more detailed information about each extension in PathFinder Data In addition to the information contained in the Extension Settings Summary report the Extension Settings Detail report provides the class of service assigned to the extension Ej Report 222 Notepad olx Ele Edt Seach Help Extension Settings Detail 4 06 14 96 15 39 29 Page 61 Extension Range 626 to 646 Extension Mailbox Name Action 626 1626 HIKE FORD Transfer to 626 Forward to Mbx 1626 COS COSHF 627 1627 DEPT SALES Transfer to 627 Forward to Mbx 1627 COS COS86 628 1356 2 OVERSTREET Forward to Mbx 1356 COS C0S61 629 1629 PIER FRIGERIO Transfer to 629 w Screen Forward to Hbx 1629 COS COSON 4 gt Figure 6 15 Extension Settings Detail Report Example Setting Reports 6 23 Use This information is helpful in resolving problems with extensions such as transfer and forwarding problems Class of Service Settings You can run a report for details on each defined class of service Data The Class of Service Settings report presents the following information
26. Figure 6 6 Usage Report Example Data The data are sorted by date and time hour and display the total number of calls inbound and outbound as well as the combined duration of all calls Activity Reports Use This report demonstrates when PathFinder is the most and least active Its uses include O Determining staffing requirements O Determining volume of after hours calls Mailbox Usage The Mailbox Usage report provides the log lines related to mailbox activity The report sorted by date tracks each time the mailbox was accessed the length of the message left and the number of times that the owner accessed the mailbox B Report 110 Notepad File Edit Search Help AmE Mailbox Activity Page 61 Date Range 66 13 96 to 66 13 96 Time Range All Mailbox Range 1626 to 1626 1626 MIKE FORD 06 13 96 1626 08 34 37 61 Log 08 34 41 61 Log 08 37 05 61 Log HIKE FORD UMail 1626 Owner 1626 VMail 1626 11626 PAUI1626 1R6 226 06 Log 281 06 Log 00 66 Log UMail 1626 Owner 1626 UMail 1626 F1626 POUI1626 R76 704 67 Log 113 66 Log 741 67 Log 734 66 Log 10 30 36 04 Log 10 31 45 65 Log 10 31 46 64 Log VMail 1626 UMail 1626 VMail 1626 UMail 1626 VMail 1626 VMail 1626 UMail 1626 UN 1 US 38 PN 6 PS 6 FN 8 FS 5 Voice Forward to Mb1618 with Orv116 To owner UN 6 US 39 PN 0 PS 6 FN 0 FS 5 Voice Forward to Mb1637 with OrvI16 Take message Take message Voic
27. General Settings Click on General in the Edit COS window to begin defining general options for the COS The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC General Description COS Description Time Control NONE M Help User Type Event Counters Callers 7 Owners Language TREE Restrict Outdial to m digits B lt Page Page 1 of 7 Page gt gt Figure 5 37 Edit COS General Settings Window Description Enter a brief description of the COS twenty characters maximum to help identify it in other operations Time Control Calls are often processed differently in the evening during the weekend or on holidays than they are during regular business hours The time control function lets you define a set of alternative actions that PathFinder performs for a given time setting Time controls are created by selecting Time Control from the Edit menu If you intend to use Time controls refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 Otherwise set to None 5 60 Class of Service Settings User Type User Type designations were used in early versions of PathFinder to grant or limit user options Set User Type to 99 only when granting system administrator access For all other subscribers this field should be set to 1 Event Counters Event Counters provide an overview of how PathFinder is used O Select the Callers check box if you want to maintain a count of mailbox extension
28. Message Type 5 64 Menu 5 64 Settings 5 63 Message Waiting 5 22 5 74 Indicator Strings 5 74 Messages Cascading 5 75 Clean Up 5 11 Count 5 65 Date Time 5 69 Length 5 65 Retention 5 65 viii Index Messages Reports 4 7 6 35 microphone 7 1 microphone gain 7 9 Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL C 1 Minimum Password Length 5 2 Minimum Record Length 5 3 Minimum Requirements 2 2 Minimum ring OFF 5 33 Minimum ring ON 5 33 minlcoff parameter 5 25 Modem 2 3 Modifying a COS 5 83 Modifying Command Files A 13 modular jacks 2 11 Module Settings 5 1 Monitor Application 7 13 Display Windows 7 15 Motherboard 2 2 Msg Pickup Allowed 5 75 multi level menu 5 85 Multiple Lines 8 8 Multiple Mailboxes 5 45 MWI Refresh 5 11 MWI Notification 4 6 5 21 My messages are not synchronized C 73 N Name 5 72 network adapter card NIO 2 18 Network Backup 8 1 Network Interface Card 2 3 NIC 2 18 No Answer 5 31 No Answer Log 8 9 No notification 5 51 Non Indexed Prompts 7 10 Non silence interval 5 26 Not Allowed 5 71 Note pad 5 72 Notification 4 6 5 7 5 12 5 51 5 72 Notification Activity 6 17 Notification Prefix 5 23 Notification Settings 5 73 Notify Interval 5 77 Notify Retries 5 77 Notify Script 5 77 Number Length to Edit 5 22 5 30 Number of Ports 2 4 Number of rings before No Answer detected 5 32 Number of rings before system answers 5 32 O offset address 2 8 Oldest Me
29. PathFinder 73 Adobe Acrobat 4 0 gt QBA Admin A Documents P fr Dialogic System Software gt Release Notes ky PathFinder Voice Processing TeleQueue Reports Eh Settings lt Fa Startup gt eJ Search gt E Internet Explorer fl Outlook Express 2 Help m Administrative Tools P Run Uy Shut Down Figure 2 3 PathFinder Start Menu Boom Box A utility used to record edit and play back PathFinder voice prompts Call List Admin For administrative use relating to the Chalk Talk optional module CodeKey Manager Shows what options are enabled on the software key Allows you to upgrade PathFinder with an unlock code Internet Fax Admin For reporting and configuring the optional internet fax module Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 53 Internet Fax Server Controls the internet fax module Maint The module used to configure the voice processing engine Onelook Controls access to the Onelook module Point to Point Controls access to the Point to Point module Q amp A Admin Allows you to set parameters for query of callers to get multiple responses and retrieve the answers from one mailbox location TeleQueue Reports Provides reports that detail the operation of the call queueing system Installation Troubleshooting The following installation problems may be solved as follows PathFinder Won t Start Check the error log file C PathFinder Logs Error Log for the following
30. Technique The most important troubleshooting technique is isolating problems Typically problems fall into four categories O Problems with the telephone system o Malfunctions in the PC hardware O Problems with the operating system O Problems with PathFinder Problems with the Telephone System Problems with the telephone system will cause problems in PathFinder during call transfers The best way to determine if the problem is with PathFinder is to eliminate the possibility that the telephone system is the problem as follows 1 Pull a telephone list from PathFinder and plug it into either an analog telephone or a test set 2 Simulate the action PathFinder should take 3 Ifthe problem remains on the analog telephone then the problem is within the telephone system 4 Ifthe problem is solved by the analog telephone then the problem may be within PathFinder 8 12 Questions amp Answers Problems with the PC Hardware and or Operating System Problems with the PC hardware or operating system manifest themselves in various ways Depending on the type of BIOS in the system hardware problems may appear at the boot up level or as an error reported by the operating system The Event Viewer Windows NT Diagnostics and Control Panel programs are useful troubleshooting tools within the Windows NT Operating System Problems with PathFinder Problems with the voice processing software are typically related to time control conf
31. V 1626 HU6 V 1626 GU6 V 1626 FE6 V 1626 7U6 V 1626 KR6 VS1626 4J6 VS1626 UI6 VS1626 FH6 VS1626 E 66 VS1626 086 03 06 96 06 07 96 05 31 96 06 05 96 05 30 96 06 05 96 05 31 96 03 11 96 05 30 96 05 36 96 04 18 96 86 07 96 11 03 19 96 12 04 10 96 15 06 04 96 06 10 96 8 49 Greetings amp Signatures 6 37 Data The following fields are displayed within this report Mailbox Mailbox owner name and mailbox number New N for new message Saved S for saved message From Mbx Mailbox message was sent from Size Message size in seconds Date Time Date and time message left O nO n non n 0 File File name of the message Use This report shows all messages that are stored on the hard drive It can help determine if messages are being stored too long or if PathFinder resources are being monopolized by any user Greetings amp Signatures The Greetings amp Signatures report allows the system administrator to determine the total amount of greetings amp signatures recorded by mailbox holders Each mailbox holder can have multiple greetings or signatures recorded Use This report is another tool that the system administrator has to analyze and control proper distribution of PathFinder resources 6 38 Customized Reports Customized Reports Customized reports provide flexibility to isolate certain assurances within the log and provide detail information For instance using custom
32. X Reply To Msgs Confirm Deletes Dial Source X Forward Msgs IX Skip Message Owner Send Options Not Allowed X Urgent X Outside Numbers X Confidential IX System Lists IK Future Send X Confirmation Owner Edit Options X _Personal Lists IK Password X Guest Mailboxes X Greeting X Auto Attendant IK Name X Note Pad X Notification X Transfer Out IK Mailbox State Delete Unheard lt Page Page 5 of 7 Page gt gt gt Figure 5 41 Edit COS Voice Mail Owner Settings Window First Time Help Check this option if you want each new subscriber prompted to record such essential parameters as a greeting a mailbox name and a password Class of Service Settings 5 69 Message Date Time PathFinder can announce the date and time that a message was received at the beginning of a message O Select Auto play to have the date and time announced automatically at the beginning of every played message If you leave this option off the subscriber must press 8 to check the date and time O Select Play entire date to have the month date and time included in every date announcement If you leave this set to off for messages received today only the time is repeated messages received yesterday include the word yesterday and the time messages received during the current week include the day of the week e g Wednesday and the time Messages received more than a week earlier include the m
33. callers will enter For example if the remote system has a mailbox number 1234 and the area code for that system is 770 then the caller would enter 7701234 Mailbox Length Enter the length of the mailbox on the remote system The voice mail module uses this number to validate the remote mailbox Examples If the area code length is 3 and the mailbox is length 4 and the caller enters 7701234 then PathFinder looks up system 770 from this list and will deliver to mailbox 1234 on that system If the area code length is 3 and the mailbox length is 3 but the caller enters 7701234 then PathFinder looks up system 770 from the list but will return an error because a mailbox number of 1234 has a length of 4 digits rather than the three digits required by the system IP Address and Port These two fields contain the IP name and port of the remote system s Onelook Point to Point Server Almost all Onelook Point to Point Servers use port 10725 Point To Point Messaging C 89 5 From the menu bar in the main MAINT window select Edit gt Class Of Service Click on Create In the COS Name field type PTP xxx where xxx is the area code for your first remote site Edit the COS to match the settings for the first remote system Repeat this for the other sites Using Point to Point Messaging Once the installation and setup configuration steps have been completed subscribers can use Point to Point messaging Test
34. error Please make sure the Sentinel key is attached and the drivers are loaded Program terminating press a key Monitor displays the following error Failed to wait for startup signal event Attach the software key activator to LPT1 on the PC Refer to Software Security Key on page 2 13 for more information Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert How Can I Be Certain I Configured My Dialogic Boards Correctly The best way to determine if your Dialogic boards are configured correctly is to use the Universal Dialogic Diagnostic Utility UDDU Run the Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM to edit configurations Do not start the UDDU while any PathFinder software is running 1 Access the UDDU program by selecting from the Start menu Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Universal Dialogic Diagnostic Utility 2 The system warns you that all Dialogic boards will be stopped select Yes 3 Select the type of board and type of tests that you would like to run Consult your Dialogic documentation for details on available tests Investigate any failure 5 Ifyou get a failure in the PC Interrupt test double check your IRQ settings on the board and in the Dialogic software 3 Phone System Integration and Setup This chapter describes the Simplified Message Desk Interface SMDI integration process and how to setup the STARPLUS and infinite phone systems Phone Sys
35. used by custom IVR modules are stored in indexed prompt files matching VOX and VDX files This means there are one or more individual prompts recordings in the VOX file with named segments in the VDX index file that indicate where each prompt begins and how long it is To play an indexed prompt segment PathFinder looks up the segment name in the VDX file to get the start location and length and plays just that portion of the prompt from the VOX file Indexed prompt files are good for applications in which there are a large number of prompts and it helps organization on the disk to keep them all together in two files instead of in many They are also beneficial when the prompts are not going to need to be re recorded while PathFinder is in use Non Indexed Prompts The list below outlines the customizable non indexed prompts that are used in PathFinder All prompts should be located in the VOX directory You can create a blank prompt with 1 byte of data to suppress certain prompts But more commonly you would record new information to replace the default prompt Boom Box Application Replacement Prompts All prompts below can be recorded using Boom Box Table 7 4 Non Indexed Customizable Prompts File Name VOPGPRE VOX Description Preamble prompt that plays in front of anumeric page Replaces Indexed File HIVOO VOX VoPagePreamble Sample s O Page message is O You havea message to
36. 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 press HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev Subscribers are defined as users with a mailbox and extension on PathFinder The subscriber does not have to use both the mailbox and or extension 3 44 Phone System Set Up Configuration Overview The MAINT application allows you to configure and control PathFinder The following menu options are available in MAINT o File O Configuration o Edit O Reports O Help This chapter gives an overview of the entire configuration procedure describes how to prepare PathFinder for configuration
37. 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD Q is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev IMPORTANT If Call Screening is used with Triad 3 then Auto Callback must be disabled in the phone system FL
38. 154K 10 17 20 4S1K 45 62 13 117K 15 09 13 113K 11 52 29 113K 12 05 02 119K 12 19 21 91K 14 17 10 114K 14 23 27 114K 14 35 06 308K 10 25 10 157K Figure 6 10 Fax Documents Report Example Activity Reports 6 17 Data The Fax Documents report provides the following information o List of all fax documents on PathFinder o Date each was created O Time each was created o Filesize Use This information can be used by the system administrator to keep track of all fax documents currently on PathFinder This can be helpful in maintaining a Fax On Demand application Notification Usage The Notification Usage report indicates the number of times a mailbox was notified REPORT 150 txt Notepad File Edit Search Help Notification Usage 04 20 99 09 26 10 Page 01 Date Range 04 16 99 to 04 20 99 Time Range All Mailbox Range 1200 to 1300 1221 SCOTT KELLY 04 16 99 1221 SCOTT KELLY 09 15 57 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 09 26 15 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 02 Line 08 04 19 99 1221 SCOTT KELLY 11 45 18 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 11 55 37 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 02 Line 08 11 57 06 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 12 07 25 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 02 Line 08 14 47 40 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 15 18 27 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 15 20 56 Command File SKELLY CF Attempt 01 Line 08 9 attempts BO ALEXANDE
39. 18 59 803 01 H DBASE Info Remote Address lt 1221 771 Ial221 es ihello 10725 gt C 17 19 06 853 01 Log VMail 100 Voice Send to Rm1221 771 with OrVI100 JG6 Sr100 skelly nt a 10725 To1221 771 Ial1221 esihello 10725 Point To Point Messaging C 91 O Local Onelook Point to Point Server receives the message from PathFinder 17 25 03 02 12 17 25 c Waiting on connection 17 25 05 02 12 17 1 lt HELO skelly_nt_a 10725 17 25 05 02 12 17 3 1 gt 250 Nice to meet you SKELLY NT A 10725 17 25 06 02 12 17 25 06 1 lt MAIL FROM 100 esisys com 17 25 06 02 12 17 25 06 SM 3 1 gt 250 OK Mail From 100 ESI SYS COM 17 25 07 02 12 17 25 07 SMTPIn 1 lt RCPT TO 100 esisys com 17 25 07 02 12 17 25 07 SMTPIn gt 250 OK Rcpt To 100 ESISYS COM 17 25 08 02 12 17 25 08 SMTPIn 1 lt DATA H NTOut VT100 U66 17 25 08 02 12 17 25 08 SMTPIn gt 250 OK H NTOut Data VT100 U66 17 25 09 02 12 17 25 09 SMTPIn 1 lt QUIT 17 25 09 02 12 17 25 09 SMTPIn 1 gt 221 Bye 17 25 09 02 12 17 25 09 SMTPIn i gt xxx Connection closed C 92 Point To Point Messaging 17 I7 17 17 I7 di 17 I7 L7 I7 I7 LF 17 I7 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 15 16 15 45 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 O Local PathFinder Onelook Point to Point Server connects to a remote site and delivers a message
40. 2 1 Generally you will use IRQ 5 If IRQ 5 is not available then use IRQ 7 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 31 7 Click OK and the following window displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Ble Fi File view Action Service Help ziz oo 5 doe HE Configured Devices on_PF82 04 AA DAID WT Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 EP TOM Bus CO Bus 0 Dialogic System Service Status Stopped The Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 is shown under D x1D Its icon has a superimposed red dot and the message at the bottom of the window indicates that the card has not been started 8 The board configuration is complete If you have multiple Dialog 4 cards repeat this procedure starting at step 3 until all cards are configured 9 To start the dialogic boards click on the Start Service icon in the toolbar identified by the green dot A brief indication will appear in the upper right of your desktop display to show the progress of the dialogic services being loaded started When complete the superimposed red dot changes to green the green icon in the toolbar is grayed out and the bottom of the window reflects Dialogic System Service Status Running 2 32 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert The illustration below shows that two dialogic cards are configured and running Dialogic Configuration Manager BEET File View Action Service Help sl ele Gl dele HE Configured Devices on_
41. 7 2 Set Port Window Convert Menu The Convert menu allows you to convert WAV files to VOX files The Convert menu can only be accessed when you have a WAV file open Help Menu The Help menu allows you to access the Help files for Boom Box These files can be accessed at any time Boom Box Application 7 5 Buttons The following buttons can be accessed from the main Boom Box window Table 7 1 Boom Box Window Buttons Button Description Play Plays the current file non indexed or prompt indexed Record Records the current file non indexed or prompt indexed Stop Stops playing or recording Edit Clicking the Edit button allows you to edit any type of prompt Refer to Edit Options on page 7 5 for more information on these options Disconnect Disconnects the phone line This is only available if working with a VOX file Add Prompt Clicking the Add Prompt button allows you to add a prompt Refer to Add Prompt on page 7 7 for more information on this option Edit Options Clicking the Edit button from the main Boom Box window allows you to edit any type of prompt J Edit olx Step Size E In Seconds Total Time p Edit Functions File Functions Stop Append Write Record Undo Read Delete Play Beginning Cut Beginning Save Exit Play Ending Cut End did Figure 7 3 Boom Box Edit Window Boom Box Application Edit F
42. Allow Default Ix Voice Help Page FAX di Message Type Message Type Menu B Message Length seconds Message Count messages Message Retention days Record Key lt Page Page 3 of 7 Page gt gt Figure 5 39 Edit COS Voice Mail Message Settings Window 5 64 Class of Service Settings Message Type PathFinder mailboxes can be used to store a variety of messages Select the types of messages to be allowed in mailboxes for this COS A single mailbox can store any combination of message types If more than one type of message is selected specify one as the default This setting applies only to inbound messages not to the notification type The types of messages that are allowed are as follows Voice Callers can record voice messages and the mailbox owner can listen to recorded voice messages Fax A caller can leave a fax directly in a subscriber s mailbox In order to retrieve a fax message a subscriber must send it to a fax machine for printing PathFinder must have fax ports in order to receive fax messages Page A caller can enter DTMF digits The mailbox owner can listen to the DTMF digits converted to regular speech or the DTMF digits can be displayed on a pager For example o A caller leaves a page message of 5557890 o Ifthe subscriber tries to retrieve this message PathFinder plays Five five five seven eight nine zero o Ifa subscrib
43. CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder Phone System Set Up infinite Mach 1 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite Mach Iin band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU Supported Features The supported features of the infinite Mach include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 37 Table 3 17 infinite Mach I Configurati
44. COS to Edt BB Edit ADMIN BASIC Select Done EED Help 2 Select COS to Edit Window 3 Click on Create in the Select COS to Edit window Enter a name for the COS template using any combination of alphanumeric characters Choose a name that describes the group of users in this COS 5 Click on Create to return to the Select COS to Edit window 5 58 Class of Service Settings 6 Highlight the COS you created and click on Select The following window displays from which you can begin defining parameters for the COS template Edit COS BASIC x Category to edit Cancel Greeting Help Ee __ Delete Mailbox Owner Notification Auto Attendant Figure 5 36 Edit COS Window for the COS named General 7 Edit the COS parameters to meet your needs as a template There are seven edit categories listed in the left side of this window Once you have selected a category you can reach another by clicking on the page controls that display at the bottom of the window Refer to the following topics for more information on each category O General Settings on page 5 59 Greeting Settings on page 5 61 Message Types Settings on page 5 63 Mailbox Caller Settings on page 5 66 Mailbox Owner Settings on page 5 68 Notification Settings on page 5 73 Auto Attendant Settings on page 5 77 Ooaqaqga oO Class of Service Settings 5 59
45. Class of Service C 49 Button 4 8 Greeting 5 62 Settings 4 6 5 56 6 23 Class of Service COS 5 48 5 56 5 62 Client C 56 Client PC C 58 Codekey Manager 2 23 2 52 COM Ports 3 1 4 6 Combining Commands A 11 Command Descriptions A 2 Command Files 5 91 5 100 5 106 A 1 Company Directory 5 91 5 100 5 106 Computer Processor 2 2 Confidential 5 67 5 71 Configuration 2 14 2 26 C 60 Hardware 2 5 Menu 4 5 Operating System 2 14 Preparation 4 1 4 2 Configure Dialogic Software 2 25 Host Information 7 14 Onelook Point to Point Server C 58 PBXPert 2 25 Confirm Deletes 5 70 Confirmation 5 71 Connect 5 31 Connection Status C 79 Convert Menu Boom Box 7 4 COS 5 56 Postfix Prompt 5 62 Prefix Prompt 5 62 Template 5 57 Counters Event 7 16 Country Specific Configuration 2 25 Cover Sheet C 37 Create a Key to Run Fax On Demand C Index iii 35 C 38 Create Range 5 45 Creating COSs 5 81 Menus 5 86 System Lists 6 3 Template Time Controls 5 94 Time Controls 5 95 Users 5 40 Current Drivers 2 7 Custom 5 13 Customizable non indexed Prompts 7 10 Customization Parameters 3 3 D Daily Log 6 32 Debugging 8 7 Default Gateway 2 19 Default Hook Switch State 2 8 Defining Parameters 4 2 Definition 5 56 Delete COS 5 83 Menu 5 87 Message 5 76 Range of Mailboxes 5 56 Registry Item 5 36 Single User 5 55 System List 6 6 Time Control 5 101 Unheard 5 73 User 5 55 Department 5 47 Description 5 59 5 88 6 3 C 88
46. Distribution Files type or browse to select location Click Continue then follow on screen instructions When returned to the Network Settings dialog box select Add In the window that displays click on the down arrow to the right of the Apple Talk Protocol entry for a list of choices Select TCP IP Protocol and Related Components then click on Continue Click OK and the TCP IP Configuration window displays Enter the IP address o If you are on a network enter the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway supplied by your network administrator o If you are ona standalone system type the following values IP Address 128 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 When installation is complete the Network Settings window displays 2 20 Install PathFinder Software 11 Click OK to add the Streams Environment and TCP IP to the Registry 12 When prompted if you want to restart select Restart Now 13 After restarting check the Event Viewer to make sure that all network drivers and protocols loaded properly After the restart the adapter and or Streams Environment are installed and ready for operation You can now continue with PathFinder installation Install Streams Windows 2000 When networking software is installed via the Windows 2000 operating system the streams environment is automatically configured Install PathFinder Software You will install PathFinder software from the installation CD You must also ins
47. Do always The action always takes place Only available for Action 2 and Action 3 O Only on busy Instructs PathFinder to use this option if the transfer results in a busy signal This option must be used in conjunction with the Only on no answer or Do always options Only available for Action 2 and Action 3 O Only on no answer Instructs PathFinder to use this option if the transferred call is not answered Only available for Action 2 and Action 3 You may also conditionally invoke Action 3 when the above conditions existed for the Action 2 transfer User Settings 5 55 User Edited Features In addition to the options described in this section individual users subscribers can edit certain mailbox features over the telephone The options that subscribers can modify are defined in the Class of Service Refer to Class of Service Settings on page 5 56 for more information Subscribers can refer to the PathFinder User s Manual for more information about editing available features Deleting Users Users Subscribers may be deleted individually or in ranges After a subscriber has been deleted the corresponding mailbox extension parameters and settings are erased The number can be reused only after it has been recreated with the Create User function Any voice files associated with the mailbox are automatically deleted when the mailbox is deleted Deleting a Single User The Delete User function is used to delete a
48. ESI 662 1504 1 61 61 61 61 Mo 1 HANITE 595 2 05 27 05 27 Mo 1 HANITE 595 3 67 04 07 04 Th 1 HANITE 595 4 09 02 09 02 Mo 1 MnNITE0595 5 11 28 11 29 ThFr 1 HANITE 595 6 12 24 12 24 Tu 12 00 23 59 1 MnNITEG595 7 12 25 12 25 MWe 1 HANITE 595 8 12 29 12 29 Fr 12 00 23 59 1 MNNITE 6595 9 MoTulleThFr 08 00 17 00 O HnNAINGS95 v Figure 6 18 Time Control Settings Report Example 6 26 Setting Reports Data This report gives information on the following data Time Control name Description Date Day Time O On n no n Action Use Use this report to review the various time control settings It can be helpful in planning new time controls and maintaining those currently on PathFinder Registry Settings Summary The Registry Settings Summary report identifies the various registry settings Setting Reports 6 27 Data This report provides a system wide overview of current Registry settings Report 261 Notepad Ox File Edit Search Help Registry Settings Summary 06 14 96 15 42 49 Range All AabFirstkey AaBlindDelay61 AaBlindDelay63 faDialPrefix63 faDialPrefix 7 AaDialPrefix16 faGetBusy 63 faGetNoAnswer 63 faGetRe ject 63 faMwiClr 63 fatwiSet 3 fa0perator faPcBusyiCount faPcBusyiFrg1 faPcBusyiFrgiDy faPcBusy1Frq2 faPcBusy1Frq2Du fAaPcBusy10FF Figure 6 19 Registry Settings Summary Report Example Use This is a comprehensive report that includes all system settin
49. If you need to change these parameters you can modify the SMDI INI file refer to SMDI INI File on page 3 4 From the Start menu select Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt MAINT SMDI integrations require two auxiliary lines The first is used for Message Manager the second to process the SMDI packets from the telephone system Follow these steps to configure the auxiliary line a Fromthe MAINT menu bar select Configuration gt System Settings gt Auxiliary Tasks b Make sure that there is no event group selected c Click Add to adda new task this new task must be the second task d Inthe Name field select SMDISV e When you are finished click on Accept From the main MAINT window click the Lines button in the toolbar Make sure that the PBX entry for each of the lines is SMDI Create the necessary mailbox and extension numbers From the main MAINT window select Configuration gt Telephony Settings gt MWI Notification Set the message waiting indicators Set and Clear values to SMDI Bring up the system and test the integration as needed Phone System Integration Protocols 3 3 Adding Registry Variables These options correspond to registry variables that can be added to PathFinder by following these steps 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt MAINT to open the MAINT application 2 From the menu bar select Configuration gt Registry
50. L System Cclass Of Service Voice Insert System Add On Greeting Length sec Park and Page active YesL nol Callers Stop Record Key Record Options On YesL NoL Send Options Lino Options Llurgent Lconfidential Cast Option On or Off Maintenance Settings First Time Help circle one YesL Noll Say Date and Time type Message Order First in First Out Cast In First Out Owner Play Options save Messages Forward Messages Dial Source JcConfirm Delete Reply To Messages skip Messages Owner Send Options CINot Allowed do not allow the following options Clurgent Future Delivery Confidential system List outside Number JConfrmation Installation Forms B 5 CLASS OF SERVICE COS INFORMATION continued COS Name number Description Owner Edit Options ClPassword CDelete Message Sent Auto Attendant LGreeting IMailbox State INotepad O Name Signature Personal Lists Ctransfer Out CINotification Guest Mailboxes Notification Settings When will the system set Message Waiting Message Wait Set Sequence special use Message Wait Clear Sequence special use Event Handler Group special use default is set to 5 Voice Notification Options L Password Required Ll message Pick Up Allowed Cascading When will Cascade occur Llurgent Only Option Cascade Message Save amp Delete Options Save as New LIDelete Original save Original Notification Interval minutes Notification Attempts number of tries
51. N N n 5 21 Hang Up Dete HOR ese se sissies N de AR de ES kk Gee Nek de 5 23 Transfer Settings oe de eN ie ee EE ee Ee Ge ee 5 30 Eie EE AE EE 5 32 Perfect Call is RES ee eN ee GE oe es ee ed 5 33 Other MAINT Set ds ss N N Ge ee eke 5 34 Are If leg PG N N 5 34 Optional Modules GEE ee ee EIS GR oe ee Ee ek ede 5 35 RAAISEL se ee ve N ee ac ee eedeaate 5 36 R gistry Mantena NCE ses ede es eie Rd ee Ee 5 36 User SettiNgs Ese es ee ed aaa eg vee ee ee 5 40 Creating USCS de OG ee ee ee 5 40 Editing User Setups se de se Ek See de Re Oe 5 46 User Edited Features Ee tere ee ie 5 55 D l ting do AE EE EE EO EE 5 55 Class f Service SeltINGS se EE EE 5 56 DETINITION ER a o EE Si NNN 5 56 iv Contents General settings ee N Ge ee ee Ge Ge 5 59 Greeting SEUNS ese asie Le ee ee bee eende ene goe ie 5 61 Message Types Settings seksies skeerders koes kere gegee en 5 63 Mailbox Caller Settings RE EG GE Ge ie 5 66 Mailbox Owner Settings sesse seen see seek Gee ee Rek Ge eek Gee Reg Gee AE 5 68 Notification Settings se EO EG Ge ee 5 73 Auto Attendant Settings sessie GANG ese Ek Geskei ER Ne 5 77 Creating a COS EE SA ee ee ee was 5 81 Modifying OS acces N ED N asdis iain 5 83 Deleting AOS ME N EE N 5 83 YET Pe ee ie EE EE EE N 5 83 Designing Mens seine ee Ge de dee de de 5 84 Creating a VSI soes os RE ee ee eg 5 86 Deleting a Men see ie Re oe ik ee ei ke 5 87 Editing MERE eo ke de Ge 5 87 Time Control Setting S EE KO EE RE EG Ee ie 5 93 Se
52. NT 4 0 or higher Software Installation To install the software required for PathFinder operation follow these steps Each option in the setup menu has a dialog box at the bottom of the screen that provides more information about that option Install PathFinder Software Install Pathfinder Software Windows NT 1 Make sure the software key is installed Refer to Software Security Key on page 2 13 for more information 2 Insert the PathFinder CD into your CD ROM drive 3 From the Start menu select Run 2 22 Install PathFinder Software 4 Inthe Open field type lt Your CD ROM Drive Letter gt setup exe and click on OK Run 2x Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open diseupee O d Cancel Browse Figure 2 2 Run Window 5 Inthe Welcome window click Next Read the Software License Agreement then click Yes at the end of the document 7 Select Components Click All to select all then click Next 9 Select PathFinder Server Components If PathFinder server is selected you are prompted to select which of the PathFinder components you would like to install 10 Select only the options that apply or are specified in the order and click on Next to continue 11 Indicate the destination folder as C HELLONT if the installation is an upgrade or C PathFinder if the installation is new then click Next to cont
53. Name Carpio x eae root Group 2 Class of 2003 gt Wilma ID 100001 Carpino Group 3 None 7 Carpenter Language Spanish P User ese Phone Number 602 443 7889 lannitelli Dubner Cancel Ifeula Harrision a EE EE Dryfhout Art 623 559 7724 510085 x 22tecords Add Properties Remove Exit Figure C 9 Database Master List Entry Screen A GROUP must be added prior to adding a member to the Master List Chalk Talk 4 Complete the desired fields then click the ADD button to create a new entry in the database or Change the existing data entry and click UPDATE when finished Each person can be a member of up to three groups GROUPS To delete add or change Group settings 1 Click the DATABASE button 2 Then click GROUPS to bring up the list of groups The Group List Entry dialog window displays amp Call List Admin Build 50 File view Create E dit Remove entries for the Group List Class of 2001 F Class of 2002 Group List Entr E Class of 2003 ui Master List Class of 2004 x Name English Math diy None Groups Students Cancel Sub Teachers Teachers Group List Entry 4 Name Class of 2001 oe i 10 records Figure C 10 Database Group List Entry Screen 3 Add or change the name of the group then click OK C 20 Chalk Talk USERS A user must first be set up with admin privileges before they
54. Now test your setup To see the real power of TeleQueue you will need to have many people call into the system at the same time The first caller will be transferred to the first available extension Each caller after that will be queued according to which call was answered first C 108 TeleQueue Sample Logs QuickCommand lt command sequence gt 08 02 46 08 02 31 B CSS 4521 1aTOUE script lt H TELEQ gt param lt 111 gt 08 02 46 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 Caller Start Position 1 08 02 47 08 02 43 B CSS 4521 8aTQUE script lt H TELEQ gt param lt csrmaint 08 02 57 H TELEQ CallTime 1642 CallResult 8 lt amp 4585 gt 08 02 58 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4585 No Answer 08 02 59 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4586 is 2 08 03 01 H TELEQ CSR 4585 set to 2 by CSR 08 03 01 08 02 43 HITELEO csrmaint HITELEO CsrMaint Csr Status 4585 r 08 03 01 011 Sys Blockage Cleared Group 1 08 03 01 08 02 43 08 03 02 011 Sys Blockage Detected Group 2 08 03 03 H TELEQ CallTime 407 CallResult 10 lt amp 4587 gt 08 03 04 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4587 Answered 08 03 04 08 02 19 H TELEQ 111 H TELEQ TQ111 startpos 0 ca4585 8 ca4587 10 08 03 04 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 CSR Caller Out 08 03 04 08 02 19 connect 4587 08 03 19 08 03 02 B CSS 4521 1aTOUE script lt H TELEQ gt param lt 111 gt 08 03 19 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 Caller Start Position 1 08 03 29 01 08 03 24 B CSS 4521 8aTQUE script lt H TELEQ gt param lt csrmaint 08 03 37 01 HITELEO CSR
55. Numeric message N A O beep beep beep for a particular extension 7 12 Boom Box Application Table 7 4 Non Indexed Customizable Prompts Continued File Name Description Replaces Sample s P Indexed File P lt COS gt PDN Numeric message N A Busy signal or some type of done prompt completion tone Prompt played after the caller enters the numeric page lt COS gt GRT COS Greeting N A You have reached the sales Played if COS is set department Please leave a to play the COS message after the tone greeting lt COS gt VI1 COS Voice Insert N A You have reached the voice played before mailbox of mailbox name lt COS gt VI2 COS Voice Insert N A Please leave a message played after after the tone mailbox name lt COS gt LOP COS Last options HIXXO VOX Press one to reach another VmLastOptions mailbox Press nine to disconnect DIRGETDI VOX Prompt asking for HIXXO VOX Enter the first four characters lookup digits in DirGetDigits of the person s last name For O directory press seven For Z press nine AAINSTR VOX Auto Attendant HIXXO VOX Enter the extension number of instructions Aalnstructions the person you are trying to reach For the company directory press the star key To reach an operator press zero AAHVCALL VOX Prompt H XX0 VOX You have a call announcing that an AaHaveCall extension has a call AAHOLD O to Ho
56. Pager Retries YesL Noll Notification Script special use default is Pager12 CF Auto Attendant Settings Call Options ind Transfer call Screening Ll Supervised Transfer call Holding Hold Interval sec Hold Type Call Queing YesL NoL Screen Length sec Play Original YesL nol Transfer Prefix Transfer Postfix Installation Forms B 6 MENU INFORMATION Day Complete one copy of this form for each Menu Description Number Password Time Control special use Instructions special use This is the Menu s number VOX file name for prompts Time Out sec Max Retries number of retries before hangup Keys Actions including additional parameters mailbox numbers menu numbers etc Prompt script for this mailbox to be recorded via Administrator Installation Forms B 7 MENU INFORMATION Night Complete one copy of this form for each Menu Description Number Password Time Control special use Instructions special use This is the Menu s number VOX file name for prompts Time Out sec Max Retries number of retries before hangup Keys Actions including additional parameters mailbox numbers menu numbers etc Prompt script for this mailbox to be recorded via Administrator Installation Forms B 8 TIME CONTROL SETTINGS Complete one copy of this for each Time Control Time Control Name Number Description System Searches for a match seq
57. PlayMailboxGreeting Plays the Standard mailbox greeting for the global mailbox lt Command gt lt Command gt DebugOff Turns CommFile This writes debugging information to the daily log debugging on and off files AbortlfNoNewVoMsgs Aborts command if no new messages or new urgent messages are in file the global mailbox MsgSourceOk Branch to run if a new message has been forwarded to your mailbox Related Commands DialMsgSource DialMsgSource Dials digits in Msg Source if a message is forwarded to your mailbox the Command file sends the originating mailbox number Version Sets a local variable indicates the version of the Command File A 10 Quick Commands Quick Commands QuickCommand lt command sequence gt Quick commands allow you to replace the longer command strings above with shorter mnemonic described below Additionally processing of the command file is much faster when using mnemonics Both the Dw Tw and Dp commands are preloaded so that the information page file or the mailbox s Where field is loaded and the complete QuickCommand executes very quickly Quick Command Descriptions Table A 2 Quick Command Descriptions Command Description Qu Quit On OnHook Of OffHook SI Sleep requires one digit seconds SI5 Sleep 5 SI5SI5 Sleep 10 Dw DialMailboxWhere Dp DialMailboxBeeperFile dials pager file
58. Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is th
59. Refer to Appendix A for more information on how to configure PathFinder to play messages to the caller during notification O Set to Password Required to force the owner to enter a password to retrieve messages O Set to Msg Pickup Allowed to allow message retrieval without password entry Allowing message pick up without a password can undermine the privacy and security of the mailbox Message Cascading This powerful option gives PathFinder great flexibility in delivering a message Any incoming message depending on the cascade setting can be copied or forwarded to other mailboxes Refer to Cascade To on page 5 50 for more information about configuring cascading options When Message Cascading is activated either the message itself or a copy of the message also automatically cascades to another mailbox Refer to Original Message on page 5 76 for selecting options to decide what happens to the original message in the primary mailbox Use the following guidelines to set Message Cascading options O Set to Off to turn this option off O Set it to Immediate to cause cascading to begin immediately allowing the message to be copied or forwarded to another mailbox As an example if the Message Cascading option is set to Immediate notification then the following process occurs o Mailbox A gets a message O Mailbox A has notification activated o The message immediately cascades to Mailbox B 5 76 Cla
60. Search Help Nenu Settings 06 14 96 15 41 10 Henu Range 1MENU to 6FLHOURS Henu Description Password Introduction Body 1HENU menu when you get pr 2275 TMENU HUX TimeOut 5 Actions Time Out Menu DEMO Max Retries Hang Up Disconnect Caller Invalid Key Menu DEMO Menu DENO Extension START Extension START Extension START Extension START Extension START Extension START Extension START Extension START Retries 9 ONAN EON oH Time Control Instruction lel Es Page 61 Figure 6 17 Menu Settings Report Example Data The following information is presented for each menu o Menu name O Key actions The action assigned to each key on the telephone keypad refer to Key Action Definitions on page 5 90 for more information Setting Reports 6 25 Use The purpose of this report is to describe all of the menu settings ina simple and easy format You can easily determine how the key actions of your menus are configured Time Control Settings The Time Control Settings report lists options for the selected time controls Report 250 Notepad olx File Edt Search Help Time Control Settings 06 14 96 15 42 16 Page 01 Range 24HR_JAR to OPERATOR Description nn dd mn dd Day of Week hh mm hh mm Tp Action 24HR_JAR Rice s 24 hr Chain ESIDEHO Demo day amp night 07 04 07 04 HnNITE 6595 MoTuWeThFr 08 00 17 00 MnMAING595 1 HnNITE0595 ESI_HAIN Main
61. Start Extension field enter the a corresponding extension number to be used for the first extension in the mailbox range When creating a range numbers are sequentially assigned to both mailboxes and extensions Therefore the Start Mailbox and Start Extension fields should correlate somehow as in this example O Start Mailbox 100 O Start Extension 100 or O Start Mailbox 2100 O Start Extension 100 5 Ifyou have created a mailbox to be used as a template for default settings in all mailboxes for this range select it from the drop down list If you do not want to use a template delete any entry that appears in the Template field 6 For Number to create enter the number of mailboxes you want to create beginning with the starting mailbox and extension 7 Click on Create Range This returns you to the Select User to Edit window where you can continue defining mailbox and extension parameters refer to Editing User Setups on page 5 46 Editing User Setups The Edit Mailbox function is used to make changes to the settings and parameters of existing mailboxes Note that to edit mailbox parameters a mailbox must have previously been created with the Create or Create Range function as described earlier General User Settings To edit general user subscriber settings perform the following steps 1 If the Select User to Edit window is not already displayed click on the Users icon in the toolbar the leftmost ico
62. Talk C 3 Notify employees and students of school closings or emergencies Locate and schedule substitute teachers Outbound Calling Chalk Talk automatically calls each student and faculty member with an official message announcing the closing and or the state of emergency Automates the daily task of finding substitute teachers Just select the group list for the substitute teachers you need and let chalk Talk call the possible candidates Once an interested teacher is found Chalk Talk asks for a confirmation of acceptance such as a teacher ID or a voice mail message Chalk Talk will continue calling until all the positions are full So if you need three Math teachers Chalk Talk will continue calling until three Math teachers accept the assignment Chalk Talk also has the ability to run multiple lists simultaneously If you need a History teacher and an English teacher on the same day you can run both groups at the same time Homework Hotline Student Activity Hotline Homework Assignment Information Students and parents can access the home work hotline for the latest assignments by entering the unique class ID number supplied to each class Updating the assignments is as easy as recording a message and can be done by the teacher from any telephone A 24 hour hotline for student sporting events clubs and after school activities Automated messaging can be kept accurate and complete by allow
63. The Call List Admin screen will display Chalk Talk C 7 Starting Call List Admin To manually start the Chalk Talk Desktop Admin application select Start gt Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt Call List Admin the Call List Admin screen will display Call List Admin Build 50 MIE File View Create a new call list or modify an existing one m ID Description Priority Stat Date Start Time End Time On Off 1 Modify Figure C 1 Call List Admin Screen DATA ENTRY TIP This pushpin icon appears on certain data entry screens Its function is to keep the current screen open until multiple entries are completed and accepted OK DONE etc RI side view for single entries Q top view for multiple entries C 8 Chalk Talk Call List Process Flow The following diagram shows the sequential order for setting up and activating a Call List Reports After a Group has been set up open Call List Admin E Master List T 1 select Database Groups j 2 choose Master List then enter call list members teachers students etc i 3 select Call Lists On Off h 4 choose Modify then add Call List Modify 5 choose On Off then double click on name to active Call List 6 click Exit when finished Figure C 2 Call List Process Flow Chalk Talk C 9 Call List Options Once the Call List Admin appl
64. Tone Template Description Bell amp Enhanced ROLM reorder tone lore D 41D D 41E or Tone ID Repeat Count m Frequency 1 Hz 7 115 Edge Rise Fall Frequency 2 0 Ha o Tone Events On Time x10ms Off Time x10ms Options xX Set Wait Set Hang up Figure 5 19 Add Tone Template Window In order to determine what entries to make in the Add Tone Template window use PBXpert to learn the disconnect tone Telephony Settings For each tone template that you either edit or add complete the fields in this window as follows Field Description Description Type a description that can help you remember this tone template s purpose Tone ID Enter a number from 101 to 120 following the previous tone template in numeric sequence Repeat Count Should be set to 0 for continuous tones For cadences it should be the number of times that the pattern should cycle on off Edge Select Rise if this is a leading edge tone select Fall if this is a trailing edge tone Typically this value will be set to Rise Frequency 1 Specify the first frequency of the tone always included in Hz Hz Specify the maximum deviation from the first frequency in Hz Frequency 2 Specify in Hz the second frequency if the tone is a dual tone if the tone is a single tone set this field to 0 Hz Specify the maximum deviation from the second frequency in Hz NOTE Sing
65. a facsimile machine Basically the Fax On Demand database functions as follows 1 The system administrator sends facsimile documents into PathFinder 2 The system administrator gives each document a document number and records a voice prompt describing the document 3 Callers then can request each document by number or after hearing the description and PathFinder sends each requested facsimile document Fax Support C 35 Configuration When Fax Options are enabled on PathFinder you receive both Fax Mail and Fax On Demand applications To configure PathFinder for facsimile options you must do the following 1 Purchase the facsimile option 2 Install the facsimile hardware according to the Dialogic documentation Facsimile Hardware The first step in setting up any facsimile application is to install the necessary facsimile hardware Please refer to the Hardware Installation amp Configuration chapter in the System Administrator Manual for details on configuring facsimile hardware Fax On Demand There are a number of things you must do in order to set up a facsimile application The following steps illustrate what is required to set up a Fax On Demand application but these steps also can be used when creating other facsimile applications or when enabling mailboxes to receive and store facsimile messages These steps are outlined in the typical order that you should follow when setting up an application Fax
66. amp INI File 1 N p 9 Select from the Start menu Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Tone Features Make certain Disconnect Tone Supervision and Tone Set File Enabled are selected Choose the correct tone file from the Dlgcdev Dialogic Data directory The TSF Tone Set File name is a combination of the PBX Manufacturer and Model number Click OK Select from the Start menu Programs gt Windows NT Explorer Double click on the HELLONT directory Double click on HELLONT INI This opens the HELLONT INI file in Notepad Find the VoiceHardware section Go to the bottom of the section and type use perfect callsl Save the file and exit Software Overview This installation adds software to your PC Some of this software is discussed below Each application listed in the Voice Processing program group on the Start menu is described below Some of the applications displayed in the Start menu s Programs group are optional modules that are purchased separately All of the following application names display even if you 2 52 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert have not purchased the corresponding module s but you cannot access an optional module unless you have unlocked it on your software key Boombox Call List Admin CodeKey Manager Internet Fax Admin Internet Fax Server OEOLOHEaR Windows Update Maint Onelook Point to Point Server a Programs fr Accessories gt
67. by keeping track of the current users who have leases to use Onelook The POP Onelook Lease status window can be retrieved by going back to the main menu and selecting POP gt Leases from the menu bar Onelook Point to Point Server C 83 Master Click on the Master tab to see the following window Connection Status Build 37 Of x SMTP In SMTP Qut POP Master Log Master Enable Disable V a 8 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 SSeS SSS eee ee ee eee SASS N NON P D N NON N N N N BEKER ER OR EE KOR DR KOR KOR ER DA OR Ke ge pe PRP MENEER RR NE EE ERROR KOEKE KOR OR KOR EE Ke ee r COOCOO MEER OR RR ER RR Ke EE KOR DR Ke Ee Ka se Figure C 43 Connection Status Master Tab The Connection Status window s Master tab allows you to view all activity on the system interleaved chronologically Troubleshooting O Examine log files in HELLONT HNTMAIL LOGS log O Make sure TCP IP is installed o Make sure HELLONT section settings in HELLONT HNTMAIL HNTMAIL INI are correct o Make sure all services SMTPIn SMTPOut POP are enabled in HELLONT HNTMAIL HNTMAIL INI o Make sure PathFinder Engine HELLONT EXE is running C 84 Point To Point Messaging O Make sure remote PathFinder systems are running correctly for Point To Point O Make sure Onelook clients are installed and configured correctly for Onelook unified messaging O Make sure Onelook client
68. call begin prompt Played when mailbox is set to take numeric messages FXDMND1 VOX Prompt played N A O You have reached the Vodavi before FxInstruct1 fax on demand line Please note or FXDMND2 VOX that document 411 is a catalog that can be used to of available fax documents give the caller more information FXDMND2 VOX Tells callers how HIFAXO VOX O You will be prompted to select many fax prompts FxInstruct1 and which documents should be they can select Fxlnstruct2 faxed You may select up to X fax documents VMINSTR VOX Voice mail H XX0 VOX O Enter the mailbox number of instructions VmiInstructions the person you are trying to prompt reach Press zero for the operator Press the star key for the directory VMSYSGRT VOX First system HIXX0 VOX O The person you have tried to greeting Played if VmSysGreeting reach is not available Please selected in COS leave a message after the tone VMSYSGR2VOX Second system HIXX0 VOX O Begin speaking atthetone greeting Played if VmSysGreeting2 When you are finished selected in COS recording you may hang up or press any key for more options VMRECKEY VOX Asks caller to press HIXXO VOX O Press one to start recording a key to start VmRec Key recording VMRECOPT VOX Record option H XX0 VOX O To send message press one to prompt VmRecordOption play press two to cancel press three lt COS gt PBG
69. can select report parameters and generate call reports To add change or delete User settings 1 Click the DATABASE button 2 Then click USERS to bring up a list of valid users 3 Click ADD or PROPERTIES the Add User dialog window displays 3 Call List Admin Build 50 Ioj x File View Call Lists Create Edit Remove entries for the User List Database Douglas Eldridge Terry Cavazos Master List Groups User Name i J Admin rights Password Password again ema Zrecords i i Properties Remove Exit Figure C 11 Add User Screen 4 For a new user type in the name and password To allow the user to modify User List reports click ADMIN RIGHTS Or For an existing user make the necessary changes 5 Click OK when finished Chalk Talk C 21 Flow of Outbound Call The following table describes common outbound call conditions and their responses Table C 2 Outbound Call Responses Call Condition System Response Unable to connect to called Reschedule the call based on timer settings number O Delay in minutes before call back atempts O Number of attempts PathFinder will call Introduction Prompt is defined Play prompt the designated number of times to play Play ID is selected O Play prompt if present then play ID 0011 or 1011 O Repeat as defined A Confirmation is required O Play prompt and wait for digits designated number of seconds 0022 or 1
70. click OK System Reports 6 7 System Reports Reports Overview The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder The following sections describe the Reports menu in MAINT which includes options related to the following PathFinder activity Reports settings PathFinder directory PathFinder logs Messages Greetings amp Signatures Customized reports Reporting setup Oooadaaaca a PathFinder provides you with the ability to generate a variety of reports for diagnostic and information purposes Reports can help diagnose problems allocate resources and improve PathFinder s efficiency This chapter discusses the various reports that can be output by PathFinder and how best to utilize them Reports Criteria Reports criteria are used to select specific data when generating a report To generate any of the PathFinder reports select the report type from the Reports menu A window displays in which you select the criteria appropriate to the particular report The active fields available for selection criteria depend upon the report being generated 6 8 System Reports Dialog Box Options Date Enter the complete start and stop dates which must be in MM DD YY format e g for November 21 2001 enter 11 21 01 If the date fields are left blank Maint selects all records with any date Time Enter the complete start and stop times in 24 hour format HH MM SS If left blank Maint selects all records
71. command should be on a single line For example to dial a number and Quit the file must look like this Dial 9 17701234567 Quit When typed as follows the file does not work Dial 9 17701234567 Quit Guidelines Only the commands listed below may be used Any other lines are discarded o Ifa line starts with the semicolon character then the rest of the line is ignored For example the command Dial 9 17701234567 is ignored by PathFinder because of the semicolon in the beginning of the line O Inthe list below items in brackets lt and gt are variables and represent strings that you must supply In the Command Descriptions below we describe what type of variable to use For example Call lt DIMFString gt means that the command string uses a DTMF String to determine what number to call A DTMF string is a series of DTMF tones like pressing keys on a telephone key pad o Anytime a lt Mailbox gt or lt Extension gt appears leaving it out causes the command file to use the global mailbox and extension Typically the global mailbox or extension is the last mailbox or extension accessed by PathFinder A 2 Command Files Command Descriptions Table A 1 Command Descriptions Command String Quit Quits this command file Action Description PathFinder then puts the line on hook and prepare for another call Typically this is the last line in the file because it ends the command
72. configuration is complete If you have multiple VFX cards repeat this procedure starting at step 4 until all cards are configured 11 To start the dialogic boards click on the Start Service icon in the toolbar identified by the green dot A brief indication will appear in the upper right of your desktop display to show the progress of the dialogic services being loaded started When complete the superimposed red dot changes to green the green icon in the toolbar is grayed out and the bottom of the window reflects Dialogic System Service Status Running 2 40 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert Upgrading From Previous Version If you are upgrading from a previous version of PathFinder you must uninstall the previous version of Dialogic software To remove the older version of software please follow these steps 1 Locate the DIALOGIC CFG file The default location is DLGCDEV DIALOGIC CFG 2 Copy the DIALOGIC CFG to a floppy diskette 3 Uninstall the existing version of the Dialogic System Software 4 Install the new version of the Dialogic System Software 5 Copy the DIALOGIC CFG from the floppy to the DLGCDEV DIALOGIC CFG directory Removing a Board To remove a board from the configuration follow these steps 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM Click on the Stop Service icon in the toolbar red stop sign Highlight th
73. delete it After you select the item click on Delete PathFinder prompts you to confirm that you want to delete the item Other MAINT Settings 5 37 Add or Edit Registry Item The Edit function of the Registry window provides you with the ability to select a specific item from the Registry list and edit it Occasionally changes necessitate adding items to the Registry This may occur if new applications are added through new software modules or if existing modules are changed or upgraded EDIT After you select the item click on Edit PathFinder displays the Edit Registry Item window where the changes can be made Refer to Registry Item Fields on page 5 39 for more information on making these changes Name LineRestartDelay vawe B Default Description Engine parameter Type F Defaults X Reloadable INI Parameter l Write Empty INI File Settings INI File INI Section General 1 Figure 5 26 Edit Registry Item Window Other MAINT Settings ADD To add a Registry item click on Add in the Registry window PathFinder displays the Add Registry Item window where the changes can be made Refer to Registry Item Fields on page 5 39 for more information on making these changes Add Registry items only under the direction of Vodavi technical support staff or your PathFinder dealer Figure 5 27 Add Registry Item Window
74. does not match the extension number they should at least correspond in some way that helps the subscriber remember the mailbox number For example mailbox 1213 could be assigned for extension 213 Template Users Subscribers When creating mailboxes and extensions it is likely that you will have many users subscribers with the same features For example many subscribers will have the same Class of Service initial password and mailbox settings Creating a template user is a convenient way to create identical mailboxes A template user is a subscriber profile that is representative of the settings for most users or most users in a given group and is used as a model for creating other users Follow these steps to create a template user subscriber 1 Click on the Users icon in the toolbar the leftmost icon Alternatively you can also select from the menu bar Edit gt Users gt Show List The following window displays Select User to Edit Mailbox Extension Name Select DOE JOHN JONES MARY Done SHITH BOB WRIGHT KIM Help BINKS ZACHARY BLACK JANET Create Range Delete Range Sort by Name Extension Mailbox Figure 5 28 Select User to Edit Window 5 42 User Settings 2 Click on the Create Users button The following window displays x Create Users Mailbox _ Extension ss FirstName LastName ___ O Add User to List Greate Users Bemove Us
75. eek ee RR Ge Re C 88 xiv Figures Tables Tables Minimum System Requirements ssssssssssesssssssssseeseseeesessssnsueeseerteeeesessseureeeeeesessseseeeeee 2 2 Optional PC Equipment Se Ge N Ge Ge Ge Ge Ge ne 2 3 Jump Board Configuration asses ese enge Re ge n oes en one e kde 2 9 SMDI Defaults ss Re ed ee GE ea a etaareeeneeteaaiess 3 3 Starplus 2448 EX Configuration Setup iuee sesse sesse ee ee ek een ee ek ee Ge Ge ee 3 7 Starplus 96EX Configuration Setup uuee sesse sen see ee ee RR Re eek ee Ge Gee 3 9 Starplus SPD 612 Configuration Setup uie sesse ee RR Re Rek eek ee RR 3 11 Starplus SPD 1428 Configuration Setup sssssssssssssseeseesssssssscesseessssesssssesseeeserse 3 13 Starplus SPD 2856 Configuration Setup sssssssssssssseeseesssssssseesserssssesssssesseressess 3 15 Starplus SPD 4896 Configuration Setup ssssssssssssseeeseessssssssecsseessssronsssessreeseess 3 17 Starplus DHS Configuration Setup csssssssssssssssssssssssseessscssesssssecsseesscsscensesseess 3 19 Starplus Triad S Configuration Setup use sesse sense en sek Gee Gee ee ee RR ee Gee ee 3 21 Starplus Triad 1 Configuration Setup uses see seek ee see eek Ge RR eek eek ee Gee 3 23 Starplus Triad 2 Configuration Setup uses see seek se ee eek Ge ee eke Rek ee eke 3 25 Starplus Triad 3 Configuration Setup uses see seek se see eek Ge eke eek ee eke 3 27 infinite 4096 Configuration Setup ius see see seeks Ge ER ER
76. either record voice or wait for DTMF digits Length of Response When recording voice this field shows the number of seconds recorded For DTMF input field shows the maximum number of digits Terminating Digit For DTMF digits you can specify the terminating digit if used 3 Click OK when finished To delete highlight the desired questionnaire then click the DELETE button The item is removed from the list and can not be retrieved 5 To add click the ADD button The Create New Question screen displays O Complete all necessary fields o To add a question click OK The Create New Question screen displays O Complete the question attributes then click OK when finished After creating a questionnaire the next step is to link it to a menu Then place a call into the system and record the prompts Linking a Questionnaire to a Menu Forthe Homework Hotline to be called from an opening menu complete the following steps 1 Start the MAINT application 2 Select Edit gt Menus 3 Select the menu you want to be connected to the application C 30 Chalk Talk 4 Select the key on the menu 0 9 or that will start the Homework Hotline or the digit to be dialed Key 4 Action Record Prompts Change Language Hang Up Figure C 16 Start Homework Hotline Screen MAINT App 5 For Key Action select Run ActiveVex For the Progld parameter type AVQA Run 1
77. elapses before PathFinder disconnects or hangs up a call For example entering 5 for the Silence interval instructs PathFinder to listen for a silence that is five seconds long and upon detection to treat the call as a disconnect O If the interval is set too short any long noise such as cellular phone static could be interpreted as a tone signaling a false hang up O If the interval is too long PathFinder can be tied up longer than necessary The recommended interval for both silence and non silence intervals is five to seven seconds Telephony Settings 5 27 Re Order Detection Re Order Detection should be used if there is a cadence of silence and non silence after a disconnect Your telephone system documentation should provide the exact cadence of silence and non silence tone If not use PBXpert refer to PBXpert on page 2 42 to learn the Re Order tone To use this function you must refer to your phone system documentation regarding tone frequency for hang up General Tone Detection Click on Set Tone Templates if you need to do any the following tasks o Delete a tone template Highlight the template and click on Delete No further action is necessary o Modify atone template Highlight the desired tone template then click on Edit O Add anew tone template Click on Add Add or Edit Tone Template If you select to edit or add a template the following window is displayed Add Tone Template r
78. file If PathFinder reaches the end of a command file a Quit command is implied Related Commands OnHook OnHook Puts phone on hook Typically this command is used to place the line On hook after completing a call Caution In a very active system this command could cause PathFinder to answer an incoming call before PathFinder is ready Related Commands OffHook Quit OffHook Delayed Takes phone off hook If Delayed is specified then the phone is not placed off hook until a dial or call is actually executed This is useful when the time between the OffHook and Dial is too long Except for notification the phone line is typically already off hook Doing a second off hook does not affect anything Call lt DtmfString gt Calls the number Using the Call feature is like using supervised transfers when transferring an Auto Attendant call to an extension The voice mail system remains on the line and listen to the Call Result This command is not complete until a Connect Busy or NoAnswer is detected Note The Call command works in conjunction with the CallResult command Related Commands CallResult OffHook Sleep Command Files A 3 Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String CallResult lt 07 12 gt lt Command gt Action Branch on result of a call 7 busy 8 no answer 10 connect Description The command in
79. follows 1 Start the MAINT application Select Edit gt Menus or click Menu icon in toolbar Select a MENU to use for Homework Hotline Then select the Key Action to start the Homework Hotline Select 1 9 or For example EA IM To run the Homework Hotline choose 6 Select Run ActiveVex Enter AVHomework Run Click OK Click OK Click DONE 7 Exit the MAINT application Record the greeting s for the Menu selected such as to listen to homework assignments press 4 moon of When the application requests a teacher ID the system is referring to the mailbox number assigned to that teacher for the callers to use when they call in for their assignments Chalk Talk C 23 When a teacher wishes to record a new assignment they access the system as a student enter their teacher ID then press gt k The system asks for the password The teacher enters their mailbox password followed by They can then listen to and re record a new assignment After recording a new assignment they must press 4 to accept the assignment and make it available for the next caller Registry Variables are used to define specific parameters and how they will be applied by the Homework Hotline application To add and change these variables use the MAINT application and select Configuration gt Registry Oo Oo All variables and values are case sensitive This variable defines what the app
80. in the field PathFinder allows the caller to select the facsimile documents to be sent 12 Click on OK when finished Build a Facsimile Database Once PathFinder has been configured for facsimile support and a menu has been created for Fax On Demand you are ready to start building a facsimile document database A facsimile database is simply a group of documents in facsimile format Two methods can be used to enter documents in the facsimile database o Traditional facsimile machine o Computer based facsimile software Refer to Facsimile Database for more information Facsimile Database Using a Traditional Facsimile Machine To build a facsimile database using a traditional facsimile machine 1 Make sure that PathFinder is online 2 Callinto PathFinder and access the facsimile menu you created earlier 3 Press the key designated as the facsimile ADMIN option Fax Support C 41 ON AW Press and enter the ADMIN password PathFinder plays the following menu Press one to create a new document press two to delete a document press three to change a document s description press nine when finished Press 1 to add anew document to the facsimile database Enter a document number followed by the key Record a description of the document if desired Send the facsimile using manual send Geest the process until all documents have been added to the database Using Facsimile Software The use of a facsimile
81. in your telephone system Questions amp Answers 8 15 Q PathFinder seems to answer the call but then hangs up almost immediately What is wrong A Check your time control settings PathFinder may be approaching the end of a time control setting If there is no definition for the current date and time PathFinder doesn t know what to do and hangs up Additionally review the logs for Hx settings to determine the type of hang up PathFinder is performing Q Supervised transfers are not working on my system A There could be many causes of the problem See below for possible solutions o When you select a telephone system PathFinder creates a series of subscribers The default subscribers are programmed to use blind transfers We recommend using blind transfers unless required by the customer o PathFinder may require the ring and busy tones to be learned by PBXpert Refer to PBXpert on page 2 42 o If you are using Supervised Transfers the extensions using supervised transfers should not be set to Forward on Busy or No Answer Also any recall times in the telephone system are disabled Q Call Queuing does not work A For call queuing to work you must use supervised transfers and call holding must be enabled Additionally call queuing must be enabled in the Class of Service Q PathFinder does not answer calls A There could be many causes of the problem See below for possible solutions O Verify th
82. introduces MAINT and provides a summary of this configuration program s features and options Each of the menu options above is described in more detail in a later chapter Prerequisites 4 1 Prerequisites Before configuring PathFinder make sure you complete the following oO jul jul jul Installed the voice card s Installed the PathFinder software Tested all voice channels Connected at least 1 phone line to the voice card s If you have problems accessing MAINT refer to Chapter 2 Installation Overall Configuration Procedure After you have installed and configured all other components by completing the prerequisite steps above you are ready to configure your PathFinder software To configure your software follow these steps k Perform preliminary steps for configuration preparation Refer to Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Configure Access Levels and set up MAINT passwords Refer to Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Configure system settings Refer to Chapter 5 MAINT Application System Settings O Module O Users O System O Class of Service O Telephony O Menus O Time Control After configuration you will be able to start up run and manage the operation of PathFinder via the Monitor application Refer to Chapter 7 Boom Box and Monitor Applications for more information 4 2 Configuration Preparation Configuration Preparation To begin with you must answer some firs
83. is activated in the key Add the necessary parameters for each queue in the registry C 96 TeleQueue O Allow acaller to get to the queue by using a menu or by answering the telephone with TeleQueue There are no additional system requirements to run TeleQueue All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function Getting Started The TeleQueue files are installed as part of the Release 6 install No other files are required To set up TeleQueue you must create the necessary registry entries for the queue or queues that you intend to use To modify the registry go into MAINT and select Configuration gt Registry gt Registry Maintenance gt Create Registry Item Each registry item has a name anda value associated with it When you create a registry item just fill in the Name and Value fields and press the Enter key for all the other fields You may want to enter a description to make things clearer when you view the registry list TeleQueue Registry All TeleQueue items in the registry start with Tq to make them easier to find The following is a list of TeleQueue items and what they do When you create the item give it a name and a value Examples are listed in each item ent
84. members TEST FOR HELLOS 6 1621 SCOTTS MAILBOX 1667 TIGERS MAILBOX FEREYDOUNS MAILBOX Figure 6 21 System Distribution Lists Report Example Data The System Distribution List report contains the following data O List Number o Members extension numbers o Members names Use This is a comprehensive report that lists all current system lists As such it is a powerful evaluation and supervisory tool for maintaining PathFinder 6 30 Directory Reports Directory Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the Directory reports function available through the Reports menu in MAINT There is only one directory report It gives a listing of all subscribers with their first name last name extension number and mailbox number Directory Report Directory reports can be generated for the entire directory or specific name ranges can be designated Report 300 Notepad Ox File Edit Search Help Directory 06 14 96 15 45 56 Page 61 Range All Extension Mailbox OPERATOR FTPRIVATE MBOX TEST FOR MENU TEST FOR TIGER CALLSORT_SALES TEST FOR MENU TECHSUPPORT Figure 6 22 Directory Report Example Logs Reports 6 31 Data The Directory report associates subscribers with specific mailboxes and extensions Use Print this report regularly and reference it for maintenance The Directory report also can be used to create company telephon
85. press the Forward button at the top of the window This will change the form to a Forward window fe Onelook Voice Message Viewer lel Es File Edit View Compose Help From fi 256 esivmail Gert Friday August 22 1997 14 57 59 To fi 232 esivmail Subject Testing Onelook Unified Messaging nja gt gt e 00 00 0 of 0010 7 Send Message 1 Tick Mark 1 sec Figure C 34 Onelook Voice Message Viewer Window 3 Press the Record button ej to record a voice preamble with a microphone C 66 Onelook Unified Messaging 4 After recording your message you can listen to it by pressing the Play button You cannot re record a preamble If you want to do this you must close the current message and return to Step 1 5 Before you send the message fill in the To field The address format for this is lt mailbox gt lt server gt for example 1234 esimail com Fill in the subject line and your name in the From field 7 Send the message by pressing the Send Message button and your message will be sent Creating a New Voice Message The following are the steps for creating a new voice message 1 Open Outlook or Exchange 2 Next select New Form from the Compose menu in Exchange or Choose Form from the Compose menu in Outlook Onelook Unified Messaging C 67 3 The following window displays Select the type of form you wish to create then click on OK New Form Personal For
86. provides four additional DTMF receivers for a total of six O One ring generator RGU unit is needed Supported Features O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs mn Outdial to pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 7 Table 3 2 Starplus 2448 EX Configuration Setup From Station 10 enter the Admin code of 23 66 or dial and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XX XX press Page A Btn 6 Press Flash 36 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 0 0 TRANS 7 HOLD First 0 is the table number assigned Second 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 1 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 1 is the table number assigned 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Enter 1
87. see eek gee Rea Gee ee 5 21 Telephony Settings Hang Up Detection Window uees sesse sesse see gese eken 5 23 Add Tone Template Window ccccsssssssssssssssessssssssssssessnssssssnseasesecsessnsssscsnceacessesseesss 5 27 Telephony Settings Transfer Settings Window iese see sense en oes geskeer 5 30 Telephony Settings Rings WiNdOW uses seen seen see eek Gee ee Roe ee ee ee ee Re 5 32 Telephony Settings Perfect Call Window sssssssssscsesssecseesneecsecssceseesseecneeseees 5 33 PBX Integration WiNdOW ss EE EE este screencast asec ee 5 34 X Figures PBX Integration next WROEG GR RE eek es 5 35 Registry Wind OE ees Ge ee ese Es ob Ee EO ge Gee 5 36 Edit Registry item WINdoOW sees ie GR ee ek ek ke Se ie 5 37 Add Registry Item WiNdoW asses dsse enkele ak ee Kees 5 38 Select User to Edit WiNdOW as Es boe Ke Ek see Oe ge ea Eed ee 5 41 Cr ate Users WV NOVY see Sete cence N eek elem tl ie ek RE eens 5 42 Select User to Edit WINAOW sesse eed sees ee SR Ee eusrieansnteaan eene ede ede 5 43 Create Users WiINdoOW se ee Ge ee Ee ie 5 44 Create Range Window ei REED Es ER ke EE ee ea ee ee EER 5 45 Edit User s Settings WINGOW use seen sen sen see ee ee ERA RR GER Gee ee ee Rae ee RAAR ee Ge 5 47 Mailbox User s Settings WiINdOW uses sen sen sek Ge Gee Re ee ee Renee Ge Gee ee ee 5 49 Edit User s Extension Settings WiNdOW iuiee sesse sesse se sek Geek Gee ee ee RARR ee 5 52 Edit COS Window for the COS named General sessessses
88. settinas as thev currently are click Cancell Event handling group I ceres se Figure 5 56 Edit Line Setting Window 5 Click on Next to display the Blockage Group window Line Edit 3 of 4 Blockage detection group We will now edit the blockage group for line 2 The curent setting is shown below The system allows you to group lines into blockage groups Once all lines in a group are processing a call that group is said to be blocked Possible settings are blank and from 1 to 9 Clear the setting to remove the line from a blockage group The values are strictly arbitrary You can leave the setting as is by clicking Next To change the setting enter a new value Once you are satisfied with the setting click Next to move on to the next wizard screen To accept this value and skip all other wizard screens click Finish If you wish to leave all settings as they currently are click Cancel Blockage group ft Figure 5 57 Edit Line Setting Window Line Settings 5 105 6 Click on Next to display the PBX Name window Line Edit 4 of 4 Phone system integration We will now edit the phone interface for line 2 The current setting is shown below The PBX Name setting determines how the system will interface with certain phone systems For basic single line or analog type interfaces the typical value is blank or ANALOG Some interfaces to the phone system require a special value like INBAND
89. takes the phone off hook and dial a beeper number If a connect is detected CallResult 10 the mailbox number is sent and the file Quits If we do not get a connect the file calls another phone number and upon a connect sends the last message received If the last number does not answer we schedule another notify A 14 Examples The sleep commands are used to give the phone line time to settle Mailbox 232 s notification file OffHOok Sleep 1 Call 9 14046621503 Sleep 2 If we got a connect then send the mailbox and hang up CallResult10 DialMailbox CallResult10 OnHook CallResult10 Quit We did not get connected so try another number OnHook Sleep 1 OffHOok Call 9 011241230909 Sleep 2 If we got a connect then play the message and hang up CallResult10 PlayFirstMessage CallResult10 OnHook CallResult10 Quit Still no connect so re schedule notification OnHook The next two lines are simple time of day services DayOfWeek0 Console Today is Sunday Time10 00 14 00 Console Time us between 10am and 2pm The next 2 lines demonstrate linking of time of day commands DayOfWeek3 Time10 00 10 30 Status Wed 10 00 10 30am DayOfweek6 Time08 00 17 00 Menu SAT WORK Re issue another notify Notify Quit this command file Quit Figure A 1 Command File Sample B Installation Forms This chapter contains the Installation Forms to be used when installing the PathFinder
90. the registry variable r ird The file is located in the Data directory it is a DOS text file and can be edited as such Here is an example Lines beginning with semicolons are comments ComPort 2 ComBaudRate 9600 ComParams N81 r_ird 1 Phone System Integration Protocols 3 5 Problem Diagnosis The SMDI system can log more information if you need to diagnose system problems In order to log such information turn on Integration Debugging Logging RS 232 Connection The serial port providing integration from the SMDI must be connected to the serial port on the PC not the parallel port This has been a major problem with some installations With Windows NT you can use the HyperTerminal program in Programs gt Accessories gt HyperTerminal gt HyperTerminal to verify you are communicating with the PBX Voice Bridge Make sure the COM settings are correct for the connection Other Protocols Call Vodavi Technical Support for assistance in integrating other protocols 3 6 Phone System Set Up Phone System Set Up Follow the integration instructions that pertain to your telephone system in order for it to work with PathFinder Starplus Systems Starplus 2448EX Hardware Requirements O One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each SLT card provides eight ports One APB card There are two DTMF receivers built on the APB card One SLU module The SLU is installed on the APB card The SLU
91. the call more directly through the use of a script or through special functions of the PBX This option requires some programming Refer to Appendix A for more information Lists and Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This chapter describes the system lists functions available through the Edit menu in MAINT One of the easiest ways to send a single message to many different mailboxes is through a system distribution list PathFinder supports two types of distribution lists Oo System lists Set up by the System Administrator discussed in this chapter o Personal lists Set up by individual users discussed in the PathFinder User s Manual As an example a system distribution list could be created for the Sales department The Sales Manager or any other PathFinder subscriber could use this system distribution list to send one message that would be received simultaneously by each Sales employee in the list Distribution Lists 6 3 Distribution Lists System distribution lists have the following characteristics o The number of lists that can be created is limited only by disk space O System lists do not need to be front ended by a mailbox O System lists can be maintained using MAINT or over the telephone Oo System lists can contain up to 200 entries An entry may be a mailbox number or another list number allowing you to chain lists together System lists allow users to rou
92. the exact location to find the lt FileName gt Log lt LogString gt Logs the string to the daily log file in the lt LogString gt The lt LogString gt variable can be anything you would like The lt Path gt is a numeric value and matches the path settings in the Registry Status lt StatusString gt Shows string in status box Status allows you to change the run time status associated with a line This is what you see in monitor in Windows NT voice mail systems lt Extension gt lt Extension gt Echo Turns Status on off Echo toggles command line debugging on amp off lt On Off gt Mailbox Opens the mailbox Takes the action defined in lt Mailbox gt s actions If lt Mailbox gt defined in lt Mailbox gt no mailbox is defined it uses the global mailbox Extension Transfers to the Takes the action defined in the lt Extension gt s actions If no extension is defined it uses the global extension Module lt ModulesName gt lt glb_parameter gt Runs module in lt ModulesName gt If the Module requires any parameters use the lt glb_parameter gt to define the parameters Line lt 00 32 gt lt Command gt Checks current line It is acommand used to branch based on if the current channel is correct For example if you only wanted to do something on line 5 then you would use Line05 Call 9 7706621503 Command Files A 5
93. the telephone system Number of External Subcribers who do not have a phones in the telephone system Are internal subscribers going to forward their phones to their mailboxes YesL Noll Will the telephone system provide Preset Call Forwarding to voice mail YesL Nol Will Subscribers use Pager Notification YesL Noll Automated Attendant Functions When is Automated Attendant to be used Daytime Night Both Never ____ Will Automated Aftendant be used as an overflow answering point to help the live system operator Number of CO Lines to be directly answered by Automated Aftendant FAX Detection Will the system be set to automatically route Fax calls YesL Noll Fax Transfer Prefix amp flash and a comma pause Fax phone number or extension number Operator What do telephone system users normally dial to reach the system Operator Voice Mail Equipment Considerations Where is the voice mail system to be located Is this location environmentally stable air conditioned amp heated YesL NoL Will the systems be connected to a dedicated and grounded 120 volt 60 Hz AC outlet YesL NoL WARNING Questions on this page answered as NO represent less than ideal conditions and may cause imme diate or delayed malfunctions or may disrupt certain voice mail and telephone system capabilities Installation Forms B 3 SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION Complete one copy of this form for each Subscriber or group of Subscrib
94. the time control perform the following steps 1 Highlight the time control to edit then click on Select The following window displays Edit Time Control BASIC2 Description EET EE eed Not used ar Ma Not used Figure 5 51 Edit Time Control Window The window illustrated above shows a newly created time control with all fields blank When you edit an existing time control the fields already have options entered and displayed 2 If necessary type a description for the time control Time Control Settings 5 97 3 To define the first line item of the time control click on 1 The following window displays Edit Time Control Line Item 1 E Stat End Time Start ea End i r Day of Week IX Monday X Thursday IX Tuesday X Friday x Wednesday r Action Time Period Figure 5 52 Edit Time Control Line Item Window 4 Inthe date fields enter a Start and End date using MM DD format 01 01 through 12 31 to indicate specific starting and ending dates to which this line item in the time control applies Time Control Settings 5 6 In the time fields enter a Start and End time using GMT twenty four hour format 00 00 through 24 59 to indicate the specific times during the day that this line item in the time control is active When specifying start and end dates and times the following g
95. they are waiting to be transferred Typically you would set the queue up to allow prompt files and record a file TQ234 1 that would have the following instructions While you are waiting for a representative you may enter the following numbers to get more information For information on PathFinder press 1111 For information on TeleQueue press 22224 Otherwise stay on the line and someone will be with you shortly Remember to press 1 when prompted if you wish to continue to hold Then you would record TO1111 VOX and put something like You selected more information on PathFinder For information on new products press 1112 For information on common problems for first time installations press 1113 For information on common problems on installed systems press 1114 You will need to plan the files and what is in them along with the correct names to be used If this is set up correctly it can help your customers solve their problems before they ever reach a support person Non Queue Specific Prompts The last set of custom prompt files are not queue specific They are used to customize what messages the caller hears depending on how many other callers are in front For the first caller the file name would be TO POS1 VOX For the second caller the file name would be TQ_POS2 VOX These are most commonly used to give the caller an estimate on how long on average it will take to be connected Troubleshooting Testing
96. timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Enter 9 9999999 HOLD 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 Btn 6 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button N Phone System Set Up Starplus DHS Hardware Requirements o An SLA Analog adapter Supported Features FP2 ONLY The supported features of the STARPLUS DHS include O Station
97. to Menu Settings on page 5 83 time controls provide PathFinder with a tremendous amount of control and flexibility in processing calls The delete time control function is used to remove any time control that is no longer of use To delete a time control perform the following steps 1 Click on the Edit Time Control Records icon on the toolbar 2 Highlight the time control to delete then click on Delete 3 When prompted if you want to proceed with the deletion click on OK 5 102 Line Settings Line Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the line settings available through the Edit menu in MAINT The modular nature of PathFinder allows you to assign a specific module or application function to each telephone line also referred to as a port or channel When a caller dials a specific line PathFinder runs the module that has been assigned to that port Assigning Port Modules You should read this section before actually assigning any modules to a line Then read the sections of the manual that describe the modules you plan to install When you have finished return to this section to complete setup for your PathFinder phone lines System Partitioning It is important to note that each line is independent from the other lines and can be programmed to perform a unique function This is referred to as system partitioning It allows you to run multiple telephone auto
98. to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 23 Table 3 10 Starplus Triad 1 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD Q is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8
99. users or subscribers have both a mailbox and extension on PathFinder Typically the user subscriber has an extension on the telephone system as well If the user subscriber has no physical extension on the telephone system the voice mailbox can take messages for that subscriber at any time This section discusses how to create modify and delete users subscribers The terms user and subscriber are used interchangeably throughout this chapter and this manual Creating Users The PathFinder Create User function is used to generate a single mailbox extension possibly for a new employee or to create a template mailbox to set up a group of users subscribers PathFinder cannot perform messaging functions until subscribers mailboxes extensions have been defined and configured with the appropriate parameters Subscribers may be set up individually or in groups referred to as ranges Any time you define a subscriber you create a mailbox and a corresponding extension Any attempt to transfer a call to an invalid mailbox causes PathFinder to play the error prompt Mailbox Number XXX Does Not Exist Any attempt to transfer a call to an invalid extension causes PathFinder to play the error message Extension number xxx does not exist User Settings 5 41 Assigning Mailbox amp Extension Numbers In many cases the mailboxes assigned to subscribers can match their extension numbers If the mailbox number
100. wait the Line 17 parameter would reflect how many times the TQ_TRANS VOX prompt is played before assuming ring no answer Tq0000ExitExt Exit to Extension If this is set to 0 then while a person is on hold waiting for a CSR to free up they can only press 0 to get to an operator or menu If this is set to 1 then the person has the additional option of pressing to enter an extension to transfer to or to get to the company directory EXT List The EXT list in the registry contains the extensions that TeleQueue should call This list does not have to be in any order TeleQueue does follow this ordering but because it always starts calling from where it left off on the previous call you cannot be sure where TeleQueue will start There can be any number of extensions in this list Each entry in the list should contain one extension The extension numbers in the EXT file are independent of the list of extensions in Auto Attendant Keep in mind that TeleQueue works faster if you can take all of your destination extensions those that would normally be listed in the EXT list and put them in a hunt group on your PBX If the access extension for that hunt group is 290 then that would be the only extension that would appear in the EXT list The reason this is usually better is because when there is a list of extensions TeleQueue has to step through each and find if it is busy but if your PBX does the work it will respo
101. with PathFinder 5 78 Class of Service Settings Click on Auto Attendant in the Edit COS window to display these options The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC Automated Attendant Figure 5 43 Edit COS Automated Attendant Settings Window Class of Service Settings 5 79 Call Options Call options describe what extension settings the subscriber can change via their mailbox Typically these options should be disabled as the subscriber could significantly alter the behavior of their mailbox and extension settings O Select Blind Transfer to allow unsupervised call transfer where PathFinder forwards the call to the requested extension This option is commonly used with hunt groups O Select Supervised Transfer if you want PathFinder to monitor the transfer to determine whether the called extension is busy or is not being answered If you select Supervised Transfer you can check either or both of the following Screening When a caller dials an extension Call Screening prompts for a name This information is given to the called party before the call is actually transferred The called party can either accept or reject the call Holding This allows the caller to hold if the called party is busy PathFinder plays I m sorry lt subscriber s name gt is busy If you would like to hold press 1 To try another extension or leave a message for this extension press 2 Extended Options
102. with any time Mail Box Extension Menu COS or Time Control Use the dropdown lists to select the appropriate first and last items for selection criteria Name Fax Documents or Look For Enter the appropriate selection criteria range for the report you want to generate Dialog Box Considerations o All reports are viewed with Notepad If you wish to print or save a report use Notepad to do this O Inthe Settings reports if no data are available for a particular field that field is not shown in the report For example If the Department field is blank no Department field appears in the report O When entering selection criteria for a report PathFinder remembers the last criteria entered in any report and offers that as a default selection For example if you run a mailbox settings report the mailbox range used in that report appears when you run a different report with a mailbox range criterion The windows shown in the Reports chapter are intended to illustrate report structures and may not reflect actual information or data System Reports 6 9 Setup Reporting The Setup Reporting item in the Reports menu is used to select the lines you want printed per page header options and the speed at which reports are generated The Report viewer field allows you to indicate what application is used to display reports Setup Report Generation Lines per page Every Page First Page None Page headers Canc
103. you click on the Tools menu If you do not click on the menu right away the services are launched in the background and the mail client will not lock up Recorded voice message playback is not easily audible Make sure that the volume control for the microphone is at its highest volume You can check this by doing the following 1 Double click on the speaker icon in the notification area of the task bar 2 Select Options gt Properties from the menu bar 3 Inthe Adjust volume for pane make sure Recording is selected and make sure that the Microphone option is selected in the list box 4 Click on OK 5 Make sure the volume level for the microphone is as loud as possible Now when you record you should have better results If this does not help you may want to try using a different microphone Onelook Point to Point Server Onelook Point to Point Server is an optional software component of PathFinder Onelook Point to Point Server is required to support either Point to Point messaging between PathFinder systems or Onelook unified messaging for Microsoft Outlook Exchange Inbox desktop clients C 74 Onelook Point to Point Server Onelook Point to Point Server supports Point to Point messaging between PathFinder systems in one of the following ways Oo By sending local PathFinder messages outbound over a TCP IP connection to a remote PathFinder system based on remote mailbox address as configured by MAI
104. 0 VT1221PGC Message accepted for delivery gt 17 25 16 02 12 17 25 MTPOut gt QUIT 17 25 16 02 12 17 25 SMTPOut Rename VT100 U66 to VD100 U66 17 25 16 02 12 17 25 SMTPOut SENT 02 12 97 17 25 100 ESI SYS COM 0 VT100 U66 C 94 Point To Point Messaging o Remote Onelook Point to Point Server receives a message and sends to remote PathFinder 17 20 55 02 12 17 20 55 SMTPIn 1 lt EHLO 17 20 55 02 12 17 20 55 SMTPIn 1 gt 250 XUMP 17 20 55 02 12 17 20 55 SMTPIn 1 gt 250 Hello 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 lt MAIL FROM 1221 ESIHELLO 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 gt 250 OK Mail From 1221 ESIHELLO 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 lt RCPT TO 100 SKELLY NT A 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 gt 250 OK Rept To 100 SKELLY NT A 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 lt DATA 12582 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 gt 354 UMP accepting 12582 end with lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn c Waiting on connection 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 sem 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIN 1 lt 17 20 56 02 12 17 20 56 SMTPIn 1 gt 250 VT1OOKKP Message accepted for delivery 17 21 04 02 12 17 21 04 SMTPOut AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent MmNmVT100 KKP 1 gt 17 21 05 02 12 17 21 05 SMTPOut QUIT Response lt 250 Command Accepted 17 21 05 02 12 17 21 05 SMTPOut SENT 02 12 97 17 20 100 0 VT100 KKP 17 21 26
105. 00 where 100 is the questionnaire number 7 Exit the MAINT application Chalk Talk C 31 RECORDING PROMPTS Once the questionnaire has been linked to a menu 1 Restart the PathFinder program 2 Call into the desired menu then press the DTMF tone previously selected The first telephone call takes a few extra seconds while the system connects to the database o Ifa question prompt HAS NOT been recorded then the system will prompt with 115 Press during this prompt to gain access to record prompts o Ifan opening prompt is present you may still press 2k to access the Record Prompts option The system will prompt you for the password followed by the sign 3 After gaining access select from these prompts to listen to current prompt ELE 2 to record anew prompt 4 to accept new prompt 7 to go to previous question 8 to go to next question to go to another questionnaire 9 to disconnect 4 Once you record a new prompt press 4 to accept the prompt Otherwise the prompt will not be installed or heard by callers C 32 Chalk Talk QUESTIONNAIRE PROMPTS All prompts used within this application are non indexed prompt files They are all stored in the QA Prompts directory After shutting down the PathFinder program you can use BoomBox to re record any of the application prompts Table C 4 Questionnaire Prompt File
106. 02 12 17 21 26 SMTPIn 1 lt xxx connection closed by Re mote 17 21 26 02 12 17 21 26 SMTPIn 1 gt xxx Connection closed 17 21 26 02 12 17 21 26 SMTPIn 1 lt xxx connection closed by Re mote TeleQueue C 95 o Remote PathFinder delivers the message A 18 24 54 569 tcpin login U HELLO P HNTELNET TeleQueue TeleQueue gives PathFinder Automatic Call Distributing ACD features With TeleQueue you can create 1 000 call queues that callers can access Each queue has its own unlimited list of possible extensions and associated prompt and help files With TeleQueue you can select for callers waiting to do one of the following o Be connected to hear pre recorded prompt files O Be placed on hold and hear music from your phone system O Hear pre recorded music provided by PathFinder o Wait At any time before transferring begins a caller may elect to exit the queue and be placed in a menu From there the system administrator can do many things including taking a voice message through voice mail or transferring to an operator Each queue also has the ability to send the caller to a predefined Auto Attendant extension if all extensions in the queue list are ring no answer This is especially useful for after hours Requirements To set up TeleQueue you need to do the following things O Make sure PathFinder is installed properly and is functioning correctly Make sure the TeleQueue support
107. 022 O If digits are defined as ID then require caller to enter the ID matching this record Acceptance is indicated O Play prompt and wait for acceptance 0013 or 1013 O If maximum number of accepts are met then stop call out list Leave Message or caller selects Play prompt to leave message then start recording to leave message O End recording on disconnect or digit pressed 0025 or1025 O Message should then be delivered to the mailbox indicated O Ifa QA ID is defined the system should branch the QA instead Leave Message can be optional Play prompt and record response 0025 1025 or required Disconnect Prompt Play disconnect prompt 0019 or 1019 When PathFinder is shut down and restarted the system continues outbound calling where it left off C 22 Chalk Talk Homework Assignment Information The Homework Hotline is a PathFinder application that allows each teacher to have a specific area for storing homework assignments A teacher is assigned a unique ID valid system mailbox which allows a teacher to have a personal mailbox as well as one for assignments Students accessing the Homework mailbox WILL NOT be able to leave a message this is an announcement only area Installation Configuration Getting Started Start gt Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt Maint To use an opening menu when the Homework Hotline is activated configure the system as
108. 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Enter 9 9999999 HOLD 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 Btn 6 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button N Phone System Set Up Starplus SPD 4896 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for
109. 125 Channels 1 and 2 are in one port and channels 3 and 4 are in the next port 2 50 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 Confirm your settings Make certain Run Wizard Auto Test is selected The Wizard Auto Test verifies that the correct channel is plugged into the correct extension Click Next If you get an error during the Wizard Auto Test confirm your settings and re test PBXpert 32 Wizard Auto Line Test f x PBXpert 32 Wizard is now verifying the connection between the two specified resources If this fails re check your settings and connections and try again r Line to B Line B to A V Line A calling Line B Line B calling Line A IV Set hook passed I Set hook passed IV Dialing passed I Dialing passed J Connect passed J Connect passed Failed waiting for rings When the Wizard Auto Test is successful click OK Click Next The Wizard then runs a series of tests to learn the tones of the phone system This takes several minutes If the data have all green lights then click Keep Data If there are any red lights re run the test Click Next The Wizard verifies all of the settings it learned Click OK The Wizard displays the results from the test Click Finish Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 51 23 Select File gt Exit from the menu bar Advanced Tone Features
110. 2 38 Keys Pi Pi 9 Hu 391 Log 1 25237 55 38 201 dialvox DialVox record HELLONT MESSAGES 0 6 VI1260 M0C 8302 180 s 300 m 0 result 0 oh 5 sh 5 09 55 40 534 3 Log Stop Call 09 50 34 WNHNNFRFPWWNHNNRFPRFPRPRPRPRPRPRPWWPENNPFPRPWWNNNNWE C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C E D C Figure 8 5 Multiple Line Call Log Menu Logs 8 9 Menu Logs The third line of this log shows which menu was picked Demo the time the call was made 10 25 08 which key the caller pressed for options 2 and where the menu forwards Salesmnu after menu has finished Log Start Call Log Vmail 1304 Access Log Menu Demo 10 25 08 Keys 2 MnSALESMNU Log Stop Call 10 25 08 Figure 8 6 Menu Selection Log No Answer Log This log simply shows that there was no answer at extension 621 when the call came through 08 13 07 11 Log Notify 1 1621 NoAnswer at 621 Figure 8 7 No Answer Log Auto Attendant Logs General Call Data This is an example of someone calling extension 624 The extension is busy as written in the first line The abbreviations CaScHo stand for Ca Supervised Transfer Sc Screening and Ho Holding In other words the supervised attendant transferred the call it was then screened and put on hold The second line shows that it was held only once The third line shows that the phone system tried the line once again The last sho
111. 2 42 Wizard 2 43 PC Anywhere 32 bit 2 3 PC Preparation 2 10 PC System Placement 2 5 PDF 2 23 Perfect Call 4 6 5 33 Perform a System Analysis 2 1 Period Definitions 5 19 Peripherals 2 2 Personal Computer PC 1 2 Personal greeting 5 61 Personal Lists 5 72 Personal Mailbox Operator 5 10 phone cable 2 11 Phone Line Assignments 2 10 Index Phone number 5 51 Phone Number Translations C 50 Physical Board Installation 2 11 Play Call Source 5 81 Play entire date 5 69 Play Hold Files 5 80 Play Instructions 5 92 Play Prompt 5 92 Point to Point 2 53 4 6 Point To Point Messaging C 84 Point to Point Messaging Configuration C 86 Features C 85 Installation C 86 Troubleshooting C 90 Using Point To Point Messaging C 89 POP C 75 Portable Document Format PDF 2 23 Position in Queue C 104 Postfix 5 31 postfix prompt 5 62 Potential Conflicts 2 10 pound 4 9 Pre Defined Command Files A 12 Prefix 5 30 prefix prompt 5 62 Preparation 2 6 Prerequisites 3 1 4 1 Prerequisites amp Preparation 2 20 Pressing a Key to Stay in Queue C 104 privileges 4 11 Problems Diagnosis Phone System Integration 3 5 with PathFinder 8 12 with the PC Hardware and or Operating System 8 12 with the Telephone System 8 11 Prompt Names and Descriptions C 105 Proprietary Connections 2 13 Q Q amp A Admin 2 53 Question amp Answer Sessions C 26 QUESTIONNAIRE PROMPTS C 32 Questions amp Answers 8 12 Queue Introductions C 106 Quick Command Des
112. 24khz Boom Box can produce these same ADPCM files and can also produce WAV files Requirements Boom Box requires the following O Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 4 o A Dialogic card or a WAV device with microphone and speakers Installation Boom Box is automatically installed when running the install PathFinder software After installing your PathFinder software you can access the Boom Box application by selecting from the Start menu the following path Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt Boom Box 7 2 Boom Box Application Boom Box s main window is shown below J BoomBox NT Jol x File Voice Port Convert Help Play Stop Record Edit oy Add Prompt itt File Information Name eric vox Device Type Dialogic Card Type Indexed Device Status BESI Format ADPCM Figure 7 1 Boom Box Main Window It is recommended that the PathFinder voice engine be shut down to record voice prompts using Boom Box Ifyou would like to record prompt files while the PathFinder engine is running use the Record Prompts option on a menu Refer to Menu Settings on page 5 83 for more information Menu Bar Options The Boom Box application has four menus available in the menu bar o File O Voice Port o Convert O Help File Menu The File menu allows you to create access and save Boom Box files as well as exit the Boom Box application Boom Box Application 7 3 File gt N
113. 3 Anti static Floor Mat 2 6 2 11 Wrist Strap 2 6 2 11 Archiving Messages using Onelook C 71 Area Code C 88 Length C 87 Ask for Extension 5 90 5 100 Ask for Mailbox 5 90 5 100 Assigning Mailbox amp Extension Numbers 5 41 Assigning Port Modules 5 102 At an extension 4 9 Attaching TeleQueue C 103 Auto Attendant 4 6 5 4 5 7 5 72 Logs 8 9 Operator 5 10 Settings 5 77 Time Periods 5 19 Automatic Administration Logon 2 16 Auto play 5 69 Auxiliary Tasks 4 6 5 17 B Backup 2 3 Power Supply 2 3 Base Memory Segment 2 8 Blind Transfer 5 53 5 79 Blind Transfer Delay 5 31 Block Group 5 107 Blockage Groups 7 15 Board Address 2 9 Configuration 2 25 Jumpers 2 8 Board Level Jumpers 2 8 Body Prompts 5 89 Boom Box 2 52 Buttons 7 5 Description 7 1 Menu Bar 7 2 System Prompts 7 9 Build a Fax Database C 35 C 40 Busy 2 25 5 31 Buttons Boom Box 7 5 ii Index Edit Functions Boom Box 7 6 File Functions Boom Box 7 7 MAINT 4 8 C Call Begin End 5 7 Holding 5 80 Options 5 79 Queue Interval 5 4 Queuing 5 80 Traffic Information 6 10 Caller Record Options 5 67 Retries 5 15 Send Options 5 67 Callers 5 60 must call from FAX machine C 37 Cascade To 5 50 Cascading 5 50 5 75 Central Office CO 2 11 Centrex Essex Line 2 12 Chalk Talk C 2 Homework Assignment Info C 22 Outbound Calling via Call Lists C 4 Question amp Answer Sessions C 26 Change Language 5 92 Channels 2 7 Check Logs C 90
114. 3 Inthe Registry setup window fill in the name and value for each desired option refer to Table 3 1 Leave all other fields blank Customization Parameters You can customize six aspects of the SMDI integration as follows Table 3 1 SMDI Defaults SMDI Parameters Default Description SmdiMaxRings 5 rings This parameter controls how many rings PathFinder waits before answering a call as non integrated SmdiMaxWaitTime 6 seconds This parameter controls how many seconds PathFinder waits after receiving a ring or SMDI packet before it gives up SmdiSkipCheck OFF When SkipCheck is turned on PathFinder does not confirm that mailboxes exist when the packet is received To turn this option on use one in the Value field To turn this option off delete all data in the Value field SmdiDigitLength 7 This is the number of digits coming in from the switch SmdiXOnXOff OFF If you are having problems communicating with the PBX or Voice Bridge make sure that XOn XOff is being used If it is being used set this value to one SmdiMbxPassword This parameter is not used 3 4 Phone System Integration Protocols SMDLINI File The SMDLINI file can be used to change the RS232 settings By default PathFinder uses the following settings jul jul n ul Baud rate 1200 Parity Even Data Bits Seven Stop Bits One The SMDI INI file can change any or all of these parameters as well as
115. 43 PBXpert Wizard 1 Select from the Start menu Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt PBXpert windows Update fn Programs Fal Accessories A Documents Ain Dialogic System Software Eh Settings gt DISCOVERY Os Search gt m PathFinder Voice Processing gt Universal Dialogic Diagnostics Utility Help fay GoldMine 5 0 x T1 Run X mp Shut Down 2 The PBXpert Wizard displays PBXpert Wizard Step 1 of 10 Welcome x el e 2 44 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 3 Click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 2 of 10 PBX Information x Type in the Manufacturer Name and Model Name of the PBX whose tones you are going to learn By default the Manufacturer and Model name are combined and used as the Tone Set File name You may edit this field by typing in any valid Windows compatible file name m PBX Manufacturer Vodavi Model fi 92 384 r Tone Set File File Name Vodavit 92 384 tef Browse cmi eo 4 Type in the PBX Manufacturer and PBX Model number The Tone Set file name is created automatically from the Manufacturer and Model number Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 45 5 Click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 3 of 10 TAPI Information i x Select the TAPI PBX Strings database name to merge into this tone set Select none if no merging is desired none v m PBX Strings F
116. 4585 set to 2 by CSR 08 03 37 01 08 03 24 HITELEO csrmaint H TELEQ CsrMaint Csr Status 4585 A 08 03 37 01 08 03 24 08 03 38 03 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4585 is 2 08 03 38 03 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4586 is 2 08 03 45 03 H TELEQ CallTime 714 CallResult 10 lt amp 4587 gt 08 03 46 03 H TELEQ CSR TQ111 4587 Answered 08 03 46 03 HITELEO CSR TQ111 CSR Caller Out 08 03 46 03 08 02 31 H TELEQ 111 H TELEQ TQ111 startpos 1 ca4587 10 connect 4587 Automated Attendant COS DTMF Hardware Glossary The Auto Attendant processes all call transfer activity not carried out by a human operator or user The Auto Attendant settings provide access to caller related Call Queue Interval and Directory configurations The Auto Attendant Operator setting determines what happens when a caller presses 0 while in the Auto Attendant module Class of Service To understand Class of Service COS think of an airplane Some passengers fly first class others fly business class and some fly economy class each with different amenities and services PathFinder can do the same for subscribers defining a virtually unlimited number of different classes of service Each subscriber is associated with a COS that defines its attributes Grouping mailboxes and extensions into classes of service lets you change options for all the mailboxes and extensions in the same class simultaneously simply by editing the COS record Refer to Chapter 5
117. 4896 3 16 SPD 612 3 10 Triad 1 3 22 Triad 2 3 24 Triad 3 3 26 Triad S 3 20 Start a Fax Transmission C 54 Start Key 5 90 Start Up Mode 2 42 Startup amp Orientation 7 13 Storage Size Factors 2 4 Streams Environment 2 14 2 19 Subnet Mask 2 19 Subscriber Settings Button 4 8 Subscribers 5 40 C 48 Suggested Initial Module Settings 5 107 Supervised Transfer 5 53 5 79 supervised transfers 2 42 Switch Requirements 3 1 switches 2 6 2 8 Synchronization in Onelook C 57 System Add on 5 62 Partitioning 5 102 System Distribution Lists 4 6 5 71 6 1 System Activity Log 8 4 System Directory 5 5 System Distribution Lists Report 6 29 System Error Log 8 2 System greeting 5 62 System Maintenance Log 8 3 System Prompts 7 9 Index xiii System Requirements 2 1 System Size 2 3 T Take a message 5 50 Tape Backup 8 1 Tape Drive 2 3 TCP IP 2 14 Technical Notes A 11 Technique 8 11 Telephone Connection 2 11 telephone system 3 6 Telephony Hardware 1 2 Compatibility 2 5 Configuration 2 7 Installation 2 10 Telephony Settings 5 20 TeleQueue C 95 Attaching TeleQueue C 103 Getting Started C 96 Hang Up Detection C 104 Help Prompts C 106 Introductions C 106 Last Resort Extension C 104 Non Queue Specific Prompts C 107 Opening Prompts C 104 Position In Queue C 104 Pressing a Key to Stay in Queue C 104 Prompts and Descriptions C 105 Registry C 96 Reports 2 53 Requirements C 95 Sample Logs C 108 Setup Item
118. 6 Master List Detail REDOM scinsnuniacuanunnniaananenninnnmnamsicannan C 17 Database Master List Entry Screen ssssssssssssssssssscsssseecssscsnccesesssecsscesscesseeseessees C 18 Database Group List Entry Screen ou sssssssssssssscsccssecssecssecssccssesseesnscessesssceseeeneess C 19 Add Hier erens Ee EE EE GE Ge ke C 20 Edit Registry Item MAINT App sssssssessssesesssssssssssssssseesrsssssnssessessnssssssssssssnssessssssssssss C 24 Questionn ires Series e Re Ee Ge ik iN Gee Ge GR KA eke C 26 Q amp A Application Edit Q amp A ID Screen iss sen sen sense ee ee ek ee Ge Ge ee ee RAAR C 27 Edit Question SEGE ee Ee cence Ede ese N eN N Ge EN C 28 Start Homework Hotline Screen MAINT App sssscsssscsesssecssesssssessncensesseeseenes C 30 EK dd EE AE a Seke KEREKE ai e C 36 Edit Menu FAX WIdOW ne ee EG Ne GE ee ee C 39 Edit Menu Facsimile Menu WING OW sesse see ee ek ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee C 43 Figures xiii Internet Fax Delivery Administration amp Reporting Window sssssssssssssses C 47 Subscriber Add WiNdoW Re NG RE N GR RE ie Ee C 48 Server Add Window se GE GE EG NER C 49 Add Translation WiNdowW stede se ee ees ek ee ie EIE C 50 Routing Table Window se Ne din ik ee eke ee ee oe C 51 General Settings WINGOW EES N de ees eie Ge Se NS GE Gegee C 52 Key 4 Action WINdOW sasie ein Ke ede edge dain eed C 53 Internet Fax Delivery Server WiNdOW sssssscssesssesscsssecsesccnseeseseensecsseesensesseeese C 54
119. 701234567 Related Commands DtmfRead WriteDtmf Write the DTMF string received in lt DtmfRead gt to the lt FileName gt The lt FileName gt is in the lt path gt WriteDtmf Kelly txt Related Commands DtmfRead Dtmf lt String gt HangUp lt Command Off gt On hangup does DtmfRead only If you receive a HangUp command while reading DTMF digits with the DtmfRead command then perform the command in lt Command gt HangUp DialMailboxWhere If Hangup Off PathFinder does not look for a hangup event and continues to wait for DTMF digits Related Commands DtmfRead Menu lt Menu Name gt Runs the Menu defined in lt Menu Name gt A 6 Command Files Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String DialMailbox Action Dials global mailbox and mailbox number Description Using the Dial command is like using blind transfers in the Auto Attendant PathFinder only dials the global mailbox number and execute the next command It does not listen on the line to check if the call was connected Related Commands Sleep Dial CallMailbox Calls the global mailbox Using the Call feature is like using supervised transfers when transferring an Auto Attendant call to an extension The voice mail system remains on the line and listen to the Call Result Note The Call command works in conjunction with the CallResult command Related Com
120. AINT 4 7 Help Prompts C 106 hold 2 13 Hold Interval 5 80 Hold Type 5 79 Holding 5 79 Holding Allowed 5 53 Holidays 5 19 Homework Assignment Information C 22 host computer attachment 2 5 How Can Be Certain Configured My Dialogic Boards Correctly 2 54 Hunt Group use of C 103 HyperTerminal 3 5 I Immediate 5 75 Immediate notification 5 51 index file 7 1 Index Indexed Prompts 7 10 Indexed vs Non Indexed Prompts 7 9 infinite Systems 3 28 4096 3 28 DVX 3 30 DVX II 3 32 DVX III 3 34 DVX Plus II 3 38 DVX PLUS III 3 40 Mach 1 3 36 INI File 2 51 INI File Settings 5 39 INI Parameter 5 39 Install Adapter 2 18 Hardware 2 5 Operating System 2 14 PathFinder Software 2 20 2 21 Streams Environment 2 19 Installation 2 14 7 1 C 58 Installation Internet Fax Delivery C 46 Installation Troubleshooting 2 53 Instructions prompts 5 89 Integrate Phone System s if applicable 3 1 Integration 3 2 5 7 Inter Digit Time 5 15 Internet Fax Admin 2 52 Internet Fax Delivery C 45 Internet Fax Server 2 53 interrupt level 2 8 Introduction prompts 5 89 Invalid Option 5 91 IP Address 2 19 IP Address and Port C 88 IRQ 2 9 ISA slot 2 2 2 11 IVR Time Period Settings 5 19 J JP7 2 9 Jump Board Configuration 2 8 Jumper pins 2 8 jumpers 2 6 2 8 K Kanji 5 13 Key Action Definitions 5 90 Korean 5 13 L Language 4 6 5 13 5 60 5 92 Last Options 5 67 Last Options Menu 5 67 Last Resort Extension C 104 Lea
121. ASH 01 Button 17 Phone System Set Up infinite Systems infinite 4096 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite 4096 in band integration Oo Oo One SIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SIB card provides eight ports One APL card There are two DTMF receivers built on the APL card One SLU module The SLU is installed on the APL card The SLU provides four additional DTMF receivers for a total of six One Ring Generator RG unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the infinite 4096 include Oo jul jul jul Station forward to a personal greeting Message waiting On Off LEDs Outdial to pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 29 Table 3 13 infinite 4096 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 2366 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX press Btn 13 then press HOLD Press Flash 36 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 0 0 TRA
122. All to select all then click Next Click Next to install Adobe Acrobat 4 0 PathFinder installer windowis inthe background Ignore this during the Acrobat installation Click Next in the Setup window Click Next to select the Default destination folder Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 25 22 Click OK in the information window To complete software installation 23 De select MAINT then click Next 24 Select either YES or NO regarding the option to view the release notes 25 Click OK 26 Click Finish Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert This section covers configuration of Dialogic software and PBXpert For PathFinder to work properly you must configure the Dialogic software to match the installed Dialogic hardware PBXpert allows the voice processing boards to learn the ring back busy do not disturb and other tones relevant to voice processing This software learns the tones and creates a tone set file for your telephone system PBXpert configuration involves walking through a Wizard program Dialogic Software After PathFinder software has been installed the Start menu contains a Dialogic program group which contains the following items Advanced Tone Features Allow you to determine which tone set file to use Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM Allows you to configure the software to match your hardware settings for the voice processing boards Configures the software to reco
123. Card LAN with TCP IP protocol running Client These are the minimum requirements for the client PC to run Onelook O OO n na On ag Windows 95 98 or later Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange Version 5 0 or later 16 megabytes of RAM or greater 10 megabytes of free hard drive space Sound card Speakers Microphone Network Network Interface Card compatible with operating system TCP IP connectivity to Onelook server TCP IP Networking Installed Onelook Unified Messaging C 57 Synchronization in Onelook Onelook includes a synchronization feature that ensures that your Inbox and voice mailbox are always synchronized Whenever you delete a message from your voice mailbox it will also be deleted from your Inbox Likewise if you delete a message from your Inbox the message will also be deleted from your voice mailbox However it should be noted that while messages deleted from your Inbox are immediately synchronized any messages that you delete from your voice mailbox are only deleted from your Inbox once you restart Outlook or Exchange Read messages in Inbox are never synchronized This means that if you listen to a message in Inbox and then delete it through voice mail that message will not be deleted from Inbox To completely remove the message from both your voice mail and Inbox you must manually delete it from Inbox and the voice mailbox Onelook messages are deleted from your voice mail if they a
124. Class of Service Settings Dual Tone Multi Frequency Sounds made by a push button telephone s keys when they are pressed The various interface devices voice cards that PathFinder uses to connect the computer and the phone system ii Glossary HCL IRQ MWI Operator PBX PEB These devices provide the support for voice messaging fax services text to speech and voice recognition support The PathFinder system uses Dialogic products Hardware Compatibility List All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Windows NT Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function Interrupt Request Message Waiting Indicator There are several different types of operators in PathFinder The operators are called when a caller dials 0 at different times during PathFinder operation All operator settings are defined in the Registry There are four operators used in the system as follows o General Operator o Voice Mail Operator o Auto Attendant Operator o Personal Mailbox Operator Refer to Operators on page 5 9 for more information Private Branch Exchange Pulse Code Modulation Expansion Bus A Dialogic bus type Also refer to SC Glossary iii POTS RJ11 and RJ14 SC SLT SMDI Subscriber UDDU User
125. E Re ee 4 5 Edit GAN EE N OE OE ON 4 6 Reports Men see es ER ee Gee eg areni iniae 4 7 Help MENU ss oe aus ee ee ee AG N ee 4 7 MAINT Toolbel se ee Ge Ee ee GE 4 8 Subscriber Settings Button se RR ee ER 4 8 Class OF service BUTTON is ees ss N dee Kees ede Sesde Deeg 4 8 VOICE Menu BUTLON ss ie Ge ee ie Di sd 4 8 Time Control LOI N N ead ttiecennentnee 4 9 LING Settings BUTTON see sie EE ee ede Ee tenia 4 9 EXIt BUTTON EE EL OK DE N HO EN 4 9 Special Characters amp Strings ese ee GN GER KERKE Ke eke 4 9 Access Levels amp MAINT Passwords ssssssssssssscsssssessssseessscseesssssscsncssesncencenes 4 10 MAINT LOGIN sere eee Ga se Re ee Ge ee Ge aa 4 10 Access Levels Setting MAINT User Passwords uses see sen see see ee ee ee RR eek eek ER 4 12 TEM plates ss Ge 5 57 Contents iii MAINT Application System Settings Module SERINGS es ER weneniataaene 5 1 Digit LeNgthS is Ee ee de ee 5 1 Record Playb tk ee Es ee ee ee Deeg 5 2 Au tosAttedarit ie ee ee ae AE GE ED 5 4 aleka 6 1 ses es ES ee EE de De eg 5 6 Operators se Ee De eo EO ee ee 5 9 Voice Mail sssaaa aaia Ea EEEa N 5 11 LAVAS GE EE IE EE EE 5 13 Retries TIMEOUTS use Re ea ion weer EER eed 5 14 System SETUNGS se ek De s iaer ee Ge 5 16 Me ei RE ED EE EE En 5 16 DEI AE oe ER SE EET 5 17 LPT 7 COM dei RA EE ES 5 18 MiMe Periode EER ER RAAS NE RR eek RR DER Ges 5 18 Telephony Settings se ee de RS se ede 5 20 VOICE LINES EE EE EE OE EE RE Oe 5 21 MWI Notification ses
126. ESC plus D4000 7 Removed Install and Configure Hardware Phone Line Assignments Boards are assigned phone lines as follows oO Oo The board with the lowest address is designated as the first board in the system and is assigned phone lines one through four The next lowest address is the second board in the system and contains lines five through eight PathFinder can have up to eight model Dialog 4 voice cards Potential Conflicts In some PCs a memory address conflict occurs between voice card s and other add on hardware components such as a tape drive controller card ESDI or SCSI disk controller card network adapter card and the like Telephony Hardware Installation After all the jumper and switch settings are configured properly install the voice card s in the PC Do not attempt to install the voice cards without configuring them first PC Preparation 1 2 Place the PC in an easily accessible area Turn the power off and disconnect the AC power cord on the PC from the wall socket Unplug any other cables from the PC including any peripheral device cables Remove the cover according to the manufacturer s instructions and store the cover fasteners in a safe place Install and Configure Hardware 2 11 Physical Board Installation Use an anti static wrist strap and if possible an anti static floor mat when installing voice cards 1 Remove the screw that secures t
127. Finder run the Monitor application to start the voice processing engine By default Monitor connects to the local voice processing engine Running the Monitor Application Start up the Monitor application by selecting from the Start menu Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt PathFinder 7 14 PathFinder Monitor Application Once PathFinder is selected a window similar to the following is displayed J ViewPort PathFinder BEE File Server View Help tine status Cals Today Duration Today Calk Total Duration Total Totals Since Bloc Preloading Modules Figure 7 5 Monitor Application Window Configure Host Information To configure the host information select from these options Server Configure Server information in the following window 2 ViewPort PathFinder 4 Add Server Edit Server localhost Remove Server ftatus Running JoIce Lines Connect lux Lines 2 Disconnect st Started Tue Dec 12 15 07 03 2000 Start Server Stop Server gt Immediately When All Lines Are Idle Gerncel Shutdown Dorit Wait far leminations o Add Edit Remove Server O Connect Disconnect On Start Server PathFinder Monitor Application 7 15 O Stop Server Immediately Stop Each Line When Idle When All Lines Are Idle Cancel Shutdown Don t Wait for Terminations Monitor Display Windows Blockage Groups Displays th
128. Finder can accidentally become connected to itself and create a repeating loop For example assume that PathFinder is attempting to notify an extension owner of new messages When it dials the extension that extension is busy therefore o PathFinder is forwarded to the extension s mailbox in other words PathFinder calls itself o PathFinder leaves a notification message in the extension s mailbox O Asa result PathFinder attempts to once again notify the mailbox owner of the new notification message in his or her mailbox creating a repeating loop The Notify Send Keys are a series of DTMF key signals that PathFinder sends with the message notification that cancel the incoming channel and end the loop Since the keys are sent for all voice notifications some users may find this a nuisance and the recommended setting is blank Module Settings Language PathFinder provides optional language support modules for a number of different languages Module Settings Language M Fench uu Default language English M a Languages Allowed X English C Gomon F Bussin F Matas M Spanish F Kan Dutch F Tami F Kogan M faster tanedarin Figure 5 8 Module Settings Language Window in Field Description Default Language Use this menu to select the language that PathFinder uses as the default language Languages Allowed The following languages may be avail
129. First Digit is Operator x There are several different types of operators in PathFinder The operators Figure 5 6 Module Settings Operator Window are called when a caller dials 0 at different times during PathFinder operation All operator settings are defined in the Registry There are four operators used in the system as follows Field General Operator Description The General Operator is the global default operator for all operator functions This is the dial sequence sent to the phone system to reach the operator 0 In most situations this is the sequence dialed when the caller dials 0 You need to specify the entire blind transfer string including flash hook Change the General Operator parameter only if necessary for your phone system Although your implementation may differ the normal string would be amp 0 NOTE Refer to Special Characters amp Strings on page 4 9 for information other special characters supported in MAINT 5 10 Module Settings Field Voice Mail Operator Auto Attendant Operator Description The settings in the voice mail operator pane determine what happens when a caller presses 0 while using voice mail If an operator is designated a time out or 0 key pad entry transfers the caller to the designated operator The operator can then provide caller assistance O The Oas First Digit is Operator parameter is allowed here because some ph
130. Gee Rae eke 3 29 Infinite DVX Configuration SETUP usus sense sek seke Ge Gee ER ee ee ee RR Re 3 31 Infinite DVX II Configuration Setup uses ek eek ee oek ee Ge Ge eek ee ee ee Re 3 33 Infinite DVX III Configuration Setup isess sees see seen ene gese eek eek oek Gee Re Re oe ee RR 3 35 Infinite Mach Configuration Setup iusess sesse sense see RR eek eek Gee ee Geek Gee ee 3 37 infinite DVXPlus Il Configuration Setup esse sesse see eek eke ee Re ee ee 3 39 infinite DVXPlus II Configuration Setup uies sesse sen seekoeie GER Gee ek Ge ee ee 3 41 Infinite DVXPlus IV Configuration Setup iis sen sees sen see ee ee ee ee Re ee RR 3 43 Special Characters amp StrinGs ien ie Sk Ie ds eN ee EO N ek eN 4 9 System Access Levels ee ee ER Re ee ee Re ee cuseeatencaiesevanss 4 11 Key ACTION DETINITIONS soes see eek ede de EN ekke ke SG ke N Gee hie 5 90 Boom Box Window BUTTONS sie ese R ike ske GE Gee se Nee ee en Rees 7 5 Edit F nctions BUTTONS as oes ese ee oe ee ers oe edd Ride kaka iana 7 6 File Functions BUTTONS siese sie N Ke eed ese yd AE N ee de ge Gee Ge NG 7 7 Non Indexed Customizable Prompts uie sesse sesse ee sek Gee eek Gee ee ee RR eek ee Ge 7 11 PathFinder Backup Mathods eb EG EG N N Ge 8 1 xvi Tables Systemi Activity Log Fields ss ee ER ee EG Ge ee ee 8 2 System Activity Log Fields ree RR ER ee Ee ee eN Ge ee 8 4 System Activity Log Fields es ces Ee caeacee 8 5 Command Descriptions ese esse eed gese ee eie Die
131. If the QA is accessed and the opening prompt has not been recorded the system prompts for the password to record prompts O During the 1st prompt if the key is pressed the system prompts for the password and then allows prompts to be edited O Logging is generated to allow for determining the QAs accessed C 34 Fax Support Fax Support Fax Mail PathFinder supports facsimile receipt and facsimile store and forward via the common facsimile cards Parameters for the facsimile options are accessed via the MAINT application s Configuration menu Fax support is being used in many innovative ways in business Fax Options expand the capability of PathFinder to handle both voice and facsimile messaging Facsimile messaging also allows customers to request commonly needed documents PathFinder supports facsimile receipt and facsimile store and forward via the common VFX 40ESC plus cards This allows for facsimile mailbox and Fax On Demand capabilities Fax Mail allows callers to leave facsimile messages in a subscriber s mailbox The subscriber can then retrieve the message at a later date and time just like they can with a voice message When a facsimile message needs to be printed it can be directed to a local or remote facsimile machine PathFinder will ask the subscriber to enter the facsimile number for printing Fax On Demand Fax On Demand will send facsimile documents and information to any caller with access to
132. L1 NorStar NEC and Mitel switches The type of connector used depends on the phone system If a PBX integration was purchased with PathFinder refer to Chapter 3 Phone System Integration and Setup for specific information on attaching your telephone system to PathFinder Software Security Key Included with PathFinder is a software security key It is designed to unlock the various optional features of PathFinder PathFinder will not function properly ifthe security key hardware is not installed 2 14 Install and Configure Operating System The security key hardware resembles a male female parallel connector that plugs into the parallel port on the back of the PC If you have a parallel printer or other device attached to that port 1 Remove the printer cable from the PC port if attached 2 Install the security key hardware on the printer port 3 Attach the printer to the software key in other words re attach the printer to the PC through the software key If attaching a printer to the software key any errors from the printer e g out of paper or off line may cause PathFinder to go offline Install and Configure Operating System This section covers installing and configuring your Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating system Before you can install the PathFinder software you must install and configure the operating system in order to optimize conditions for running PathFinder This configuration proc
133. Mail Application Configuration of the Fax Mail application consists of the following elements 1 Setting up facsimile support in MAINT 2 Create a key to run Fax On Demand 3 Build a facsimile database C 36 Fax Support Setting Up Facsimile Support in MAINT After the facsimile card s and accompanying application software have been installed you can configure the facsimile settings From the MAINT application s Configuration menu select Fax Settings The following window displays FAX 40 and FAX 120 Settings r Setup and Administration Administration password i Event group to use when sending FAX ID for this system ass r FAX On Demand Maximum documents a caller can select mal Callers must call from FAX machine gl r FAX Send Parameters File to send as cover sheet 5 TIF Retry attempts for failed sends B Retry interval for failed sends minutes Figure C 17 FAX Settings Complete fields in this window as follows then click OK when finished Fax Support C 37 Table C 5 Fax Fields and Descriptions Field Description Administration Specify the password to be used for administrative access to the Password facsimile options used when adding facsimile documents to the facsimile database Event Group to use when sending Select the event group that processes outbound facsimiles Event group 6 is commonly used for facsimile purposes Make
134. NS 7 HOLD First 0 is the table number assigned Second 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 1 0 TRANS 7 HOLD lis the table number assigned 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Enter 1 1 HOLD First 1 is the table number assigned Second 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber d Enter 8 0 9999999 HOLD 8 is the disconnect table 0is a required entry 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 enter the CO line range dial 4 on the dialpad press HOLD press Btn 4 then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 9 then Btn 1 to program ringing assignments d Enter 690 3 on the dial pad then press HOLD 690 is the voice mail group 3 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 690 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button Disconnec
135. NT By receiving remote PathFinder messages inbound over a TCP IP connection from a remote PathFinder system and depositing them in the appropriate local mailbox Refer to Point To Point Messaging on page C 84 for more details on these processes Onelook Point to Point Server supports Onelook Unified messaging clients by supporting a POP SMTP interface to the local PathFinder message store It feeds outbound messages and accepts inbound messages from Onelook client systems Refer to Onelook Unified Messaging on page C 55 for more details on these processes Requirements Onelook Point to Point Server requires the following oO Oo PathFinder release 6 or higher Dedicated TCP IP access used for transport for Point To Point messaging TCP IP access for Onelook unified messaging clients Onelook Point to Point Server activation code for the software controller key All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function Onelook Point to Point Server C 75 Installation Onelook Point to Point Server should be installed from the PathFinder CD ROM by selecting either Point To Point messaging or Onelook Unified messaging If necessary run the PathFinder installation progra
136. OSHF Notify Immediate at 626 1627 627 DEPT SALES Greeting amp Frud to Hbx 1618 COS COS 68 Notify OFF 1628 351 KATHLEEN ENHANCE Greeting amp Frud to Hbx 1356 COS C0S61 Notify Immediate Pager at 768 6626 1629 629 PIER FRIGERIO Greeting amp Take Msg COS COSON Notify Immediate Pager at 248 7027 1638 638 FAX FAX Greeting amp Take Msg COS C0S AA Figure 6 13 Mailbox Settings Detail Report Example Data This report provides the following data Mailbox number Associated extension number Mailbox owner s name Mailbox state Group Department O On n 000 Notification state Class of service for which the mailbox is a member Setting Reports 6 21 Use This information is helpful in resolving problems with mailboxes Extension Settings Summary The Extension Settings Summary report summarizes the configuration of each extension in PathFinder Ej Report 221 Notepad File Edit Search Help BE 06 14 96 15 38 51 Extension Mailbox Name Action 626 1626 MIKE FORD Transfer to 626 Forward to Mbx 1626 627 1627 DEPT SALES Transfer to 627 Forward to Mbx 1627 628 1356 2 OVERSTREET Forward to Mbx 1356 629 1629 PIER FRIGERIO Transfer to 629 w Screen Forward to Mbx 1629 630 1630 FAX FAX Blind Transfer to 630 631 1631 SONYA O CAIN Transfer to 631 1 ip Extension Settings Summary a Page 61 Extension Range 626 to 646 Figure 6 14 Extension Settings Summary Report Example Data
137. OTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev IMPORTANT If Call Screening is used with Triad 2 then Auto Callback must be disabled in the phone system FLASH 01 Button 17 Phone System Set Up Starplus Triad 3 Hardware Requirements The following are hardware requirements for the STARPLUS Triad 3 in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides twelve ports O One DTMF A installed on the SLIB DTMF A provides four DTMF receivers O One RGU ring generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS Triad 3 include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 27 Table 3 12 Starplus Triad 3 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial gt and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn
138. Onelook Service Provider Window blank uses sesse sense Sek Gee ee ee ee Ge RR C 59 Onelook Service Provider Window complete c sesseessessssssessessecsscstecseeseesseess C 60 Outlook Options Window sessies ieke oe es Nek Sek Ge ERA EER Ri C 61 New Mail ICON ee N Ge EG EE C 62 Message Management Window ccsssssssessessesscsecsssssscsssssessussacsasssscssseseesnsesesnees C 62 Message Management WINdOW cssssssssscssecssecssscneccssessscsssessecsscenseeseecscensesseecseess C 64 Onelook Voice Message Viewer Window iese seek seek Gee ae Gee RR Gee Rae C 65 New Form Selection Window siele esse Ses ede ede nde Ge ee Ge C 67 Onelook Voice Message Viewer Window uie seen seen ee oek Gee ee ee RR Re Ge ee C 68 Onelook Fax Message Viewer ccsessssssssssessecsecsssssscsssnscssssnccsssescsscsnscsscesscsecsncencenscees C 69 Archive Folder Setup in Outlook sesse sesse see ee ae eke ER Gee ee ee Ge RR eek C 71 Main Mailer WINdOW ee GE ES Ge ee Ge Ge ee ie C 78 Connection Status SMTP IN WINGOW iese seen sek sen seek eek ee GER RR Gee ee Ge RAAR C 80 Connection Status SMTP OUt WiINdOW csescsssscssecsecssccsseeseecseccssceseceseecseceseesseeess C 81 Connection Status Pop WINGOW derde seerde Se Ore GE ee Ge NG C 82 Connection Status Master Tab scascassssscacsscoccssscssescassaceconnscocecsocasescoetsssczavecusrenscctnssuseens C 83 Point to Point Settings WINKOW ie EO Ee ree Ee ee Ge ke C 86 Point to Point Location Settings WindOW uie sesse ee
139. Opening Prompts Some people attempt to run TeleQueue without using an opening prompt This is not recommended due to the confusion it can create Pressing a Key to Stay in Queue It is not necessary for the caller to press a key to stay on hold To accomplish this increase the number of tries in Configuration Line 9 Hang Up Detection The best type of hang up detection for TeleQueue is Drop in Loop Current It is highly recommended that when using TeleQueue you use telephone lines that provide this feature TeleQueue C 105 Prompt Names and Descriptions Table C 6 Telequeque Prompts and Descriptions TQ_INTRO VOX Your call will be answered in the order that it was received TQ_INSTR VOX Press 0 at any time to be transferred to the operator While you are waiting you will be prompted to press 1 to remain on hold TQ_CONT VOX Please press 1 to continue to hold or press 0 to reach an operator TQ_CONT2 VOX Used for the number 1 caller when you want to say something different than what is in TQ_CONT VOX TQ_NEXT VOX 1 will now transfer you please do not hang up TO POS1 VOX There is only 1 person in front of you please continue to hold TO POSX VOX There are TO FRONT VOX Callers in front of you TO CALLMVOX You have a call from TeleQueue TO MUSIC VOX Music prerecorded played if no prompt files exist for this queue TQGE
140. PBXpert on page 2 42 Q How do record prompts for the Menus created A There are two ways to record Menu prompts Oo Oo Boom Box Boom Box allows you to record menu prompts via the sound card in your computer or via the Dialogic board on PathFinder Record Prompts When Record Prompts is set as a Key Action ina Menu this allows access to prompts in that Menu level Refer to Key Action Definitions on page 5 90 Command Files amp Notification Scripts Command Files are used in PathFinder to expand the basic capabilities to meet the needs of special notification paging systems phone systems TIE lines and special installations Command files can be used in many places such as Oo Oo O 0 n Mailbox notification refer to Notification Settings on page 5 73 Extension forwarding refer to Setting Up Phone Lines on page 5 102 Mailbox forwarding refer to Setting Up Phone Lines on page 5 102 Time controls refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 Directly from a menu refer to Editing a Menu on page 5 87 Command Files A 1 Command Files A command file is an ASCII text file with one command per line An ASCII text file is also known as a plain text file You can use any editor including Microsoft Word Notepad or Edit to create a Command File Be certain when using any editor to save the file in a Text Only format One command per line means that each
141. PF82 04 AA DAID WT Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 YH Dialog 4 Voice Board 2 EP TOM Bus CO Bus 0 10 Click File gt Exit then reboot to load dialogic drivers Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 33 VFX40ESC plus 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM HY EL I E Dialogic System Software 1 Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM IE Programs The following window displays Computer Name Dialogic Configuration Manager 2 Click Connect 2 34 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert The Dialogic Configuration Manager window appears Dialogic Configuration Manager male slu ele o als E Configured Devices on_PF82 04 D x1D YO Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 YT Dialog 4 Voice Board 2 TDM Bus bas CI Bus 0 3 Click on the Stop Service icon in the toolbar red stop sign Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 35 4 Select Action gt Add Device as shown below Dialogic Configuration Manager Add Devi estate DEVIGE WE Eriable DEVIGE Disatle DE ALL DEVIGE SUG DEVICE The Add Hardware Wizard window displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Add Hardware Wizard 5 Select VFX in the left pane and VFX 40ESC Plus in the right pane then click Next 2 36 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert The following window displays Dialog
142. PathFinder installation procedure the initial analysis and preparation of your system prior to installing hardware and software Perform a System Analysis 2 1 Perform a System Analysis You must perform an initial analysis and prepare your system prior to installation of hardware and software Before starting the installation of PathFinder you need to consider certain hardware requirements and recommendations Having the proper hardware configuration is a key factor in PathFinder s performance and reliability System Requirements These guidelines help reduce the possibility of hardware related problems with PathFinder All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Windows NT 2000 Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function 2 2 Perform a System Analysis Minimum Requirements The following are system requirements for PathFinder Table 2 1 Minimum System Requirements 12 Port System Component 4 Port System 8 Port System or higher Computer Intel based Pentium Intel based Pentium Intel based Pentium Processor 300 MHZ or faster 667 MHz or faster 733 MHz or faster Memory 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB Hard Disk 1 2 GB hard drive 2 1 GB hard drive 2 1 GB hard drive 200 hours of voice 400 hours of voice 400 hours
143. PendingNotifies Cancels all pending notifications for the global mailbox The command deletes all queued notification requests It does not modify paging files PlayVoicePage DialPrefixForWhereField Plays the next voice message file Dials the dialing prefix defined in the Registry based on the length of the number in the Notification number field of the global mailbox Should only be used on voice pagers Related Commands PlayFirstMessage For example the registry contains the variable AaDialPrefix07 9 The notification number from the global mailbox has 7 digits When sending the DTMF for the Call or Dial commands we first dial lt AaDialPrefix07 gt then the number defined in the Notification number for the global mailbox More specifically we are sending a notification for mailbox 1221 with a notification number of 1234567 The command file is written as OffHook Sleep 1 DialPrefixForWhereField DialMailboxWhere PathFinder would go off hook sleep for 1 second dial 9 and then 1234567 Related Commands DialMailbox A 8 Command Files Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String DeleteAllPages Action Deletes all pager Description associated to the global mailbox messages ProcessNextEvent Processes the next This is used to speed up the event handling event for this channel because the channel does no
144. Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev IMPORTANT If Call Screening is used with Triad 1 then Auto Callback must be disabled in the phone system FLASH 01 Button 17 3 24 Phone System Set Up Starplus Triad 2 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the STARPLUS Triad 2 in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU One or two SLIBs is an internal RGU and more than two SLIBs are an external RGU Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS Triad 2 include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call o Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 25 Table 3 11 Starplus Triad 2 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and
145. Questions A list of questions to ask Double click on a question to edit C 28 Chalk Talk 2 Double click on question to edit parameters Question 2 Ask for telephone The Edit Question screen displays detail for that question Edit Question 100 2 x ID 100 Question Number Description Ask for telephone Prompt fi 00 2 vox Type of Response C Voice DTMF Lenath of Response hs digits Terminating Digit n Figure C 15 Edit Ouestion Screen Field ID Description Fixed field Ouestion Number Fixed field Description Text Action that describes the question Prompt What prompt should be played Prompts should be stored in the PathFinder QA Prompts directory Usually the prompt name is made up of the Q amp A ID followed by a hyphen followed by the question number You can specify any prompt located in the QA Prompts directory If you want the recorded response to contain a header or leader that indicates what is to follow you can record a small prompt in the file name L Prompt Name FOR EXAMPLE If prompt 100 1 vox contains the prompt Please say your name after the tone the prompt L100 1 vox would contain the prompt Name or Answer 17 If the L prompt isn t present it is not added to the resulting message Chalk Talk C 29 Field Description Type of Response The system can
146. R 04 16 99 1223 BO ALEXANDER 08 14 21 Command File DEFAULT CF Attempt 01 Line 07 13 45 22 Command File DEFAULT CF Attempt 01 Line 07 13 55 44 Command File DEFAULT CF Attempt 02 Line 08 14 06 04 Command File DEFAULT CF Attempt 03 Line 08 14 16 24 Command File DEFAULT CF Attempt 04 Line 08 Figure 6 11 Notification Usage Report Example 6 18 Setting Reports Data The Notification Activity report provides the following information Date The selected reporting period Mailbox The selected mailbox for the report Time Time of day that the notification was executed Attempt Attempt number of notification Line Line number where the notification went out Use This information can be used to determine if notifications are being executed in a timely fashion Setting Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the Settings reports functions available through the Reports menu in MAINT Settings reports identify various PathFinder settings that were entered during configuration Information is available for mailboxes extensions and menus Setting Reports Mailbox Settings Summary The Mailbox Settings Summary report summarizes the configuration of each mailbox in PathFinder Repott 211 Notepad File Edit Search Help Mailbox Settings Summary 06 14 96 15 30 58 Mailbox Range 1626 to 1665 Mailbox Extension Name MIKE FORD DEP
147. R ed se bee ee ed 5 103 Edit Line Settings WiINdOW ss GER Ee Ee GE EG EE ee 5 103 Edit Line Setting WiINdoW e ie Ee eeR RE R eRRRR Re ee ee EG 5 104 Edit Line Setting WINdoOW se N Ge Ge GE oe Ge 5 104 Figures xi Edit Line Setting WINdOW se ie ee ee ee ie 5 105 Edit Line Settings WiINdOW sek RR ER KERE GR eens sen ek eke ke ees 5 106 Edit gt System LISTS ier Ge SR a ee ree 6 3 System Lists WINAOW sesse eke EE oes NE pe tetsscdancusdhedsbvcedaseascuacetassucene 6 4 Create a system List WINdOW issie sesse dee ee kes Gene AR see eke Ge Ke ee 6 4 Edit System List VVIRGIOWE eis Ge Ge N edele Ee ER N es ek AG 6 5 Setup Report Generation WindOW e een sen see Geek ek Gee ee ERA eek eek RR Ge Gee ee 6 9 Usage Report Example SS IE Ge N ae mania 6 10 Mailbox Usage Report Example sesse sen see see ee Gee ee ER Roe Gee ee ee RARR ee 6 11 Extension Usage Report Example sen see see seek ee Ge Gee ee ee RR AR ek ee Ge 6 13 Menu Activity Report Example uue ses sses ses sees seek oek Gee ea eek ee eR Roe ee Rek ee ee gee 6 15 Fax Documents Report Example usuuseu se sen see see seekoeie Geek Gee ee ee RR eek ee 6 16 Notification Usage Report Example uu essens see see seen se Ge Gee ee ee ee RR eek eg 6 17 Mailbox Settings Summary Report Example uu sesssscssssssecceesecsseecseessecensecseeese 6 19 Mailbox Settings Detail Report Example sesse sense sek ee sek Re Gee eek ee 6 20 Extension Settings Summary Report Example
148. SMDI SYS25 or NITSUK If you know the correct value you may type it in You may also press BROWSE to select from the list of interfaces that have corresponding integration modules If you are unsure leave this setting blank You can leave the setting as is by clicking Finish To change the setting enter a new value or click Browse to review the integration files on the system Once you are satisfied with the setting click Finish If you wish to leave all settings as they currently are click ICancell Figure 5 58 Edit Line Setting Window 7 Select a module from the list address the options that appear at the right of the window they vary according to the module selected then click on OK Refer to Suggested Initial Module Settings on page 5 107 for more information on configuring these fields Field Description Mailbox Prompts the caller to select a voice mailbox or sends caller to a specific mailbox depending on your selection from the drop down list Extension Prompts the caller to select an extension or sends caller to a specific extension depending on your selection from the drop down list Menu Plays the selected PathFinder menu Owner Access Grants access to mailbox owner privileges for a specific mailbox or prompts the caller for a mailbox with password prompting in either case 5 106 Line Settings Field Description Run Module Activates the selected
149. Skip Message Allows subscribers to skip messages by pressing 6 and 3 while listening to a message Class of Service Settings 5 71 Owner Send Options These parameters determine the functions available to subscribers when sending messages Detailed instructions on using these options are included in the PathFinder User s Manual and on the Quick Reference Card The following options are available Field Description Not Allowed Used for creating simple mailboxes to which none of the following options can apply Urgent Allows the subscriber to assign urgent status to a message Urgent messages are preceded by an Urgent prompt and are played as the first of a group of messages Confidential Allows the subscriber to specify that a message cannot be forwarded Future Send Allows delivery of messages at a future time and date Outside Numbers Allows the subscriber to send a message to an outside number System Lists Allows the subscriber to send messages to a system wide list the list is maintained by the administrator Confirmation Enables the subscriber to request receipt information for a marked massage so PathFinder notifies the sender when a message has been heard 5 72 Class of Service Settings Owner Edit Options These parameters determine the mailbox customization available to subscribers within this COS Detailed instructions on using these options are incl
150. T SALES KATHLEEN ENHANCE PIER FRIGERIO FAX FAX SONYA O CAIN CHASTITY MULDROW LAURA VINCENT BILL BLAKELY WAYNE MORRIS FTPRIVATE MBOX DAVID RE LAARNI MATA KELLY WIEGARD MCELLERY BADIO LARRY WESTRICK JON FRIEDLINE Action Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Frud to Hbx 1618 Greeting amp Frud to Hbx 1356 Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Take Hsg Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Take Msg in Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Take Hsg Greeting amp Take Hsg Frud to Menu M1639 Frud to Ext 681 Greeting amp Take Msg Greeting amp Take Msg in 642 Greeting amp Take Msg in Greeting amp Take Hsg Greeting amp Take Hsg Figure 6 12 Mailbox Settings Summary Report Example Data This report presents for each mailbox the following data o Mailbox number O Associated extension number O Mailbox owner s name O Mailbox state Use This information can be used to keep track of all mailboxes on PathFinder This can be helpful in maintaining mailboxes in a dynamic work environment 6 20 Setting Reports Mailbox Settings Detail The Mailbox Settings Detail report provides an in depth review of the configuration of each mailbox in PathFinder Repott 212 Notepad File Edit Search Help Mailbox Settings Detail 06 14 96 15 31 56 Page 61 Mailbox Range 1626 to 1665 Mailbox Extension Name Action 1626 626 MIKE FORD Greeting amp Take Hsg COS C
151. TCSR VOX Enter your CSR number followed by pressing TQGETSTA VOX Enter your CSR status code or Press 0 if available or 2 if out to lunch TQEBAD1 VOX CSR extension TQEBAD2 VOX is invalid TQEOK1 VOX CSR extension TQEOK2 VOX is now set for status code TQEOK3 VOX Thank you TQ_TRANS VOX Press 1 to accept TeleQueue call All the prompts in TeleQueue are checked and if they do not exist then TeleQueue does not try to play them Therefore you may simply erase or change any prompts you wish All prompts for TeleQueue are stored in the PathFinder VOX directory The TQExxxx VOX prompts are played when a CSR changes the status code of an extension C 106 TeleQueue If the extension number entered does not exist in the extension list in MAINT then the TQEBAD1 and TQBAD2 prompts are played If the status code is successfully changed then TQEOK1 TQEOK2 and TQEOK3 are played The extension number is played between 1 and 2 and the status code number is played between 2 and 3 Queue Introductions Each queue can have its own introduction and TQ_CALL VOxX file The name for the introduction or greeting file is TQ lt queue gt GRT The greeting file for queue 234 would be TQ234 GRT Also the first caller into the queue can have a different greeting file The file for the first caller ends in GRO instead of GRT For example queue 234 would use the fil
152. Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev IMPORTANT If Call Screening is used with Triad S then Auto Callback must be disabled in the phone system FLASH 01 Button 17 3 22 Phone System Set Up Starplus Triad 1 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the STARPLUS Triad 1 in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS Triad 1 include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return
153. VI in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases STARPLUS infinite PathFinder and Onelook are trademarks of VODAVI Technology Inc seh 2001 Contents Introduction Bed EE AE EA EE RE OR ER Ee 1 1 PathFinder Description esse sense see ee Rek eke Ge RR Re Gee ee ee 1 1 Basic PROCESS ie oe er or ie eg aas ERE i 1 1 PathFinder Components ss sr seats Re Ge ke 1 2 Installation Perform a System Analysis see esse esse ed sesde sesse ees eke EE 2 1 System Requirements iese eek skies Gee Gegee Ge ese kode eR ke N 2 1 Determining System Size uses sesse Re Rees 2 3 PC System Placement as Ge ke Rd De 2 5 Telephony Hardware Compatibility 0 sesse ses sesse seek eek geskaad 2 5 Install and Configure Hardware sesse sen sesse eek Gee ee eek Gee Roe ee RR 2 5 Preparation ME EE EE NE TEE NE 2 6 Overall Hardware Setup Procedure sen see seen see see ee eek Ge RR RR 2 6 Dialogic ProduEts sesse N ed er ee ee ie 2 7 Telephony Hardware Configuration uses sees sesse geskenk eek Geen ed 2 7 Telephony Hardware Installation sesse sees ssen see seeks eR ee Gesoek Gee ee 2 10 Voice Network Attachment siese kes Reeks ee gie 2 12 Software Security Key ies ee EK Se AR BAR ee kes ese EeN ek Gie Den dead oe 2 13 Install and Configure Operating System iese see esse see eek ER Gee Gee AE 2 14 aie Ee ei GR N EO Oe 2 14 KOI AUTHOR sie N EE ee ee inana ia 2 14 Install PathFinder Software sissie
154. Voice Messaging Plain Old Telephone Set Refer to SLT Telephone connectors jacks Dialogic bus type Also refer to PEB Single Line Telephone Simplified Message Desk Interface The terms user and subscriber are used interchangeably throughout this manual A subscriber can be either a mailbox user an extension user or a user who has both a mailbox and an extension Universal Dialogic Diagnostic Utility Allows you to run tests on your voice board to determine the integrity of the board The best way to determine if your Dialogic boards are configured correctly is to use the UDDU Refer to How Can Be Certain I Configured My Dialogic Boards Correctly on page 2 54 The terms user and subscriber are used interchangeably throughout this manual A subscriber can be either a mailbox user an extension user or a user who has both a mailbox and an extension The terms voice messaging and voice mail are used interchangeably iv Glossary Index A Abort a Connected Transfer 5 31 Access Levels 4 1 4 10 Action options 5 52 Actions 5 52 5 84 ActiveVex 5 100 Activity Reports 4 7 6 10 Adapter 2 18 2 20 Add Prompt 7 7 Adding a Voice Description to a Fax Document C 42 Adding Registry Variables 3 3 ADMIN C 40 Administration Password C 37 Administrator Access 4 11 Adobe Acrobat Reader 2 20 ADPCM 7 1 Advanced Tone Features 2 25 2 51 Analog Line 2 12 2 1
155. a in the Edit window Table 7 3 File Functions Buttons Button Definition Append This appends a non indexed prompt file to the current file or prompt Write This writes the current prompt to a non indexed prompt file This does not save the currently opened file Read This reads in a non indexed prompt file on top of the current file or prompt Delete This option deletes a prompt from an indexed file Save This saves the changes made to the current file or prompt Exit Exits the Edit window and returns you to the main Boom Box window Add Prompt Clicking the Add Prompt button from the main Boom Box window allows you to add a new prompt to the current file This option is only visible if working on an indexed prompt The Add Prompt window is shown below Add Prompt Prompt Name Add Figure 7 4 Add Prompt Window 7 8 Boom Box Application File Information At the bottom of the main menu is the file information pane Please note that you do not type or otherwise enter this information instead it automatically displays based on specific information relevant to your file The five File Information fields are as follows Name The name of the file you are working on Type Either indexed or non indexed Format Either ADPCM for VOX file type or WAV for WAV file type Device Type Specifies how the file is played or recorded There are two options A sound card
156. able Language modules are optional modules that are purchased separately You must purchase the optional multilingual module and language prompts order to use this feature Next Previous Help O English O German O Russian O Malay O Spanish O Kanji O Dutch oO Tamil O French O Korean O Custom O Mandarin 5 14 Module Settings Retries Timeouts The Retries Timeouts settings determine how PathFinder handles erroneous input from callers Some modules use these settings but basic PathFinder does not Menus have their own retries and time out settings that take precedence when they are active Module Settings Retries TimeDuts Retries TimeOuts Caller Retries B attempts Cancel Owner Retries 2 attempts Next Inter Digit Time B seconds Previous Digit Time 2 seconds Help Figure 5 9 Module Settings Retries TimeOuts Window RETRY ATTEMPTS You should set the number of retries to a number high enough so that callers who are unfamiliar with PathFinder are not prematurely dropped TIME OUT INTERVALS Set the timeout option to an amount of time long enough for the caller to complete the longest operation on PathFinder Because mailbox extension owners are generally more familiar with PathFinder than outside callers it is recommended that they be given fewer retries and a shorter time out interval than outside callers Module Settings Field Caller Retries Descr
157. access by callers non owners O Select the Owners check box if you want to maintain a count of mailbox extension maintenance accesses by the mailbox owner Language Mailbox and extension prompts can be played in an alternate language This parameter defines what language prompts will be used for each subscriber For example when an owner accesses their mailbox a prompt tells the subscriber how many messages are in the mailbox This parameter defines the language for such prompts Languages other than English are optional modules and must be purchased separately Restrict OutDial to You can use this field to disable long distance dialing from the extension or from mailbox notification by entering the number of digits required for local calls typically 7 or 10 This setting determines how many digits PathFinder can outdial for notification or from an extension Class of Service Settings 5 61 Greeting Settings Click on the Greeting button in the COS Edit window to begin defining greeting options for the COS The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC Voice Mail Greeting Figure 5 38 Edit COS Voice Mail Greeting Settings Window Greeting Type Select from the following types of pre recorded messages called prompts to be used when greeting a caller Personal The Personal greeting option plays a greeting recorded by the mailbox owner If the owner does not record a personal greeting the Sy
158. age Press 3 to cancel Press 4 to append the message Oo n n 0 Press 5 to re record the message Caller Send Options Select Urgent Confidential or both if you want callers to be able to specify those options for the messages they leave O Urgent messages are preceded by an Urgent prompt and are played as the first of a group of messages O Confidential messages cannot be forwarded Last Options Select according to what you want PathFinder to do once the caller has left a message If set to Off PathFinder says Thank you and hangs up If set to On PathFinder s default menu options are played If set to Menu the Last Options Menu is played refer to Last Options Menu on page 5 67 Setting this to Off limits a caller s ability to navigate PathFinder Last Options Menu This determines what menu PathFinder plays if Last Options is set to Menu see above For more information on menus refer to Menu Settings on page 5 83 5 68 Class of Service Settings Mailbox Owner Settings Mailbox owner options determine the modifications individual subscribers can make to their personal mailboxes Click on Mailbox Owner in the Edit COS window to begin defining mailbox owner options for the COS The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC Voice Mail Owner First Time Help x Message Date Time Auto Play Play entire date Oldest Message First X Owner Play Options IX Save Msgs
159. age the PC or its components An un interruptible power supply UPS is recommended Telephony Hardware Compatibility The following are the Dialogic cards that are used in the PathFinder o Dialog 4 o D42 SX NOTE Drivers are available O VEX AOESCplus o D42 SL however they will no longer be updated by Dialogic Install and Configure Hardware The following tasks must be completed to install and configure your system hardware oO O n n 0 Install Dialogic drivers automatically installs in Windows 2000 Configure and install telephony hardware Make network attachments Make host computer attachment Install the software key 2 6 Install and Configure Hardware Preparation Gather the following items in one place before starting the installation process Voice Cards PathFinder includes at least one voice card Each card must be inspected for possible adjustments to the switches or the jumpers The cards are fragile and susceptible to static electricity These items can be purchased from a computer retailer Use an anti static wrist strap and if possible an anti static floor mat during inspection and installation of the voice cards and other hardware Screwdriver Used to remove and replace the computer chassis and install the voice cards Size and type should be appropriate for your computer most require Phillips head Needle Nose Pliers Used to remove or replace jumpers on voice cards The plie
160. application Installation Forms B 1 BASIC INFORMATION Job Name Sales Rep End User Contact Administrator Phone End User Contact responsible for recording custom prompts Installer User Trainer Installation Dates Start Complete End User Training Telephone System Information Type of telephone system brand amp model How many digits are there in the telephone system s station or extension numbers Is the telephone system capable of supporting In Band Integration YesL Nol If YES is the telephone system equipped to support In Band Integration YesL NoL this includes both telephone system hardware amp software What DTMF Digits does the telephone system use to turn on voice mail indicators What DTMF Digits does the telephone system use to turn off voice mail indicators Does the telephone system use a Hook Switch Transfer on Single Line Ports YesL Nol Number of CO Lines or Trunks connected to the telephone system Number of telephones extensions connected to the telephone system List the single line port extension numbers that are to be used for Voice Mail Ports Will the Single Line Ports be placed in a voice mail group hunt group YesL nol What is the telephone system s voice mail group number or numbers Installation Forms B 2 BASIC INFORMATION continued Voice Mail Functions Number Of Voice Mailbox Users Subscribers Number of Internal Subscribers who have a phones in
161. application to transmit facsimile documents directly from a PC to PathFinder is highly recommended as the quality of such facsimile transmissions is much higher than when sending from a traditional facsimile machine To build a facsimile database using a software based facsimile program I Create the facsimile document using a word processor page layout or desktop publishing application Send the facsimile to PathFinder via the facsimile software Most facsimile software programs support extended dialing strings You can use this feature to set up a dialing string that sends the document and automatically assigns a document number eliminating the need to enter this information manually A typical dialing string is presented below 9 XXX XXXX W YYYY 1 ZZZZZZZZ 1 Where o 9is any prefix digit or sequence of digits needed to gain access to the telephone system O Commas are used in the dial string to pause dialing for two seconds each giving the telephone system and PathFinder time to connect and so on C 42 Fax Support O XXX XXxXxX is the phone number for the Fax On Demand system If you are calling from a telephone extension and the Fax On Demand system also has an extension number you can use the shorter extension number O Wis the number assigned as the facsimile ADMIN key in the facsimile menu o YYYY is the ADMIN password o 1isthe menu option to create a new document O ZZZZZZZZ is the docume
162. as three fields Table 8 3 System Activity Log Fields Field First Indicates the time the Error log line that was generated Second the type of log generated INFO or DEBUG O INFO data typically consists of logins logouts and actions on the database O DEBUG data typically consists of specific actions on the databases Third the message describing why the line was generated System Activity Log The System Activity log is made up of separate files Each day PathFinder runs it generates a separate file The files are stored in the HELLONT LOGS directory The name of the files is DLyymmdd Log where yy is the year mmis the month and dd is the day For example the log for May 7 1999 would be named DL990507 LOG The System Activity log is more complicated than the Error log Every phone call PathFinder takes generates log lines indicating what the caller did PathFinder outputs system activity log lines similar to those found in the Error log refer to System Error Log on page 8 2 System Activity Log 8 5 In general each log line has four fields Table 8 4 System Activity Log Fields Field Indicates First the type of log line generated Second the time the line was generated in hh mm ss ttt format Third the channel line that output of the line A line number of three hyphens indicates a system message from PathFinder Fourth th
163. ategory O General Settings on page 5 59 O Greeting Settings on page 5 61 Menu Settings 5 83 Message Types Settings on page 5 63 Mailbox Caller Settings on page 5 66 Mailbox Owner Settings on page 5 68 Notification Settings on page 5 73 Auto Attendant Settings on page 5 77 Modifying a COS If you need to make adjustments to the COS you ve defined perform the following steps 1 Start up PathFinder MAINT 2 Click on the COS button on the toolbar 3 Highlight the COS to modify then click on Select 4 Click on the button that corresponds to the category of function to be changed If you need to move from one category to the next use the page controls that appear at the bottom of the window after you select a category O O nn O Deleting a COS To delete a COS entirely perform the following steps 1 Start up PathFinder MAINT 2 Click on COS on the toolbar 3 Highlight the COS to delete then click on Delete Menu Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the menu functions available through the Edit menu in MAINT 5 84 Menu Settings PathFinder provides sophisticated multi level menuing capabilities that can be used to direct users and callers to information assist them in performing tasks and guide them in their use of PathFinder Menus combine other modules and features to create sophisticated call processing a
164. athfinder that you created in Log On Windows 2000 on page 2 15 then press Enter when you finish typing Click Edit Choose Add Value In the Value Name field type Default Password then press Enter when you finish typing In the String field type the password for the user name you created in Log On Windows 2000 on page 2 15 then press Enter when you finish typing Double click AutoAdminLogon 10 Change the value to 1 then click OK 2 18 Install and Configure Operating System 11 Double click DefaultDomainName and verify that the value is the name of the local domain or the desired logon domain Change it if necessary then click OK 12 Click OK 13 Close Regedt32 Install Adapter Ifyou have anetwork adapter card NIC in your system confirm that it is properly configured and operates within normal parameters If an NICis installed you must enable TCP IP protocol Then you must skip this Install Adapter procedure and proceed instead to the Install Streams Environment procedure To set up a network adapter perform the following steps Install Adapter Windows NT SO RIA Ne 10 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel Double click on the Network icon When prompted to install Networking click No In the Network Settings window click on the Adapters tab Click Add Select MS Loopback Adapter from the Network Adapters window When prompted for the fra
165. ations that should be done on facsimiles being delivered by this server For example if this server is located in Holland and it will be handling facsimiles originating from the US then the phone numbers will be prefixed by 01131 But when people in Holland dial the number locally they do not need the 01131 Therefore the 01131 should be stripped off for local dialers only You can do that by adding a translation as shown in the following window Add Translation Description Strip US internation Translation from Cancel DE to m Figure C 23 Add Translation Window When performing local dialing the system uses the dialing prefixes specified in MAINT You can include a new prefix if necessary Only include numbers in the translations Internet Fax Delivery C 51 Facsimile Routing This item lets you edit a table that indicates where facsimile messages should be routed The destination phone number is used to determine which server should be used Routing Table Phone Mask l Netherlands Route to Holland 2 Route to Scottsdale AZ 3 NYServer Route to NY 4 Default Keep local Figure C 24 Routing Table Window Special characters and are used to indicate wildcards O The key matches no digits as well as one or more digits O The key matches a single digit O The digits 0 through 9 are matched explicitly C 52 Internet Fax Delivery General Settings General Settings EE
166. ator Manual for more information The option to prompt callers to leave a facsimile can be set as a COS feature as set in the Class of Service Message Type Menu window Again refer to the Class of Service chapter in the System Administrator Manual for details Internet Fax Delivery C 45 An alternative method is to have the mailbox owner prompt the caller to leave a facsimile in the mailbox greeting The key callers press to leave a facsimile is 3 A typical greeting might sound like this You ve reached John I m away from my desk right now To leave a voice message press one To leave a facsimile press three After pressing 3 the caller is instructed on how to leave a facsimile message as described below To leave a facsimile message 1 Access the desired party s voice mail 2 Press 3 to leave a facsimile message 3 Press to leave a voice attachment to the facsimile if the attachment al option is available or press to skip the attachment 4 Manually start the facsimile transmission Retrieving Facsimiles Retrieving facsimiles from a mailbox is a PathFinder user function Please refer to the PathFinder User s Manual for details on retrieving facsimiles Internet Fax Delivery Internet Fax Delivery is an optional software component of PathFinder With internet Fax Delivery IFD two or more PathFinder voice processing systems can use the Internet to exchange facsimile documents for delivery By u
167. ault Lengths Mailbox length 3 Cancel Extension length B Next Previous Minimum Password Length ja dd Figure 5 2 Module Settings Digit Lengths Window 5 2 Module Settings Field Indicates default length for Mailbox Length Mailbox Numbers maximum 7 digits This is usually set the same as the extension length Leave this blank if allowing variable length mailboxes Extension Length Telephone Extension Numbers maximum 7 digits Leave this blank if allowing variable length extensions This number may be determined by your phone system Minimum Password Digits maximum 9 characters Password Length EXAMPLES Digit length for mailboxes extensions and passwords O 2digits from 10 to 99 O 3digits from 100 to 999 O 4digits from 1000 to 9999 O digits from 100000 to 999999 Record Playback The Record Playback settings are used to access PathFinder s recording and playback settings Module Settings Record Playback Settings Record Settings Minimum Record Length seconds Cancel Truncate Recording p x10msec Next Previous Record Tone Length 02secs O4secs C 0 6 secs ld Help r Playback Settings FF and REW Speed x 1 10 seconds Figure 5 3 Module Settings Record Playback Settings Window Module Settings 5 3 Field Minimum Record Length Parameter determines This field determines the sho
168. ay 5 33 Ring Detection 5 33 ring detection threshold 2 8 Ring edge to detect 5 33 Rings 4 6 5 32 RJ 11 jack 2 11 RJ 14 jack 2 11 RS 232 2 5 3 1 3 5 Run ActiveVex 5 91 5 100 Run Module 5 91 5 100 5 106 Running the Monitor Application 7 13 Russian 5 13 S Save Message 5 76 Save Msgs 5 70 Screen Caller 5 53 Screen Length 5 80 Screening 5 79 sensitivity 7 9 Sentinel Drivers 2 21 Server 7 14 C 56 Server PC C 57 Servers in Network C 49 Service Provider window keeps displaying C 72 Set Dialogic Service Startup Mode 2 26 Set Hang up 5 29 Set Up Phone System 3 6 Set Wait 5 29 Index Setting MAINT User Passwords 4 12 Setting Up Fax Support in MAINT C 36 Setting Up Phone Lines 5 102 Setting Up Time Control Parameters 5 94 Settings Guidelines C 48 Settings Reports 4 7 6 18 Setup amp Configuration Internet Fax Delivery C 47 Setup Reporting 6 9 Silence 5 79 Silence Interval 5 26 Single Mailbox 5 43 Single tones 5 28 Skip Message 5 70 SMDILINI File 3 4 SmdiDigitLength 3 3 SmdiMaxRings 3 3 3 4 SmdiMaxWaitTime 3 3 SmdiMbxPassword 3 3 SmdiSkipCheck 3 3 SmdiXOnXOff 3 3 SMTP In C 80 Software 2 2 Software Installation 2 21 Software Overview 2 51 Software Security Key 2 5 2 13 Spanish 5 13 speakers 7 1 Special Characters amp Strings 4 9 Specific Extension Number 5 91 Specific Mailbox Number 5 90 Star 4 9 Starplus Systems 3 6 96EX 3 7 DHS 3 18 SPD 1428 3 12 SPD 2856 3 14 SPD
169. back Auto Attendant Logging Operators Voice Mail Language and Retries TimeOuts controls how the voice processing system behaves including languages on PathFinder O System Settings Directories Auxiliary Tasks LPT COM Ports and Time Periods controls the auxiliary tasks on PathFinder O Telephony Settings Voice Lines MWI Notification Rings Transfer Settings Hang Up Detection and Perfect Call controls transfer settings and hang up detection parameters O Other MAINT Settings PBX Integrations any option module purchased and the Registry O Refer to Appendix C to configure any optional modules that display in this menu such as Point to Point or Fax settings Edit Menu You can further configure PathFinder via MAINT s Ey Reports Help Edit menu Refer to Chapter 5 MAINT Application System Class DI Service Settings for more information on these options Menus Time Control O User Settings Defining and maintaining users Line Settings mailboxes and extensions System Lists O Class of Service Settings Defining classes of service COSs that can be applied to groups of mailboxes Menu Settings Creating and modifying voice menus Time Control Settings Creating and editing time controls to activate or disable PathFinderfeatures depending on time of day or day of week O Line Settings Defining line settings to assign modules or applications to different phone lines O Distribution Li
170. ble extension and mailbox features depending on date day and or time settings Time controls can be used to route calls send callers to voice mail and play menus among other things based on time and day settings o Upto ten distinct time periods can be defined within a time controls setting allowing you to make a time control as simple or as complex as needed Time control searches by date then by day then by time Time controls can be chained together to allow more than ten day time options o You can use the time control function to o Edit a time control O Create anew Control O Delete a Control 5 94 Time Control Settings Setting Up Time Control Parameters To work with time controls click on the Edit Time Control Records icon on the toolbar fourth icon The following window displays Select Time Control to Edit BASIC Figure 5 49 Select Time Control To Edit Window Creating a Template Time Control If you are creating multiple time controls with similar settings the use of a template time control is helpful The template time control is a time control with the basic settings defined and is copied when creating new time controls Typically you would use the 8 5 time control as the template time control However if you would like to create a specific template time control perform the following steps 1 Inthe Select Time Control to Edit window click on Create This displays the Create Time Cont
171. call into PathFinder CallListPrompter Voice Prompts All voice prompts should be stored in the VOX directory and must be 4 digits in length The following system prompts may be used or the numbers can be changed by the system administrator Valid numbers are 0 000 to 0 999 and 1 000 to 1 999 The first digit indicates the language 0 English 1 Spanish Table C 1 System Prompts Prompt Dialog 0010 This is the voice processing system calling to notify you 0011 This is the absentee student system calling to notify you that your child was absent from school today 0012 This is the emergency notification system calling to notify you that school will be closed today 0013 This is the substitute teacher system calling to check your availability for being a substitute teacher 0019 Thank you Good bye 0020 To confirm that you have received this message press 1 0021 To confirm that you have received this message enter your ID number 0022 Toconfirm that you have received this message enter your child s student ID 0023 To accept this assignment press 1 otherwise press 2 0024 To leave a message in response to this notification press 1 0025 After the tone start recording your message When finished you may press any key or hang up C 16 Chalk Talk Report Options To create a detailed report showing the details and parameters required
172. ccessed and the caller pressed the 2 key which is assigned the Extension Auto Attendant Start Key Then they entered 60 This is apparent because the caller was transferred to extension 260 PathFinder detected a no answer condition Because PathFinder received a No Answer condition the caller was transferred to mailbox 1260 The caller recorded a message for 1 41 minutes and then pressed the key The last line shows that the call ended Ca represents the Supervised Transfer option and Ho represents the Call Holding option when using supervised transfers System Activity Log 8 7 Debugging PathFinder can give more or less information depending on the level of debugging enabled on PathFinder Refer to Logging on page 5 6 for more information on logging and debugging options Below is a sample of the Activity Log Sample 2 but with all debugging options enabled Notice the line at 08 20 05 853 It describes the transfer string sent to the telephone system in order to transfer the call to extension 260 This data is often used by technical support for troubleshooting Log Start Call H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt TcESIMAIN gt H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt MnNITE9608 gt Log Menu NITE9608 08 19 55 Keys 2 AaSTART H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt Aa gt Log AutoA 260 Access H AUTOA Debug AutoA 260 Action lt Ca gt Data lt 260 gt H AUTOA Debug Before prompt HO Key 0 dialvox call lt amp 6 260 gt e
173. ch remote location Requirements All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function The following are the requirements for Point to Point messaging n jul jul PathFinder Release 6 or higher Point to Point capability in the software key PathFinder Mailer software included in both Point to Point and Onelook messaging Information on the remote systems IP addresses mailbox lengths Network Network Interface Card must be on the Windows NT 4 0 HCL TCP IP O Connectivity between Windows NT based processing sites O Network connection WAN LAN etc with TCP IP protocol running o Dedicated full time TCP IP connectivity to the other sites This is required so that the PathFinder sites can transport the messages on demand C 86 Point To Point Messaging O Valid IP addresses O Ability to run Ping between the servers that make up the Point to Point network Do not install the server portion of Point to Point messaging ona system that already has Onelook Unified messaging installed You need only to change the configuration as described in the Configuring Voice Mail section of this appendix Installation Point to Point Messaging is installed from the PathFinder installatio
174. company directory listing according to your selection for Mailbox mode or Extension mode Fax on Demand Provides a choice of entries including blank caller select document to be faxed a document number to be faxed to the caller or ADMIN allow caller to access Fax on Demand administrative functions This option functions only if you have purchased the optional Fax On Demand module and have enabled it on the software key Run ActiveVex Enables the ActiveVex module ActiveVex is a proprietary development language Select this option only if you have an ActiveVex module installed on your system Time Control Settings 5 101 11 Click on OK until you return to the Edit Time Control window Repeat steps 3 through 11 of the above process until all lines of the time control have been defined Clicking Edit 6 10 in the Edit Time Control window provides access to a second series of lines Once all options have been set and saved you can begin to use the time control Time controls can be used in mailbox extension and menu settings Refer to Chapter 5 for details on using time controls Voice Mail Auto Attendant amp Menuing Time Periods Mailbox Settings Extension Settings General Settings Editing a Menu OooOoaqdda n Setting Up Phone Lines Deleting a Time Control As demonstrated above time controls can be as simple or as complex as needed When used in conjunction with menuing options refer
175. conds Cancel Next Directory Previous Type of Directory Paged Mode Eein List Mode e Single Mode Maximum Keys 4 digits Maximum Wait seconds Figure 5 4 Module Settings Auto Attendant Window Field Description Call Queue The call queue interval specifies the amount of time before Interval PathFinder retries an extension when a caller is in queue A ten to twenty second interval is recommended The range for this field is 1 to 999 O Call queue interval is dependent on the extension s class of service O Call queuing is disabled unless it is manually enabled in the Class of Service configuration Module Settings 5 5 Field Directory Types Description The Directory also called the System Directory is a list of users in PathFinder Directory functions describe how the company directory should be configured O Paged Mode Gives the caller several matching entries then a caller must press a key to go to the next page or set of entries This is a hybrid between List and Single mode PathFinder presents only eight matches at a time and the caller presses a number one through eight to choose a match The caller can press 9 to go to the next page or set of eight matches O List Mode Provides a caller with all matching entries in a complete list Each matching name and extension or mailbox is played in order At the end of the list PathFinder prom
176. criptions A 10 Quick Commands A 10 Quick Jump Key 5 12 Quick Start 1 1 R Recall Caller On 5 31 Re connect 2 13 Record Key 5 65 Record Prompts 5 92 Record Stop Key 5 66 Record Tone Length 5 3 Record Playback 4 6 5 2 Recorded voice message playback is not easily audible C 73 RECORDING PROMPTS C 31 Registry 2 18 4 6 5 36 Item Fields 5 39 Maintenance 5 36 Registry TeleQueue C 96 Registry Item Add or Edit 5 37 Registry Settings Detail Report 6 28 Index Registry Settings Summary Report 6 26 Reject 5 31 Release catalog 2 26 Remote Diagnostics 2 3 Remote Locations C 87 Removing a Board 2 40 Re Order Detection 5 27 Re Order Tone 5 24 Repeat Count 5 28 Replacement Prompts 7 11 Reply To Msgs 5 70 Reports C 48 Data 6 10 6 12 6 13 6 15 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 36 6 37 Use 6 11 6 12 6 14 6 15 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 36 6 37 Reports Criteria 6 7 Reports Menu 4 7 Reports Overview 6 7 Requirements 7 1 Requirements Internet Fax Delivery C 46 Requirements Point to Point C 85 Requirements TeleQueue C 95 Restrict OutDial to 5 60 Retries 5 88 Retries TimeOuts 4 6 5 14 Retrieving Faxes C 45 Retry attempts C 37 Retry Delay C 87 Retry interval C 37 Retry Pager 5 77 REW Speed 5 3 ring back 2 25 Ring count reset del
177. ctions FAXINFO E gt Actions Key Play Instructions 4Key FAX On Demand t Key Menu FAXINFO 5 Key Invalid Option okey Operator Ekes Invalid Option 7 Key FAx On Demand 100 i FAX On Demand ADMIN 2Key FAX On Demand 200 BKey Invalid Option 3 Key Fax On Demand 300 akey Hang Up Max Reties Hang Up _Time Out _ J Hang Up Voice Prompts Figure C 18 Edit Menu FAX Window 6 Enter a Password 7 Select a Time Control if one is to be used 8 Set the Time Out and maximum Retries options 9 Select or record Introduction Body and Instructions prompts 10 Set the Key Actions At least one key must be assigned to Fax On Demand Refer to the Menus Settings chapter in the System Administrator Manual for details on the creation of menus C 40 Fax Support 11 The Fax On Demand key action will accept one of three parameters O ADMIN Tells PathFinder that this key allows access to Fax On Demand administrator features When this key is selected PathFinder will ask for a password When the correct password is entered PathFinder will allow the administrator to add or remove documents to or from the Fax On Demand database One key action in the menu must be defined as ADMIN o Fax Document Number If you enter a specific Fax On Demand document number in the field PathFinder will transmit that facsimile document to the caller O If you enter no value
178. d Ge EG lg A 2 Quick Command Description sesse seek ene Ge Gee Gee ee ek ee GER Ge ee ee RAAR A 10 SV SUCH Me ae si EE RE N C 15 Outbound Call Responses essens sd se Rd eke ee sede ee ede ie C 21 Homework Hotline Default Prompts csssssssssssscssessesssecsccssecsseessecsecessecseesseess C 25 Questionnaire Prompt Files uc cssssssssssesseesesssessessncsscesscsessssssessnessecssceaccasessceseesseess C 32 Fax Fields and Descriptions sissies es ees Gees ee Rd C 37 Telequeque Prompts and Description sen sense see Gee ee ee RR AR ek ee ee sege C 105 Introduction This manual is an instructional tool for system administrators and others who work with PathFinder It describes how to install set up design monitor and maintain various PathFinder applications Overview 1 1 Overview PathFinder Description PathFinder is a voice processing system that combines sophisticated application software with the power of the PC to handle a wide variety of telecommunications tasks PathFinder helps people communicate more effectively It provides a bridge between a telephone and a computer PathFinder uses pre recorded digitized human speech called voice prompts to talk to a caller Unlike a tape recorder which stores recordings sequentially PathFinder stores recordings on a computer hard drive This storage system allows PathFinder to access any voice prompt or recording in any order PathFinder can communicate information by s
179. determines the number of times PathFinder allows the phone to ring before answering an incoming call One ring is a typical setting Number of Rings Before No Answer Detected The Number of rings before No Answer detected parameter is used during supervised dialing actions such as a call transfer to determine how many rings must elapse before PathFinder terminates the activity If the line is not connected after the number of rings specified the action is aborted Four rings is usually adequate Telephony Settings 5 33 Ring Detection Ring Count Reset Delay This setting is used in particular telephone system integrations and typically should not be modified Minimum Ring ON This setting describes the ring cadence from the phone system Minimum ring ON is the time where there is a ring from the phone system Minimum Ring OFF This setting describes the ring cadence from the phone system Minimum ring OFF is the time where there is no ring from the phone system Ring Edge to Detect If Ring edge to detect is set to Rise PathFinder detects inbound rings more quickly Set this to Fall to slow it down if you occasionally get false rings Perfect Call Perfect Call specifies the exact tones that make up the different telephony signals dial tone busy signal ringing do not disturb and the like Typically these values are pre programmed when you select your telephone system If these values are not defined you can
180. e Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM Programs The following window displays Computer Name Dialogic Configuration Manager 2 Click Connect 2 28 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert The Dialogic Configuration Manager window appears Dialogic Configuration Manager B pA Configured Devices on_PF82 04 EER TOM Bus CI Bus 0 3 Select Action gt Add Device as shown below Dialogic Configuration Manager Restore WeyiGe WENANGE Enmane Devine Disatle DE aai WEY IGE SUG WEVICE Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 29 The Add Hardware Wizard window displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Add Hardware Wizard 4 Select D x1D in the left pane and Dialog 4 in the right pane then click Next The following window displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Add Hardware Wizard Voice Board 1 2 30 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 5 Typeaname to identify the board e g Voice Board 1 asusedin the previous illustration then click Next The following displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Properties for Dialog 4 oice Board 1 Eq D41DAddress D41DInterrupt The system will reflect the lowest interrupt possible in the upper pane of the window at the System tab In this example 3 is the default interrupt value 6 Change the interrupt value to match the hardware IRQ setting Refer to Table 2 3 and Figure
181. e TQ234 GRO for the first caller The other file TQ_CALL VOX is played when TeleQueue finds an extension available and it is answered It is similar to the message You have a call heard in Auto Attendant If you wish for a queue to have its own answer message then record a prompt named TQ lt queue gt ANS The complete file name for queue 234 would be TQ234 ANS If this file does not exist then TeleQueue falls back and plays TQ_CALL VOX Wait For Transfer As mentioned earlier you can tell TeleQueue to play prompt files for a caller while he is waiting to be transferred Each queue has its own prompt files and they can be recorded with MAINT s Recording Studio The file names for these prompts are TO lt queue gt lt prompt number gt The first five prompt files for queue 234 would be TQ234 1 TO234 2 TQ234 3 TQ234 4 and TO234 5 You can have one or more prompt files When TeleQueue gets to the last prompt it will reset back to the first one As mentioned earlier if you do not have a 1 file then the file TQ_MUSIC VOX is played Help Prompts You can also have help files These are not specific to a particular queue like the files mentioned above Help files all have a unique 4 5 or 6 digit number The caller can while listening to the files TQ234 1 through TQ234 999 enter the help prompt number followed by pressing pound TeleQueue C 107 This feature can be used to help callers solve their problems while
182. e 00 00 20 H7 Voice 00 02 01 K5 Take message To owner Voice 00 00 56 H7 Figure 6 7 Mailbox Usage Report Example 6 12 Activity Reports Data The report sorted by date tracks the number of occurrences counts and total durations for several mailbox statistics for each mailbox including the following O Mailbox number and O Message Length elapsed name of mailbox owner time of recording O Line call came in on O Number of messages recorded Msg Left O Time of mailbox entry O Out dial Notification events O Number of messages O Total Trunk Access retrieved MAINT O Duration between the caller s initial connection to PathFinder and subsequent hang up after leaving a message or time required for mailbox owner to retrieve messages Use A review of the Mailbox Usage report reveals the amount of activity of each mailbox on PathFinder Owners of mailboxes with low activity may not fully understand how to use PathFinder and may need more instruction On the other hand when disk space is in short supply users with high activity should be reminded to remove messages Take note of the average length of a call When the average length approaches the maximum message length the max message length may need to be increased This report can also be used in client bill back situations like shared tenant environments executive suites or hotels The report can be output to disk then imported into a billing program Acti
183. e C 35 C 40 Delivery Module Access C 52 Document Number C 40 Documents Report 6 16 Fax Messages Onelook C 69 Fax On Demand Application Sample C 43 Fields and Descriptions C 37 Hardware C 35 ID C 37 Internet Fax Delivery C 45 Leaving a Fax in a Mailbox C 44 Mail C 34 C 35 Mailboxes C 44 Menu C 38 Modules 4 6 On Demand 5 91 5 100 5 106 C 34 C 35 Retrieving Facsimiles C 45 Routing C 51 Set Up Fax Support in MAINT C 36 Support 5 7 C 34 Using Fax Software C 41 FF and REW Speed 5 3 Fields 5 17 File Information 7 8 Index Type 7 8 File Format 7 8 File Menu Boom Box 7 2 MAINT 4 5 File to send as cover sheet C 37 First Time Help 5 68 First Time Questions 4 3 Flash hook Character 4 9 Length 5 31 Transfer 2 13 Forward to another Mailbox 5 50 to Extension 5 50 5 54 to Mailbox 5 54 to Menu 5 50 5 54 to Module 5 50 5 54 to Time Control 5 50 5 54 Forward Msgs 5 70 Foundation software 1 2 French 5 13 Frequency settings 5 28 Future Send 5 71 G General Operator 5 9 General Settings 5 59 C 52 General Tone Detection 5 24 5 27 General User Settings 5 46 Generation speed 6 9 German 5 13 Greeting 5 72 Length 5 63 Settings 5 61 Type 5 61 Guest Mailboxes 5 72 H Hang Up 5 92 Hang Up Detection 4 6 5 23 Hang Up Detection C 104 Hard Disk 2 2 Hard Disk Storage Size 2 3 Hardware Compatibility List HCL 2 1 C 1 hardware interrupt circuitry 2 8 HCL 2 1 C 1 Help Menu Boom Box 7 4 M
184. e N ig 4 4 Edit MAINT Users WINdOW ees ees see de dee ee ee ee ee anand 4 12 Module Settings Toolbar SE EG EG Ge Ge Ge De ee ee ig 5 1 Module Settings Digit Lengths WindOW ususee sesse see see eek ee Ge Gee ee ee eek 5 1 Module Settings Record Playback Settings WindOW esse sesse seek ee ee 5 2 Module Settings Auto Attendant WindOW uiusse sesse sen seke eek Ge Gee eek Gee ee RR 5 4 Module Settings Logging Window sssscssssssssssecssscssecssccssecsscesseeseecseeeseeeseesseess 5 6 Module Settings Operator WindOW ssssscssecssesseecssesssccssccsecsscessesseecsceneceseesness 5 9 Module Settings Voice Mail WiNdOW cssessssssssssssessscsscsessnssssesssseessseseesnseseessees 5 11 Module Settings Language WindOW uu sesse sen sen see eek ek ee Ge Gee ee ee RR RR Ge Ge 5 13 Module Settings Retries TimeOuts WindOW uses sense sen Gee ee Re RARR 5 14 System Settings Toolbar uses ses ee GE oe Ge RE koe Red 5 16 System Settings Directories WiNdOW uie en seek eek Gee Rek ER ee gee 5 16 Auxiliary Task Settings WindOW uses sesse sen seek Gee eek eR oe ee Rek Gee ee Re R Roe ee Rea 5 17 LPT COM Port Settings WINKOW RE se se ee GR ie 5 18 Time Period Settings WindOW uuses see seen Ge Gee ee RARR ek Gee ee Ge RR eek ego 5 19 Telephony Settings Toolbar i e Reese ie belese RR ee ek Ge RR Re 5 20 Telephony Settings Voice Channels Window esse see sesse ee eek Gee ee 5 21 Telephony Settings MWI Notification Window uses sesse
185. e board to be removed Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 41 4 Select Action gt Delete Service Dialogic Configuration Manager Or Right click on the board and choose Delete Device Dialogic Configuration Manager MBE Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 WB Dialog 4 Voice Board 2 2 42 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert PBXpert Exiting Configuration Utility To exit the board configuration utility Select File gt Exit You only need to configure PBXpert ifyou are using supervised transfers AND youare notrunning ona phone system that appears in the certified list To configure PBXpert you need the following O Telephone system with 2 analog lines plugged into the Dialogic boards and extension numbers for those ports o Dialogic voice board loaded into the PC with the memory address and IRQ configured correctly o PathFinder software installed O Dialogic drivers installed o PBXpert software installed Follow these steps to configure PBXpert Start Up Mode Before running the PBXpert Wizard the Dialogic drivers need to be started Either run the PathFinder Engine and then stop the PathFinder Engine or perform the following steps 1 Select from the Start menu Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM 2 Click on the Start Service icon in the toolbar identified by the green dot Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2
186. e calls are routed to the voice mail system by substituting an analog telephone or test set for PathFinder If the phone does not ring check your Hunt Group or Phone system settings Questions amp Answers oO If the line is ringing move the phone line to another voice processing port If PathFinder does answer the problem is likely with the voice processing board First run the Universal Dialogic Diagnostics program found in the Dialogic System Software program group If any errors occur correct the problem and re test Check the Number of rings before system answers incoming calls field in the Configuration gt Telephony Settings gt Rings window It should be set to a number between one and three If the number is too high it may give the impression that PathFinder is not answering If PathFinder occasionally does not answer calls during heavy traffic periods it is possible that the hunt group on the telephone system is not configured correctly Check all telephone system programming Q PathFinder takes a long time to release the line after a caller has hung up A PathFinder detects a loop current disconnect by default The telephone system you are using may not use loop current disconnects Consult your telephone system manual to verify the telephone system does not use loop current disconnects If the telephone system does not support loop current disconnects PBXpert needs to be run to learn the tones Refer to
187. e certain to back up all subdirectories under these main directories 8 2 Log Files amp Error Messages Log Files amp Error Messages PathFinder outputs three types of logs O System Error O Maintenance Access O Daily System Activity All log files are in ASCII text format which allows them to be printed or viewed with a simple text editor like Notepad or Write System Error Log The PathFinder Error log is directed to a file named ERROR LOG The Error log file is stored in the HELLONT LOGS directory The Error log file contains general PathFinder information The Error log file is a cumulative file Once PathFinder is initialized the Error log file is written Each time PathFinder is reset or there is a general problem the new log information is appended to the existing Error log file Each line in the Error log file contains four fields as follows Table 8 2 System Activity Log Fields Field Indicates First what type of log line is listed The column contains an alpha character Second the date the Error log line was generated Third the time the Error log was generated ina hh mm ss ttt format Fourth the error condition text varies in length System Maintenance Log 8 3 Several lines that appear in the Error log do not indicate errors These lines are similar to the following 07 30 98 51 03 Hello Startup Version 7 0 192 07 30 98 51 03 Logging State is 4
188. e in use When all lines assigned to a particular block group are servicing a call that group is considered blocked and a log line is generated If for example all lines are in block group 1 and blockage is detected for that group PathFinder is completely busy PBX Name Select the appropriate PBX name For most inband integrations the PBX Name field should be left as ANALOG For some other integrations the PBX Name field will need to ba changed Do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so by Vodavi Technical Support 10 Repeat this process for each line Suggested Initial Module Settings Set the initial module for each line according to PathFinder s use and configuration The following are suggestions on appropriate uses of various options oO If all calls to PathFinder are processed the same manner regardless of time or date use the same menu option for all ports If calls are processed differently based on the time or date the call is received select the Time Control option along with the appropriate time control file If your system has in band integration or if you prompt callers for only an extension or mailbox select the Mailbox option Select the Extension option if you have PathFinder running as a simple Auto Attendant setup 5 108 Line Settings Oo oO Select the Run Module option if you are running a custom module such as IVR Choosing Command File allows you to control
189. e lists Logs Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the Logs reports functions available through the Reports menu in MAINT Log reports provide information about PathFinder and error messages Logs are used as diagnostic tools to trace PathFinder activity and are primarily used for debugging and technical support functions For more information on Log Files refer to page 5 6 6 32 Logs Reports Daily Log The Daily Log report provides a detailed listing of general PathFinder activity Report 401 Notepad File Edit Search Help Daily Log Range 66 13 96 to 06 13 96 Range 88 00 00 to 16 66 66 Startup V 2 2 S 1 7 Date Thu Jun 13 68 61 37 1996 Using 12 Voice threads 2 Aux threads Using 14 Threads Keywords Version String 1 6 DIALVOX LoadBoard DIALUOX InitBoard DIALVOX LoadBoard DIALVOX InitBoard 44 699 DIALVOX LoadBoard 744 799 DIALVOX InitBoard Voice Board devh 2 Board devh 2 Voice Board 1 devh 2 Board 1 devh 2 Voice Board 2 devh 2 Board 2 devh 2 245 229 DIALVOX Version 10016 CB Enabled 745 796 RS232DLL Version 10001 No CB 746 571 VEXDBASE Version 16668 No CB 246 661 Loading module C HELLONT MODULES H KERNEL TEX in ndex 6 246 882 Loading module C HELLONT MODULES H AUTOA SUB ind hd Figure 6 23 Daily Log Report Example Data AV All entries are listed by time of occurrence and by
190. e log message which can be very simple or very complex Activity Log Sample 1 Below is an excerpt from a daily log file representing a typical blind transfer call into PathFinder The call was generated with default logging options enabled Start Call Menu MAIN9711 11 06 57 Keys 2 AaSTART AutoA 242 Access AutoA 242 Blind Bl Connect 242 Stop Call 11 06 56 Start Call Menu MAIN9711 11 08 35 Keys 8 Vm VMail 1242 Take message Stop Call 11 08 35 C 1 C 1 C 1 Cc 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 Cc 1 Cc 1 Figure 8 2 Typical Blind Transfer Call Log Extension 242 is set to forward on busy or no answer to voice mail The call was placed into PathFinder and the caller was transferred to extension 242 o Then extension 242 either didn t answer or was busy O Therefore the call was forwarded to mailbox 1242 8 6 System Activity Log Activity Log Sample 2 Below is an excerpt from a daily log file representing a typical supervised transfer call into PathFinder The call was generated with default logging options enabled C C C C Cc C C Cc Start Call Menu NITE9608 08 19 55 Keys 2 AaSTART AutoA 260 Access AutoA 260 Call 260 NoAnswer Ca AutoA 260 To mailbox 1260 VMail 1260 Take message VMail 1260 Voice 00 01 41 K Stop Call 08 19 54 H7 PRPPPPPRP Figure 8 3 Typical Supervised Transfer Call Log The call was started at 08 19 54 687 The NITE9608 menu was a
191. e number and total time a blockage occurred on the system Refer to Setting Up Phone Lines on page 5 102 for more information This window displays duration and counts for system blocks T ViewPort PathFinder File Server View Help 1 Blockage Today Duration Today Total Duration Total Totals Since I Group 1 0 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D 5 a 20000006 22000008 00 00 00 00 00 00 Running il N Figure 7 6 Monitor Blockage Groups Window 7 16 PathFinder Monitor Application Counters Event The Event Counters window allows you to view PathFinder event counters Refer to Event Counters on page 5 60 for more information I ViewPort PathFinder File Server View Help Totais Since T 20 Mon Nov 1303425320 Running 2 Figure 7 7 Monitor Event Counters Window PathFinder Monitor Application 7 17 Line View Status This window allows you to view the real time status of your inbound lines Auxiliary lines are also displayed Double click on or right click for a menu any of the line icons to view details for that line 2 ViewPort PathFinder Jol File Server View Help Ef Loca ine Status I Cals Today Duration Today Cals Total Duration Total Totals Since Bloc 0 Blockage Line 001 Wai
192. e send a facsimile if the call results in a busy signal or no answer or disconnects in the middle of a send A typical value is 3 Retry interval for failed sends Enter the number of minutes PathFinder should wait between retry attempts C 38 Fax Support Create a Key to Run Fax On Demand The next step is to create or modify a menu to include a Fax On Demand key Usually a front end menu is used to provide facsimile support services so callers do not have to hunt through multiple menus looking for facsimile options At least one key must be assigned to the Fax On Demand option When setting the Fax On Demand key indicate if the caller either can select any facsimile document or is restricted to defining a specific facsimile document To create a facsimile menu 1 Click on the Menu button on the toolbar 2 Inthe Select Menu to Edit window click on the Create button and enter a name for the menu 3 If you are using another menu as a template select it from the drop down list 4 Click on Create Menu This returns you to the Select Menu to Edit window Fax Support C 39 5 Highlight the menu you just created then click on Select The following window displays Edit Menu FAXINFO General Name FAXINFO Password 718293 Description Information Time Out 3 secs Time Control NONE ls Renee 3 Delete Introduction BALAGUNDA d Body Faxuist E Instru
193. e steps when troubleshooting MWI problems Oo Verify that you can set and clear message waiting indicators from an analog telephone set Verify the MWI settings are correct Access the MAINT application Select from the menu bar Configuration gt Telephony Settings gt MWI Notification Verify the Message Waiting Set and Clear settings are accurate for your telephone system Verify that the correct Number Length is defined in the Number Length to Edit selection box is chosen Verify that the E in Ext is capitalized in the Message Waiting Set and Clear settings Verify that there is no setting in the Class of Service gt Notification gt MWI Strings On and Off Verify that the Message Waiting setting is not Off Verify that there is at least one line Line Settings set to service the Event Group defined in the Class of Service gt Notification gt Event Handler Group Verify that under Configuration gt System Settings gt Auxiliary Tasks there is at least one task defined as MSGMAN that services event group one 8 14 Questions amp Answers Q Calls are not being routed to extensions properly A First replace PathFinder with a single line telephone set and verify that transfers work properly without PathFinder If you are unable to do hook flash transfers with the single line telephone then check all phone system settings and retry the test Verify the entire path by which a call is handled Typical pr
194. e voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder Handset receiver gain feature must be turned on Flash 05 Button 13 Phone System Set Up infinite DVX II Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite DVX II in band integration O One SLT port perPathFinder voice port Each 4 x 8 SLT card provides eight ports o One DTMF Receiver module The DTMF is installed on the 4 x 8 SLT card or other 4 x 8 cards The DTMF provides one DTMF receiver O One Ring Generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX II include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs mn Outdial to pager or specific number o Multiple Return to Operator O Stations transfer callers directly to mailbox Phone System Set Up 3 33 Table 3 15 infinite DVX II Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 ent
195. eature you can have certain lines go to a queue during one time period then to another queue at another time period TeleQueue is a versatile package However it is important to understand your application and the limitations of some phone systems to be able to fully exploit its capabilities Use of Hunt Group When you are using a hunt group you must be able to set up the hunt group in a UCD Uniform Call Distribution format This allows ringing of the next extension in the hunt group that has not been called recently C 104 TeleQueue Without UCD calls transferred to the hunt group by PathFinder are not evenly distributed and possibly could create a situation where PathFinder repeatedly calls an extension that does not answer If you do not have UCD it is highly recommended that you use an extension list Position in Queue If a caller chooses the option to exit the queue by pressing 0 their position in the queue is lost If the caller chooses to go back into the queue they will be placed at the end of the queue depending upon the configuration This may give the caller the impression that their queue position is deteriorating TQ_INSTR VOX can be modified to warn a caller that they will lose their position in the queue if they exit Last Resort Extension It is important to provide some way out of the queue for the caller unless you absolutely do not want to provide this option and understand the consequences
196. edit voice prompt files used by the PathFinder voice processing system In this section the system prompts that are used with the Boom Box application are discussed in detail System Prompts PathFinder uses a group of pre recorded messages and phrases called voice prompts to communicate with callers PathFinder constructs understandable messages by selecting different prompts and playing them together as a single message PathFinder uses two types of prompts Indexed and Non Indexed Indexed prompts are located in a single indexed file that contains many prompts Non Indexed prompts only contain one prompt per file All files are stored in the C HELLONT VOX directory unless otherwise noted Indexed vs Non Indexed Prompts Non Indexed prompt files are of type VOX only Indexed prompts can be either VOX or VDX file pairs 7 10 Boom Box Application Non Indexed Prompts Many prompts used by the standard PathFinder modules as well as many used by custom IVR modules are simple non indexed prompt files This means there is only one prompt recorded in each VOX file and there is no index associated with that VOX file To play the prompt PathFinder simply plays the entire file Non indexed prompts are good for applications in which there are just a few prompts or in which these prompts may need to be re recorded while PathFinder is in use Indexed Prompts Many prompts used by the standard PathFinder modules as well as some
197. edure installs and activates the Streams Environment and TCP IP Installation To install your operating system follow the installation instructions provided by the operating system provider For example to install Windows NT or Windows 2000 follow the instructions provided by Microsoft Configuration Before installing the PathFinder software you must optimize your PC operating system for running PathFinder This overall procedure consists of the following tasks O Setting up a Windows administrator account O Configuring the operating system for automatic logon O Installing and activating the Streams Environment and TCP IP Install and Configure Operating System 2 15 Log On Log On Windows NT To set up a Windows NT administrator account perform the following steps l 8 9 10 11 From the Start menu select Programs gt Administrative Tools gt User Manager From the File menu select User gt New User In the Username field type PathFinder In the Password field type the serial number for your PathFinder software Clear the User must change password at next logon check box Select the Password never expires check box Click on the Groups button and select Administrators in the right pane Click Add Click OK Click OK Click the Close button in the upper right corner to close the window Log On Windows 2000 To set up a Windows 2000 administrator account perform the following
198. eeded an existing list may be edited or anew list created Members of the call list are selected from the Master List Once the property values for a call list have been set up then the list can be activated Some functions recording prompts may be entered via the telephone Multiple call lists can be activated at the same time REPORTS Reports are generated based on call list parameters set up for users and groups Reports can also be printed and saved for future use Chalk Talk C 5 Getting Started In order to access the Call List feature by computer or telephone configure the PathFinder system as described Call List Application Setup From the MAINT application select Configuration gt System Settings Click the AUXILIARY TASKS button then click ADD Type avOutDialManager Main for the name Set the Event Group to 8 ignore the description field When finished click ACCEPT then click DONE After clicking on the LINE icon in the toolbar complete the following steps for each line to be used for outbound dialing 6 Highlight the Line to be used for outdialing and click EDIT then click NEXT 7 Enter 9 for the Event Handling group then click FINISH 8 Click OK when all lines are configured wR WN Call List Setup for Telephone Access From the MAINT application 1 Click the MENU icon on the toolbar 2 Create or select a menu Double click or press select to edit the menu 3 Select a Key Action
199. eived The down side is that if your phone system sends silence H2 when a caller has hung up then TeleQueue may think the caller wants to stay in the queue when actually they have hung up If your phone system sends a drop in loop current H1 you are safe to set this parameter toa 1 Tq0000ShwCntrs Show Queue Event Counters If this value is a 1 then TeleQueue will update the event counters on PathFinder s run time screen when this queue is accessed Tg0000StriAtTp Start Over in EXT List If this value is a 1 then TeleQueue will start at the beginning of the EXT list for each caller TeleQueue will not remember the last extension it transferred to but will always start at the top of the list TqO0000NoRBBfrHu Number of No Ring Backs before Disconnect This field indicates how many no ring backs TeleQueue should process before it disconnects the caller A value of 1 to 3 is common TqO000MstrQ Queue Priority or Master Queue Number See TQTEST DOC Tq0000PsudoSup Use Pseudo Transfers Most systems should have this value set to 0 On systems where you want the system to do a blind transfer to the CSRs extension followed by waiting for any DTMF put the number of seconds to wait for a DTMF on line 17 When the CSR picks up the phone the system will be silently waiting for a DTMF Alternatively you may record a prompt in the VOX TQ_TRANS VOxX file C 102 TeleQueue Instead of representing the number of seconds to
200. el OD Hee Normal Fast Custom Cyt Figure 6 5 Setup Report Generation Window For the Generation speed setting select one of the following options O Select Normal if MAINT is running on the same computer as the PathFinder engine Select Fast if MAINT is running on a separate computer Select Custom and enter a value only if instructed to do so by Vodavi Technical Support By default the Notepad application is used to view reports If you want to use a different viewer specify it in the Report viewer field along with the complete path 6 10 Activity Reports Activity Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This chapter describes the Activity reports functions available through the Reports menu in MAINT Activity reports reflect PathFinder use Data for the reports are obtained from the PathFinder system logs Usage The Usage report displays call traffic information Ej Report 101 Notepad File Edit Search Help Calls By Hour Tine 06 13 96 8 08an 8 59am 9 8am 9 59am 16 66an 16 59an 11 96am 11 59an 12 0Gam 12 59an 1 08pm 1 59pm 2 08pm 2 59pm 3 08pm 3 59pm 4 00pm 4 59pm 5 00pm 5 59pm 6 00pm 6 59pm 7 00pm 7 59pm 8 00pm 8 59pm 10 00pn 10 59pm 11 00pm 11 59pm olx Page 61 Calls Duration 00 50 06 81 29 52 60 46 17 01 35 30 01 15 32 00 45 19 01 24 48 00 43 09 01 05 46 00 30 34 00 04 46 00 00 42 00 00 24 60 60 19 00 00 41
201. eleQueue will continue through the list Ta0000Loops Number of loops through the EXT file before asking the caller to verify that they wish to stay in the gueue If you only have one extension in the EXT file possibly a hunt group on your phone system then you will want this number to have a value of at least three This is to prevent TeleOueue from continually coming back and asking the caller if he wishes to hold Ta0000PlayTm Minimum time to play hold files Used only if hold files Line 3 are turned on Just before TeleQueue starts playing a hold file it remembers the time After playing a file it then waits to see if the minimum time has elapsed If not it waits the caller hears silence until the time has elapsed If during this wait time the caller gets to the head of the queue or if they press a key they will be brought out of the waiting cycle This parameter is usually 30 seconds and is used to keep the caller on hold a specified number of seconds regardless of the length of the individual hold files The value in the file should be expressed in seconds A value of 0 indicates to TeleQueue that after playing the hold file it should re check the position and move to the next hold file TeleQueue C 99 Tq0000NTmToAsk Loops while waiting before getting response This is similar to Tq000Loops except that this is used for callers who are not at the head of the queue After holding the caller use whatever method i
202. ems or your dealer Attach the software key to LPT2 Serial Port Select the proper COM port COM1 COM2 COM3 or None Documentation specific to your application e g paging and telephone integration applications will specify if you need to set serial port parameters Time Periods The Time Period settings provide definitions of the time periods for PathFinder They are used by some IVR modules to control how PathFinder operates for a given time of day System Settings 5 19 Voice Mail Auto Attendant amp Menuing Time Periods Time Periods are not used in the voice mail Auto Attendant or menuing modules Tocontrolhowthevoice mail Auto Attendant andmenus process acall use Time Control settings referto Time Control Settings on page 5 93 Time Period Settings Work Hours 08 00 to 17 00 Done Cancel Holidays Next 01701 to 01702 Begin Date 02717 to 02718 Previous 05726 to 05727 End Date lt Remove 97 04 to 07 05 Help a 09 01 to 09 02 11 27 to 11 29 12 25 to 12 27 Figure 5 14 Time Period Settings Window Period Definitions WORK HOURS Defines the start and end of the business day Enter the hour and minutes using GMT format 24 hour clock Example 1 30 p m is entered as 13 30 HOLIDAYS Define the start and end dates for holidays You can add and remove dates from this list You can define a maximum o
203. en will display 9 PathFinder Q amp A Application v1 0 Questionnaires 100 Sample questionnaire customer info Delete Figure C 13 Questionnaires Screen Chalk Talk C 27 To edit add or delete a questionnaire 1 Toedit highlightthe desired questionnaire thenclickthe EDIT button or Double click on desired questionnaire 100 Sample questionnaire The Edit Q amp A ID screen displays the details for that question Edit Q amp A ID 100 x ID Description E ample questionnaire customer info Password 10000 i Mailbox to Store Answer th Send Incomplete Menu to Bun on Exit 100 Questions 1 Ask for name 100 1 vox Voice 10sec Edit 2 Ask for telephone 100 2 vox DTMF 15 term Ed Add Delete Figure C 14 Q amp A Application Edit Q amp A ID Screen Field Description Description This text is used by administration to identify the Q amp A Session Password The question prompts may be recorded via the telephone by pressing during the first question After pressing gt the password must be entered to gain access Mailbox to Store Answer This is the mailbox where the results should be stored Send Incomplete Check this box if the system should deliver the responses to the mailbox even if they are not complete Menu to Run on Exit When the questionnaire is finished this is the menu name that should be called
204. ephone service offered by a local telephone company from a local central office Centrex lines like a PBX provide such features as call transfer call forwarding call hold and others and they use an RJ 14 connector PBX Attachment In the PBX Private Branch Exchange configuration PathFinder is attached to the phone system through single line extension ports This provides the greatest flexibility for running PathFinder modules PathFinder must be configured this way to process call transfers Install and Configure Hardware 2 13 Incoming calls are routed through the phone system and are answered in one of three ways O Answered by a live operator and then transferred to PathFinder O Answered directly by PathFinder O Routed to PathFinder only if an extension is busy or does not answer Connect PathFinder to a PBX using any of the following lines Analog Line Your phone system must support analog single line telephone sets with hunt group capability In a hunt group if one line is busy the PBX can roll the call over to the next line in the group An analog line uses an RJ 14 connector In addition the analog telephones must have the following features o Flash hook transfer Dial out Place call on hold Re connect OO n n Loop current disconnect Proprietary Connections Many phone systems have proprietary connection methods that reguire a special card to access their integration features These include the S
205. ephony settings O Cannot view mailbox and or extension passwords but can change them O Cannot edit fax settings LEVELS 1 to 5 Limited Administrator Access Users with Limited Administrator Access have the same access privileges as levels 6 and 7 with an additional restriction users with Limited Administrator Access cannot view or change mailbox and or extension passwords 4 12 Access Levels amp MAINT Passwords Setting MAINT User Passwords To set user passwords 1 Select MAINT Logins from the File menu This displays a window similar to the following F Require MAINT users to log in User Name Password Lavel Accept Cancel Figure 4 5 Edit MAINT Users Window 2 To adda new MAINT user click on Add To edit an existing MAINT user s password click on Edit 3 If you are adding a new MAINT user enter the user s User Name Password and access Level and click on Accept If you are editing an existing MAINT user change those items as needed and click on Accept 4 Click on Done when you are finished with this function A few important notes about passwords O Once a password has been defined you must enter it correctly every time you wish to access PathFinder o PathFinder passwords are case sensitive For example PassWordis not the same as PASSWORD MAINT Application System Settings The MAINT application allows you to co
206. er Cancel Help Mailbox Template 00 M Figure 5 29 Create Users Window 3 Leave blank the First Name and Last Name fields in this template subscriber window 4 In the Mailbox and Extension fields enter a dummy mailbox and extension number outside the allowed range For example if the allowed extension range for your telephone system is 100 to 200 you could enter 500 or 999 as the dummy extension in the Extension field When you create individual subscribers you will overwrite these dummy values and assign distinct extension and mailbox numbers to each subscriber whose profile is based on this template 5 Click on Add User to List Refer to Editing User Setups on page 5 46 to edit this template subscriber s parameters The parameters you define will apply to all mailboxes that use this mailbox as a template 7 Click on Create Users to return to the Select User to Edit window User Settings 5 43 You are now ready to create additional mailboxes Each new mailbox that you create using this mailbox as a template will have the same settings as your template mailbox Single Mailbox To set up a single subscriber perform the following steps You may also use the Edit option from the main menu to quickly edit add or delete subscribers This enables you to bring up subscribers using their mailbox number and or extension instead of scrolling through the entire list of subscribers 1 Click on the U
207. er SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ring
208. er a document number followed by the key The current description is played or PathFinder tells you if no description has been recorded 7 Press to record the description then press when finished Repeat the process selecting a new facsimile document number until all documents have been given a description Sample Fax On Demand Application PathFinder can be configured to meet your specific Fax On Demand needs whether as a sales tool technical support aid or as a source of general information The following sample shows how Fax On Demand can be used to provide product information and technical support services The figure below illustrates a typical PathFinder Fax On Demand menu setup for the Balagunda Corp Edit Menu FAXINFO General Name FAXINFO Description Information Ed Er Time Control NONE EF meel he Ee ies 3 Borer E Voice Prompts Introduction BALAGUNDA E Body FAXLIST EJ Instructions FAXINFO JE Actions z Play Instructions Menu FAXINFO Operator FAX On Demand 100 FAX On Demand 200 FAX On Demand 300 4key_ FAX On Demand Bkey J Invalid Option Ekes Invalid Option FEE FAX On Demand ADMIN Bkey J Invalid Option akey J Hang Up Time Dut Hang Up Figure C 19 Edit Menu Facsimile Menu Window C 44 Fax Support Balagunda Corp has a dedicated telephone number assigned for their Fa
209. er has a pager for notification of new messages and is not using a notification command file PathFinder sends these DTMF digits to the paging company and the mailbox owner is notified on the pager rather than via the voice mailbox Message Type Menu Select this option if you want PathFinder to present the caller with a menu such as To leave a voice message press 1 To send a fax press 2 Class of Service Settings 5 65 Leave this option off if mailbox owners are offering access to different message type options in their individual mailbox greetings Message Length This option determines the amount of time allocated to a message After the specified number of seconds has elapsed the caller is presented with the normal Send menu as if the caller had pressed a key to stop recording A length is 120 seconds is recommended Message Count This option determines the maximum number of messages that can be stored in a mailbox When the number of messages in a mailbox exceeds this parameter the mailbox plays a Full message No further messages are accepted until the number of messages in the mailbox is reduced A maximum of fifty messages is recommended Message Retention PathFinder can automatically delete messages that have been stored longer than a specified amount of time Specify that time period in this field Thirty days is the recommended default retention period this can be extended or shortened depending on you
210. ers Subscriber Name or Group Description Mailbox Extension Number s Department Class Of Service COS Mailbox Settings Operator Cascade Mailbox Time Control special use Mailbox Action Play Greeting YesL Nol Action Destination Notification Phone Number Pager Notification YesL nol Time if timed notification Extension Settings Extension Time Control special use Action 1 when calls are first transferred to the extension Action Destination Supervised Transfer Options circle one Screen Caller Allow Holding Action 2 L Do Always Only On Busy Llonly On No Answer Action Destination Supervised Transfer Options circle one Screen Caller Allow Holding Action 3 LIDo Always Only On Busy Llonly On No Answer Action Destination Supervised Transfer Options circle one Screen CallerL Allow Holding Installation Forms B 4 CLASS OF SERVICE COS INFORMATION Complete 1 copy of this form for each Class Of Service COS Name number Description General Settings Time Control special use Restrict Outdial Number of digits User Type 01 normal 99 Administrators Event Counter circle one owners Lcallers Message Settings Message Type voice Page Default Message Type voice Page ClPiay Message Type Menu Message Properties Length sec Count messages Retention days Record Key Wait for key press before recording messages YesL Nol Greeting Types L Personal
211. es You can alter the Auxiliary Task settings by highlighting the task and selecting the appropriate action Edit Add Delete When editing or adding a task with a maximum of fifteen tasks complete fields at the bottom of the window as follows Field Description Task The system assigns the next available task number Name Select or type the appropriate telephone system name Description Enter a description for this auxiliary task to identify it in the application and in reports Event Group Select the group for which this line is to handle the action Note that any event group you specify must have at least one line assigned to it in the Line Settings configuration refer to Line Settings on page 5 102 O If Task is Message Manager Event Group must be 1 O If Task is other than Message Manager define Event Group as 6 or higher 5 18 System Settings LPT COM Ports The LPT COM Ports window is used to identify which printer port and which COM port are used by the system System Settings LPT 7 COM Ports Printer Port Serial Port CO co O COM3 O LPTI Fat Se an OM Cancel O LPT2 Baud Next Parameters Previous None Set up string Help Figure 5 13 LPT COM Port Settings Window Printer Port Select the proper printer port LPT1 LPT2 or None Use LPT1 if a printer is connected to your system unless instructed otherwise by Enhanced Syst
212. esse ese ee do deena ed GE Eed A 13 Contents vii EXaFDIBS se es anatase Ge Ee ee Ge oe N GO Ge A 13 B Installation Forms C Optional Modules PROC a E A E A C 1 PathFinder Hardware Components c sesssesssssssssesssccsesssesseesessnceseesseens C 1 Optional Software Modules u essens sek seek ee ee ee RR eek Rek ee C 1 Chalk Talk EE EE EE ERA N ED C 2 Features amp Specifications issie esse Rae GER RR RS GRA KERR k GN Ge Ge Need C 2 Outbound Calling using Call Lists essens eek ee GER Ge Rek C 4 Homework Assignment Information see sense sen ee GER Ge ee RR C 22 Question amp Answer SESSIONS ese sees seer sege ee ee oe ERROR oe C 26 Fax SUDDOTE sae ED ed ee eres A esau ee C 34 Ee N EE N EE EN NG C 34 Fax OMD EMINA se ed erate De eg C 34 ae CULE UN OIA EE AE doesn oes hee eens C 35 Facsimile Databasis eeste see see RE GE ee Rg de C 40 Sample Fax On Demand Application uu sesse sen see see seke RR Ge Ge C 43 Facsimile Mailboxes ss se ee etse ee se Ee ee ge C 44 Internet Fax Delivery sestig C 45 Redilirerhents ke Ee AE dee ke acetate C 46 JE Cal AIO GE SEE EE EEN C 46 Setup amp Configuration es Ee N ee C 47 die AA EN EE ER EI EE ON C 54 Troubleshootind ss de ei Se ek ie Ge ee C 55 Onelook Unified Messaging c ssssssecssecsescssccssecseccnscesscssccssesseecsecesseeseecseess C 55 System Requirements Essie Ese esse deed GN Ge GE eo C 56 Installation amp Configuration esse sesse eek RR GER Ge ee ee ee RR C 57 Using Onel
213. ettings define how PathFinder notifies the station of a waiting message Ifyour phone system does not support message waiting indicators leave these fields blank Configure these settings in the following fields Set Enter the dialing sequence necessary to activate a message waiting indicator for any extension that has one Message waiting indication must be accessible by dialing a sequence of numbers from a single line telephone for PathFinder to make use of this capability o Usethe command Ext to specify where the extension should be located For example use amp 1 Ext 0 to set the lamp on extension 345 Note that Ext is case sensitive O Ifthe phone system supports message count as opposed to just a message waiting light use the command NewMsgCnt to send the number of messages This option works on some Vodavi Telephone Systems Clear Enter the sequence that turns off the message waiting light o Usethe command Ext to specify where the extension should be located For example use amp x 1 Ext 0 to clear the lamp on extension 345 Note that Ext is case sensitive n Ifthe phone system supports message count as opposed to just a message waiting light use the command 000 to clear the MWI Telephony Settings 5 23 Notification Prefix In the Notification Prefix field type the command string required by the telephone system prior to dialing a notification number o Refer to Ma
214. ew The File gt New option allows you to create either indexed or non indexed prompt files If you create a new indexed file you can only create VOX file types You cannot change a non indexed prompt file into an indexed prompt file File gt Open The File gt Open option allows you to open prompt files It does not matter if the files are indexed or not Boom Box determines that for you File gt Save This option saves the current prompt file that you are working on File gt Save As This option saves the current file you are working on as another file The File gt Save As option cannot save VOX files as WAV files or WAV files as VOX files Voice Port Menu The Voice Port menu allows you to manipulate lines and ports The Voice Port menu can only be used when you re playing VOX files It is used only through the Dialogic voice port device not through the WAV device Voice Port gt Answer With this option call into the phone lines and select the extension you want to reach Then select Answer to answer the phone Voice Port gt Disconnect This option disconnects the phone line 7 4 Boom Box Application Voice Port gt Change Port This allows you to set the port phone line that you want Boom Box to answer Do not set the port to a port being used by PathFinder while PathFinder is running The Set Port window is shown below Select Port Set Port to 3 E Cancel Figure
215. f 20 holidays Editing IVR Time Period Settings To edit an existing work hour setting perform the following steps 1 Highlight the time to be changed 2 Enter the new hour and minutes in GMT format 3 To enter a holiday date O Highlight the Begin Date field and enter the month and day of the holiday 01 01 O Then highlight the End Date field and enter the end month and day 01 02 o Click on Add 5 20 Telephony Settings 4 To remove a holiday setting O Highlight the dates in the box O Click on Remove Telephony Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the telephony configuration functions available in the Configuration menu in MAINT The PathFinder Configuration menu offers access to Telephony Settings configuration a group of functions used to control general telephony operation of PathFinder Telephony Configuration options are displayed in the buttons near the top of the screen when you select Telephony Settings from the Configuration menu MWI Notification Figure 5 15 Telephony Settings Toolbar Click on any of the buttons on this Telephony Settings toolbar to access the corresponding configuration options Refer to Special Characters amp Strings on page 4 9 for a listing of special characters that are supported by PathFinder Telephony Settings 5 21 Voice Lines The Voice Lines function displays the number of voice lines fo
216. forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up Table 3 8 Starplus DHS Configuration Setup 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Connect the single line adapter box to the PathFinder PC note the extension numbers Enter programming mode FEAT 000000 Press SHOW Press NEXT to go to the station area Press SHOW Enter the first station number on the keypad to be included as a VM port Press SHOW Press NEXT until the VM PORT entry is on the display Press CHG to mark VM PORT Y Repeat this procedure for all stations to be entered as VM ports Press SAVE then press HOLD twice Press NEXT until SYSTEM APPLICATION appears Press SHOW Press SHOW at the STATION HUNT GROUP entry Enter 1 on the keypad and press SHOW Press CHG to mark the group as a VM type then press NEXT Press SHOW at the GROUP MEMBER entry Press CHG enter the station number to be assigned in the group then press SAVE Repeat the procedure until all stations are entered in the group Press SAVE Then press HOLD twice to return to the STATION HUNT entry Press NEXT to go to the VM screen then press SHOW Press CHG at the ICM PREFIX en
217. ften used PathFinder functions all of which can also be selected from menu bar options For more information on configuring the following system settings refer to Chapter 5 MAINT Application System Settings Subscriber Settings Button Clicking the Subscriber Settings button provides the same function as selecting Edit gt User gt Show Users from the menu bar When you click on this button the Select Subscriber to Edit window displays From this window you can create modify or delete subscribers and settings Subscribers are defined as PathFinder users who have both a mailbox and an extension Class of Service Button s The Class of Service button causes the Select COS to Edit window to display the equivalent of selecting Edit gt Class of Service from the menu bar A Class of Service COS defines settings that apply to a group of users Clicking this button allows you to create modify or delete a COS Voice Menu Button Clicking the Voice Menu button is the same as selecting Edit gt Menus from the menu bar Clicking this button causes the Select Menu to Edit window to appear From this window you can create a new voice menu or you can modify or delete an existing one Special Characters amp Strings 4 9 Time Control Button The Time Control button causes the Select Time Control to Edit window to display just as if you had selected Edit gt Time Control from the menu bar Time control
218. g Initialized 0 objects 1241 16 10 55 Server started 041058PM Status tt st iti i Figure C 27 Internet Fax Delivery Server Window As requests are processed by the server the log information will appear The only operation available is to shut down the server Start a Facsimile Transmission To start a facsimile transmission perform the following steps Call into the PathFinder system from a facsimile machine Access the menu defined above Press the key associated with the A IIFD SUB module Enter a subscriber number if prompted Enter a destination number When prompted press Start on your facsimile machine Al the system has delivered the facsimile it will send a return receipt back to the number indicated in the subscriber record Aw AWN Onelook Unified Messaging C 55 Troubleshooting Depending on the problem use the log files associated with PathFinder and IFD to determine the problem Bad IP addresses are the most typical problems you will encounter Use Telnet and Ping to connect to remote systems and verify addresses Refer to Is the server name correct on page C 72 for more information Onelook Unified Messaging Onelook is PathFinder s unified messaging solution With Onelook all of your messages voice facsimile and e mail can be retrieved from your desktop Onelook gives you the ability to send and receive voice mail messages through Microsof
219. git TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Enter 1 1 HOLD First 1 is the table number assigned Second 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber d Enter 8 0 9999999 HOLD 8 is the disconnect table 0is a required entry 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 Btn 4 enter the CO line range dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 9 then Btn 1 to program ringing assignments d Enter 690 3 on the dial pad then press HOLD 690 is the voice mail group 3 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 690 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button Disconnect digits are not sent for internal calls They are only sent for disconnecting CO calls when Loop Supervision is enabled 3 10 Phone System Set Up Starplus SPD 612 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the STARPLUS SPD 612 in band integration n One2x4SLT expander card Each card provides four SLT circuits Or o
220. gnize the Dialogic hardware Country Specific Configuration Allows you to configure your voice processing board Dialogic hardware for a particular country outside the United States PBXpert Allows the voice processing boards to learn the ring back busy do not disturb and other tones relevant to voice processing Learns the tones and creates a tone set file for telephone systems 2 26 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert Release catalog Contains Dialogic release notes and information on how to contact Dialogic technical support Set Dialogic Service Startup Mode Determines how the Dialogic service is started by the Windows 2000 Windows NT operating system Defines when the Dialogic service should be started Uninstall Completely removes the Dialogic system software from your PC Universal Dialogic Diagnostic Utility UDDU Allows you to run tests on your voice board to determine the integrity of the board Configuration For PathFinder to work properly you must configure the Dialogic software to match the installed Dialogic hardware Please note that the Dialogic software may not work properly until the Streams Environment has been installed Refer to Install Streams Environment on page 2 19 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 27 Dialog 4 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Dialogic System Software gt Dialogic Configuration Manager DCM Dialogi stem Softwar
221. gs As such it is a powerful troubleshooting and supervisory tool for maintaining PathFinder Setting Reports Registry Settings Detail If you need more information than what is included on the Registry Settings Summary report you can run a Registry Settings Detail report Data The Registry Settings Detail report provides the same information as the Registry Settings Summary report but also includes an explanation of each setting default values and the type of registry variable Report 262 Notepad File Edit Search Help 86 14 96 15 44 68 AaGFirstKey AaBlindDelay61 AaBlindDelay63 faDialPrefix63 faDialprefix 7 faDialPrefix16 faGetBusy63 faGetNoAnswer 63 faGetRe ject 63 Registry Settings Detail amp 1 Range All BE Page 01 7 Figure 6 20 Registry Settings Detail Report Example Use This is a comprehensive report that not only includes all system settings but a description of each As such it is a powerful troubleshooting and supervisory tool for maintaining PathFinder Setting Reports 6 29 System Distribution Lists The System Distribution Lists report provides a listing of each system distribution list used on PathFinder Report 270 Notepad x File Edit Search Help System Distribution Lists 06 14 96 15 45 02 Page 61 Range All List Number Member Description TECH SUPPORT SCOTT KELLY BO ALEXANDER 2 members 1620 LINK TO OTHER LIST 2
222. h of message and hang up type Auto Attendant Logs information regarding transfers including call results Menus Detects what menu prompt is played and what keys each caller presses Voice Mail Owner Tracks mailbox owner activities including what messages are played saved and deleted Directory Oversees directory activities including what keys are pressed when a caller accesses the directory Events Tracks events including pager and message waiting indicator notification Message Manager Tracks events as the message manager processes them Notification Tracks notification of messages including notification strings and retries Time Controls Provides detailed information regarding time control processing Fax Support Monitors the fax support module Integration Tracks information packets received from the telephone system regarding transfers All Off Clicking this button deactivates all debugging options Module Settings Operators The Operators settings are used to specify the dialing sequence needed to transfer a call to the operator Module Settings Operators General Operator Blind transfer string for operator amp 0 Cancel Next r Voice Mail Operator Previous Mailbox for Voice Mail Operator 0 OPERATOR OPER M Help 0 as First Digit is Operator Kk Auto Attendant Operator Extension for Operator 0 OPERATOR OPER O as
223. hange the following Message Management window will display i Information about Onelook Onelook Vo ME Ea File Edit View Compose Help X sole ale 2 From Enhanced Systems Inc Sent Fri 15 Aug 1997 15 04 54 To 1256 Subject Information about Onelook 00 03 5 of 00 16 6 1 Tick Mark 1 sec Figure C 32 Message Management Window Onelook Unified Messaging C 63 o The buttons in the top left portion of the window allow you to do the following x Delete the current voice message Reply with a voice message Forward the current voice message Go to the previous message Show a version information window in Exchange or Outlook Ge ve Go to the next message sd 2 O The four fields tell you From From whom the message has been sent Sent When the message was sent To To whom the message was sent Subject The subject of the message o The message slider bar shows the current position within the voice message n The time range at the bottom of the window shows the current position within the voice message in seconds The bottom text line indicates how many seconds of the message are equal to one tick mark The Subject and From fields can be changed to reflect what the message is about and who the message was from These fields are saved in Exchange or Outlook when you close the form This process helps make it easier to locate an important facsimile quickly Replying to a Vo
224. he appropriate voice mailbox The fields associated with each Action field change to reflect the Action selection For example if Forward to Extension is selected in the Action field the field to the right of it changes to Extension to forward to If the Action selection is set to Forward to Menu the field changes to Menu to forward to and is used to enter the name of the menu to which calls are sent The following Action options are available Blind Transfer An unsupervised transfer to the requested extension This option is commonly used to transfer to a hunt group or in an environment where you are sure the call can be answered as in integrated systems Only one transfer type Blind or Supervised can be selected at a time Supervised Transfer Allows PathFinder to monitor call transfers to determine whether the called extension is busy or is not being answered If the call is not answered PathFinder refers to the subsequent Action entries for instructions on processing the call Only one transfer type Supervised or Blind can be selected at a time O Screen Caller When a person dials an extension through the Auto Attendant the Call Screening feature prompts the caller to state his name PathFinder lets the called party hear this name before the call is actually transferred The called party can either accept or reject the call This option works only with Supervised Transfer o Holding Allowed Gives the caller the op
225. he expansion slot cover and remove the cover 2 Insert the board into an available ISA slot on the motherboard using care not to apply excessive pressure on any of the components Ensure that the modular jacks face the back of the PC 3 Gently press on the edge of the board and the bracket to securely seat it in the slot Rocking the board forward and backward while applying pressure on its top edge helps seat it properly 4 Align the notch in the board s bracket with the hole in the rear panel of the PC Fasten it into place with the screw that was removed in Step 1 Do not put the cover back on the PC without securely fastening the voice card to the chassis Severe damage to the card could result if it is operated without being securely fastened to the PC chassis Telephone Connection Four line voice cards Dialog 4 models use standard two line RJ 14 modular jacks to connect to the phone system The RJ 14 jacks on the four line cards support two telephone lines or extensions per jack On the VFX 40ESCplus each RJ 11 jack on the rear bracket of the voice board supports a single voice channel Use RJ 11 connectors and phone cable to connect each voice channel jack to a PBX or Central Office CO Telephone connections are located on the right side of the four line voice card When connecting phone lines to four line cards follow these steps 1 With the board components face up and the jacks on the right side connect lines one and two
226. he line We will now edit what should run on line 2 The current setting is shown below You can leave the setting as is by clicking Next To change the setting click Change Once you are satisfied with the setting click Next to move on to the next wizard screen To accept this value and skip all other wizard screens click Finish If you wish to leave all settings as they currently are click Cancel Menu 100 coe e Figure 5 55 Edit Line Settings Window 5 104 Line Settings 4 Click on Next to display the Event Handling Group window Line Edit 2 of 4 Event group We will now edit the event group for line 2 The current setting is shown below The system allows you to group lines that can handle certain types of outbound tasks These are called event groups Leave the setting blank for lines that will not handle outbound tasks Possible settings are blank and from 1 to 9 Normally group 1 is reserved for MsgMan operations Values 2 through 4 are reserved for other system functions Event group of 5 is typically used for basic notification paging and Mw ls Values 6 through 9 are for other MWI and notification groups You can leave the setting as is by clicking Next To change the setting enter a new value below Once vou are satisfied with the setting click Next to move on to the next wizard screen To accept this value and skip all other wizard screens click IFinishl If vou wish to leave all
227. he system will transfer control to the voice mail module The system will either prompt the caller for a mailbox number or if a mailbox number is selected below the system will access that mailbox Ask For Mailbox Figure 5 53 Edit Time Control Window 9 Click on the action key that you want to configure A brief description of each action appears to the right of the window as it is selected Ifyou do not select any action no time control action is performed 5 100 Time Control Settings 10 Select options from the time control action list as follows Field Mailbox DEscription Sends the caller to the specific mailbox you select from a drop down list Selecting Ask for Mailbox causes PathFinder to prompt the caller for a mailbox number Extension Sends the caller to the specific extension you select froma drop down list Selecting Ask for Extension causes PathFinder to prompt the caller for an extension number Menu Executes the selected menu Owner Access Prompts the caller for a mailbox and password or only fora password if you select the mailbox from the drop down list Run Module Runs other PathFinder modules Time Control Command File Loads a time control and executes the time control action for the computed time period Runs the indicated command file Refer to Appendix A for more information on command files Company Directory Provides a
228. hipped voice card Configure these voice cards prior to installation Refer to the following web sites for further information on installing and connecting Dialogic cards http support dialogic com Install Config Dialog4 dlg4 003 pdf http support dialogic com Install Config Dialog4 dlg4hwg3 pdf http support dialogic com Install Config index htm Channels The Dialog 4 voice cards support up to four independent voice I O channels each with a telephone line interface Each channel has the following capabilities O Record digitize and compress audio in real time Play back previously recorded files Detect DTMF tones Generate DTMF and pulse tones for dialing O n n n Initiate and receive calls through the loop start telephone interface 2 8 Install and Configure Hardware Board Level Jumpers Card options and memory configurations are set through board jumpers and switches The figure below illustrates Dialog 4 jumpers and switches JPR JP201 R JP301 JIN LU SN JP1 RS ASS Figure 2 1 Model Dialog 4 Part J1 J2 JP1 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP101 JP401 SWI1 Refer to your Dialogic Voice Board Reference Card for specific locations of jumpers and switches for modification Function RJ 14 jack for interface Jumper block to set interrupt level Jumper pins to set base memory segment Jumper pins to enable hardware interrupt circuitry Jumper pins to set ring detection thre
229. ic Configuration Manager Add Hardware Wizard FAX Board 1 6 Type a name to identify the board e g Fax Board 1 as used in the previous illustration then click Next Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 37 The following displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Properties for FX 40ESC Plus FAX Bo Ea ISABusWidth 7 Highlight the BLT Address parameter then use the dropdown menu to select a base memory address value of c0000 2 38 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert Highlight the BLT Interrupt parameter then use the dropdown menu to select the interrupt value to match the hardware IRQ setting Refer to Table 2 3 and Figure 2 1 Generally you will use IRQ 7 Dialogic Configuration Manager Properties for FX 40ESC Plus FAX Bo E3 BLTInterrupt ISABusWidth Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 39 9 Click OK and the following window displays Dialogic Configuration Manager Olx File Yiew Action Service Help AM su ole Gl dye 88 Configured Devices on_PF82 04 EA DAAD i W Dialog 4 Voice Board 1 W Dialog 4 Voice Board 2 E P TOM Bus CO Bus 0 EA vr MR VFX 40ESC Plus FAX Board 1 Dialogic System Service Status Stopped The VFX 40ESC Plus Fax Board 1 is shown under VFX Its icon has a superimposed red dot and the message at the bottom of the window indicates that the card has not been started 10 The board
230. ically the dialing sequence is the same as for Recall Caller on Busy field Blind Transfer Delay For Blind Transfer Delay enter the number of seconds the system should pause after dialing the transfer sequence and extension number but before going on hook The maximum value for this field is 999 Flash Hook Length For Flash hook Length the default length of 1 2 second is appropriate for most phone systems If DTMF tones are audible when attempting a transfer this setting needs to be increased If the telephone system hangs up when attempting a transfer this setting needs to be shorter Refer to your phone system documentation for additional information Selecting Use Perfect Call indicates that PathFinder should use the Perfect Call settings Refer to Perfect Call on page 5 33 for more details 5 32 Telephony Settings Rings The Rings function determines how PathFinder processes ring detection on incoming calls Telephony Settings Rings r Ring Settings Number of rings before system answers incoming calls i Cancel Number of rings before No Answer detected a Next Previous dadi Ring Detection Help Ring count reset delay fi x100msec Minimum ring ON B x100msec Minimum ring OFF 5 100msec Ring edge to detect Rise Fall Figure 5 21 Telephony Settings Rings Window Number of Rings Before System Answers The Number of rings before system answers parameter
231. ication Voice Mail C Directory Time Controls All Off 7 Auto Attendant Events FAX Support C Menus IK Message Manager Integration Figure 5 5 Module Settings Logging Window What To Log The raw data are a chronological history of all events that occur in PathFinder and can be used to evaluate real time performance Raw data include time date line module and a description of each event These raw data can be formatted into a variety of reports that help measure performance Refer to Logs Reports on page 6 31 for more information on these reports Log Files The Logging settings allow you to select which modules send information to the log files n The fewer modules selected the less disk storage space needed and the faster PathFinder operates o The more modules selected the greater the amount of information available to help diagnose problems and to generate reports Each day s activity log output to the disk is stored in a unique file in the log sub directory HELLONT LOGS The file name of each daily activity log has the following format DL lt YY gt lt MM gt lt DD gt LOG EXAMPLE The log file for February 23 1999 would be called DL992302 L0G Module Settings 5 7 Log Option Call Begin End Activity The start and end of calls Voice Mail All voice mail activities except owner activities Auto Attendant All call transfer activities Me
232. ication has been programmed the software will open to the most commonly used area Call Lists From this screen you can start or terminate a call list or modify the parameters To Activate Deactivate a Call List 1 Select CALL LISTS then click ON OFF amp Call List Admin Build 50 File View Call Lists Activate and deactivate call lists Description Priority Start Date Start Time End Time 2001 5 24 2001 8 00 00 AM O 2003 5 22 2001 5 21 00 PM 6 21 00 PM O Created by AutoLogin on 05 2472 5 25 2001 7 20 00 AM 6 20 00 PM O School Closing 5 24 2001 3 00 00 AM 6 24 00 PM O Sub Math 5 24 2001 9 30 00 AM 6 21 00 PM O Teacher Conference 5 24 2000 5 25 00 PM 6 25 00 PM El On Off DO Modify 6 records Figure C 3 Call List Activation 2 To activate a call list click the box next to the call list name A check mark will display MI to indicate the active status 3 To deactivate a call list click the box next to the call list name The check mark will disappear LI to indicate the inactive status An active Call List can not be modified If you attempt to edit a list that is still active a system message will display and remind you to uncheck the item before editing or removing C 10 Chalk Talk To Set Up or Modify a Call List 1 Select CALL LISTS then select MODIFY a Tomodify an existing Call List highlight the desired list and click the PROPERTIES button o
233. ice Insert greeting plays a COS prefix prompt followed by a name prompt which in turn is followed by COS postfix prompt This is often done to personalize a COS greeting while limiting the amount of disk space used For example Balagunda Corp set up a COS for all sales people called SALES The COS prefix file SALES VI1 name prompt and postfix file SALES VI2 might sound like this Thank you for calling the Balagunda Corp sales department lt Subscriber gt is not available Please leave a message after the tone Class of Service Settings 5 63 Only one COS prefix and postfix prompt can be recorded for any specific COS These files are stored in the HELLONT VOX sub directory By default the prefix file is called lt COS Name VI1 where COS Name gt is the eight character name given to the COSand VI1 is the identifier for the first portion of the voice insert greeting The suffix file is called lt COS Name gt V1I2 where lt COS Name is the eight character name given to the COS and VI2 is the identifier for the second portion of the voice insert greeting Greeting Length Enter the maximum length in seconds for personal mailbox greetings created by users assigned to this COS Maximum value for this field is 999 Message Types Settings Click on Message Types in the Edit COS window to begin defining message type options for the COS The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC Voice Mail Message
234. ice Message The following are the steps for replying to a voice message with another voice message 1 Open the message you want to reply to by double clicking on it in Outlook or Exchange C 64 Onelook Unified Messaging 2 Once it is open press the Reply button at the top of the window This will change the form into a reply window m RE Information about Onelook Informat MEI E3 File Edit View Compose Help x ele 2 fren fi 256 esivymail Gent Fi 15 Aug 1997 15 04 54 To E nhanced Systems Inc Subject FE Information about Onelook 00 00 0 of 00 16 6 ee y 1 Tick Mark 1 sec Figure C 33 Message Management Window 3 Press the record button to record a voice message with a microphone 4 After recording your message you can listen to it by pressing the play button 5 lf you want to re record your voice message just repeat step 3 again Before you send the message fill in the To field The address format for this is lt mailbox gt lt server gt for example 1234 esimail com 7 Fill in the subject line and your name in the From field 8 Send the message by pressing the Send Message button and your message will be sent Onelook Unified Messaging C 65 Forwarding a Voice Message The following are the steps for forwarding a voice message to another mailbox 1 Open the message you want to forward by double clicking on it in Outlook or Exchange 2 Once it is open
235. ields Refer to Digit Lengths on page 5 1 for more information on these parameters Click on Accept You are then prompted to configure PBX Integrations In the PBX Integration window configure your system s PBX integration Refer to PBX Integrations on page 5 34 for more information on how to do this After you have finished configuring your PBX integration you are returned to the main MAINT window You must now continue the Configuration Preparation process by setting up voice functions MAINT Overview 4 5 MAINT Overview File Menu The File menu provides access to the MAINT Eie EE Logins function and MAINT passwords ners Fora description of these functions refer to Access BANE Lod Levels amp MAINT Passwords Exit Choosing Exit from this menu quits MAINT Configuration Menu The Configuration menu provides access to E E Eer functions that set parameters concerned with the ay R p Module Settings general operation of PathFinder such as call f g System Settings transfer sequences and hang up detection EE EE Before putting PathFinder into service you must configure Module System and Telephony Settings along with any other modules you may Fointtafointsetings have purchased Br ae PBX Integrations Registry 4 6 MAINT Overview Refer to Chapter 5 MAINT Application System Settings for more information on these options O Module Settings Digit Lengths Record Play
236. if you open a WAV file or A Dialogic card if you open a VOX file Device Status Specifies whether you can play or record or edit If this is green you can play record or edit If it is red you cannot play record or edit This is green when you answer VOX or when you have a sound card It is red when you first open the VOX file or when you disconnect it Troubleshooting You can carry out Dialogic based or WAV based Boom Box troubleshooting Dialogic based Troubleshooting oO ul Make sure that the Dialogic voice board is installed correctly Be sure that the Dialogic voice drivers are correctly configured and started Make sure the phone extension or phone through extension simulator is connected to a voice port Please note that you cannot plug a phone directly into a dialogic port Make sure Boom Box is configured to use the correct voice port phone extension connected to Boom Box Application 7 9 O Make sure Boom Box is not using a voice port already in use by PathFinder or other Dialogic based application WAV based Troubleshooting O Be sure that the WAV device is installed correctly o Be sure the speakers are connected correctly turned on and are loud enough O Make sure the microphone is installed correctly Make sure the microphone gain sensitivity is not set too soft or too loud often an optional setting Boom Box System Prompts The Boom Box application allows you to create and
237. iguration message waiting indicators message cascading and supervised transfers The logs from the voice processing engine are vital to troubleshooting these types of problems Questions amp Answers Q Each time try to start the voice processing engine get the following error Could not find Streams Environment Please reload drivers A The Streams Environment has been installed incorrectly Refer to Install Streams Environment on page 2 19 Q Each time try to start the voice processing engine get the following error TCP IP Connectivity is not set up correctly on this machine am unable to determine your host name and address Please install TCP IP and related services before using Monitor A The TCP IP protocol has not been correctly installed Refer to Configuration on page 2 26 Q Each time try to start the voice processing engine get the following error Could not start Dialogic service Please reload drivers Questions amp Answers 8 13 A The Dialogic Board configuration software has not been run or has not been installed properly Consult the Event Viewer in the Administrative Tools program group to give more information on the error Please correctly configure your Dialogic board Refer to Install and Configure Hardware on page 2 5 Q Message Waiting Indicators are not lighting on my system What is wrong A There could be several problems Follow thes
238. ilbox 2343 Action 1 Number to dial Li Action 2 Do always Number to dial Blind Transfer Acton 3 Do always Number to dial Blind Transfer E Figure 5 35 Edit User s Extension Settings Window Time Control Unless there is a special circumstance leave this field blank Time control settings provide time oriented call routing instructions e g routing unanswered calls to an extension during the day and a mailbox at night Refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 for more information Actions PathFinder provides three Action fields that determine how PathFinder process incoming calls PathFinder refers to the three options ina cascading order That is the first field has precedence over the second and the second field has precedence over the third The following illustrates an example scenario of Action options 1 An incoming call is answered by PathFinder 2 PathFinder checks the first Action option for instructions on how to process the call The supervised transfer has been selected User Settings 5 53 3 PathFinder is instructed to perform a supervised transfer to the extension 4 The extension is busy PathFinder pulls the call back from the extension 5 PathFinder checks the second Action option for instructions on what to do next The option Forward to Voice Mail has been selected 6 PathFinder sends the call to t
239. ilbox Settings on page 5 49 for more information on configuring notification in the Users Settings O Refer to Appendix A for more information on command scripts This setting is used ina command file when using the DialPrefixforWhereField otherwise it is not called when a command file is being used for notification Refer to Notification Settings on page 5 73 for more information Hang Up Detection Hang up Detection allows PathFinder to detect when callers hang up during acall Unless properly set PathFinder is unable to detect a hang up condition Detection Settings Telephony Settings Hang Up Detection r Continuous Detection Silence seconds of silence Non silence seconds of non silence r Re Order Detection General Tone Detection Silence Interval im x10 msec of silence Set Tone Templates Tone Interval E x10 msec of non silence Cycles Needed m cycles Tolerence id x10msec Figure 5 18 Telephony Settings Hang Up Detection Window 5 24 Telephony Settings Types of Hang Up Detection Loop Current Supervision Loop Current disconnects are always activated by default If available on your telephone system activate Loop Current Supervision When a drop in loop current is detected on a line PathFinder will disconnect This is the preferred method for detecting hang ups and is the most reliable Tone or Silence Disconnect Some telephone systems provide a conti
240. iles The command files are located in the HELLO CFILES subdirectory They have the following file names PAGER10 CF 006 CF 106 CF PAGER12 CF 008 CF 108 CF PAGER14 CF 010 CF 110 CF PAGER16 CF 012 CF 112 CF PAGER18 CF 014 CF 114 CF PAGER20 CF 016 CF 116 CF PAGER22 CF 018 CF 118 CF PAGER24 CF 020 CF 120 CF PAGER6 CF 022 CF 122 CF PAGER8 CF 024 CF 124 CF The numeric portion of the name describes the number of seconds after dialing the pager number but before sending the mailbox digits to the paging company Sample Pager Files Below is a sample of the pager file that we use It is from PAGER10 CF this is similar to PAGERXX CF and OXX CF files OffHook DialUrgentMsgCount Sleep 2 Dial DialPrefixForWhereField DialNewOnlyMsgCount Sleep 3 Dial DialMailboxWhere DialSavedMsgCount Sleep 10 Dial DialMsgSource OnHook MsgSourceOk Dial Notify Dial Quit Modifying Command Files Below is a sample of the pager file that we use it is from 110 CF this is similar to 1XX CF files OffHook Dial Sleep 2 DialNewOnlyMsgCount DialPrefixForWhereField Dial Sleep 3 DialSavedMsgCount DialMailboxWhere Dial Sleep 10 OnHook DialMailbox Notify Dial Quit DialUrgentMsgCount Modifying Command Files Use a text editor such as Notepad exe to view or modify a command file Examples A sample command file that mailbox 232 would use for notification is listed below The file first
241. inder can send message waiting commands to telephone systems that support message waiting indicators or similar notification devices Off PathFinder does not send message waiting indicators to subscriber stations with this COS On First Message PathFinder sends message waiting indicators only when the first message is received This setting is particularly useful when the message waiting indicator is toggled between off and on On Every Message PathFinder sends a message waiting indicator for each new message received by the subscriber Message Waiting Indicator MWI Strings Normally a phone system defines the MWI strings by the length of the extension in MWI Notification On some phone systems it is necessary to define MWI strings on a per COS basis The COS message waiting indicator string settings take precedence Default message waiting indicator settings are defined in the Configuration menu of MAINT Refer to MWI Notification on page 5 21 Event Handler Group The Event Handler facility is used to program PathFinder s notification lines The default Event Handler Group is 5 For notification to work at least one of the phone lines must be assigned an event handler Refer to Setting Up Phone Lines on page 5 102 to complete configuration of the event handler Class of Service Settings 5 75 Voice Notify Options These options apply when PathFinder plays messages to the caller during notification
242. indow using the following guidelines Time Control Unless there is a special circumstance leave this value as None Time controls provide time oriented call routing instructions for example route unanswered calls to an extension during the day and a mailbox at night Refer to Time Control Settings in this chapter for additional information Operator Enter a personal operator for the mailbox If a caller presses 0 for the operator while in the mailbox the call is transferred to an alternate extension This setting overrides the system wide operator setting refer to Operators on page 5 9 This setting can be used to transfer calls to a personal attendant User Settings Cascade To Message cascading is a feature that copies or moves messages left for the originating mailbox to another mailbox In order to use message cascading the originating mailbox s COS must be configured to allow this feature refer to Message Cascading on page 5 75 This feature does not work until COS settings have been properly configured Typical uses include archiving and notification of no answer to messages left in a mailbox e g for customer service Mailbox Action Click on Play Greeting if PathFinder is to play the greeting recorded for this mailbox when PathFinder answers the phone Use the drop down list to select from various actions that the mailbox performs when a message is left These actions function as follows
243. ined as users with a mailbox and extension on PathFinder The subscriber does not have to use both the mailbox and or extension 3 40 Phone System Set Up infinite DVXPlus III Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite DVX PLUS III in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU One or two SLIBs is an internal RGU and more than two SLIBs are an external RGU Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX PLUS Ill include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 41 Table 3 19 infinite DVXPlus III Configuration Setup 1 From Station 100 enter the Admin code of c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 3 226 or dial and your password d Enter 1 HOLD 2 To disable the conference feature on SLT 1 is a suffix digit ports to be assigned to the VM group press is a digit that informs PathFinder that Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be this is a subscriber assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999
244. ing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder Handset receiver gain feature must be turned on Flash 05 Button 13 Phone System Set Up infinite DVX III Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite DVX III in band integration o One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each SL12 card provides twelve ports One DTM4 installed on the SL12 DTM4 provides four DTMF receivers In lieu of a DTM4 a 6 X 6 Combo card can be installed This provides six DTMF receivers O One Ring Generator unit and a 48V power supply are needed Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX III include O Station forward to a personal greeting o Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call o Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 35 Table 3 16 infinite DVX III Configuration Setup From Sta
245. ing the activity leader to personally update their own group using any telephone Question and Answer session via voice mail Question and Answer Sessions These pre recorded voice mail sessions allow parents and teachers to provide input and supply feedback at their convenience Up to 99 questions can be asked recorded and reviewed at a later time C 4 Chalk Talk Minimum Specifications PC Requirements O Intel Pentium based PC with 32 MB RAM O Minimum 4 GB hard drive O 3 5 1 44 MB disk drive O Windows NT 4 0 or higher with Service Pack 5 o CDROM drive System Requirements o PathFinder release 8 2 4 or higher O Chalk Talk activation on the software key Outbound Calling using Call Lists The outbound calling portion of the Chalk Talk application was designed to perform three major tasks 1 Contacting parents of absentee students 2 Locating substitute teachers 3 Notifying employees of school closing etc The basic underlying function of all three operations is outbound dialing to a list of numbers A Windows based program allows you to set up or edit call lists activate call lists by a specific group and print call detail reports DATABASES A Master List of call out numbers is created for storing name phone number and ID information Each entry is then assigned to a specific group s Students Teachers Staff Substitute1 Substitue2 etc CALL LISTS When a call out task is n
246. inue 12 Indicate the program folder of PathFinder then click Next to continue 13 Click Next to acknowledge that you have enough information to continue 14 For Startup folders click All to select all then click Next to continue 15 To continue click Next Install PathFinder Software 2 23 PathFinder documentation may be available as a Portable Document Format PDF file which can be read using Adobe lt Default Paragraph Font gt Acrobat Reader When selecting options from the Setup menu clearing all options except this one automatically installs Acrobat Reader 16 Read the Acrobat Licensing Agreement then click Yes at the end of the document 17 Indicate a destination directory of C Acrobat4 Reader 18 Clear the Display Acrobat Reader 4 0 Readme file check box then click Finish 19 Click OK to continue 20 Click Next in the nstallation Successful window To complete software installation 21 Save changes and exit 22 Click OK 23 Select Configuration Programs 24 Check and activate Codekey Manager and MAINT then click on Next 25 If the information matches close Codekey Manager The Codekey Manager program allows you to view the options that the sentinel allows It also provides the capability to add new features to PathFinder O Ifyou are installing PathFinder for the first time it is not necessary to change anything in the Codekey manager O If this is a PathFinder upgrade C
247. iption Number of times a caller can retry entering an option The range for this field is 1 to 999 Owner Retries Number of times a mailbox owner is permitted to retry entering an option The range for this field is 1 to 999 Inter Digit Time Length of time between digits Used in cases where the length of the entry is unknown PathFinder assumes the caller is finished entering digits if this length of time passes after the most recent digit is entered The range for this field is 1 to 999 Digit Time Digit Time is the length of time that a caller can press a digit before PathFinder assumes that the digit is being repeated The range for this field is 1 to 999 EXAMPLE Assume that Digit Time is set to three seconds o Ifa caller presses and holds the 7 key for two seconds PathFinder will assume that the caller has entered 7 o Ifa caller presses and holds the 7 key for four seconds one second more than the three second digit time PathFinder will assume that the caller has entered 77 o Ifa caller presses and hold the 7 key for seven seconds one second more than twice the three second digit time PathFinder assumes that the caller has entered 777 In other words if Digit Time is set to X seconds then for each X seconds that the caller presses a digit key PathFinder assumes that the caller has pressed that digit key once 5 16 System Settings System Settings The PathFinde
248. is field indicates the subscriber s name COS This field is used for billing If you have not yet added the desired COS type the name of the COS that you will create after you add this subscriber Send Receipt to Type the phone number where a return receipt should be delivered If a receipt should not be sent then leave this field blank 4 Continue to add subscribers to build up the list You may go back and edit or delete a subscriber by double clicking on subscriber entries Class of Service After entering the subscribers click on Classes of Service to add a new COS Note that classes of service only control pricing Servers in Network After administering Classes of Service click on Servers in Network to list the other PathFinder machines where you can send facsimiles For Servers in Network you should add entries for each of the machines with which this one will be communicating Also add a server named Default that points to your current machine This setting will be used if IFD cannot find a remote server All servers should use IP Port 24 unless that port is unavailable Server Add OK Descriptive Name Defaut Machine Name memaehnd o Cna IF Port E Figure C 22 Server Add Window C 50 Internet Fax Delivery The Servers in Network list does not specify when you send the facsimiles Those settings are controlled in the Fax Routing window Phone Number Translations This item list the transl
249. is left blank PathFinder defaults to the last COS used In a configuration that uses multiple COSs errors could arise You should assign a COS to each extension to avoid possible problems Tutorial Determines if the tutorial is played when the mailbox owner accesses PathFinder o If this option is disabled the subscriber s COS does not allow for a first time tutorial o If the option is enabled and not checked the subscriber has probably already heard the tutorial o If the option is enabled and is checked on the next call into PathFinder the mailbox owner will access the tutorial 4 If needed click on Mailbox Settings and or Extension Settings and configure these windows as needed Refer to Mailbox Settings on page 5 49 and Extension Settings on page 5 51 for more details on configuring these windows 5 Click on Save to add this definition to PathFinder User Settings 5 49 Mailbox Settings To adjust Mailbox Settings click on Mailbox Settings from the Edit User s Settings window refer to General User Settings on page 5 46 The following window is displayed Mailbox User Settings Name MEES Time Control M 0 Cancel Mailbox 1000 perator zi ii Extension 1000 Cascade to Ral H r Mailbox Action IK Play Greeting Take a message z r Notification No notification M Figure 5 34 Mailbox User s Settings Window Complete the fields in this w
250. ith managing communications in a school system environment This enhanced application also provides Advanced Voice Mail features such as O Anauto attendant and unlimited menu options that eliminates the need to talk to a operator an An unlimited number of mailboxes that allows everyone on the system to have their own voice mail box with features such as call screening multiple greetings message forwarding and personal distribution lists Features amp Specifications Three major applications have been specifically designed for school systems Outbound Calling Homework Assignment Information and Questions amp Answer Sessions Benefits for Schools Contact parents of absentee students Notify students and parents of important school information Outbound Calling Eliminates repeat phone calls Automated outbound calling notifies parents of their child s absence and can inquire about the reason for the absence Parents can leave a voice message responding to the inquire which the school staff can later review Chalk Talk automatically redials non answered and busy numbers until the call is received Chalk Talk can send a pre recorded message to everyone that needs to know important information i e conferences meetings report cards A unique confirmation code can be requested to ensure that the message was received Chalk Talk then matches the response against the database information Chalk
251. ized reporting the system administrator can report on all track messages log lines and actually display the life of a message as it moves through the system In addition some IVR systems can use customized reporting to show information about the IVR that is not available through standard reports Use This report is another tool that the system administrator has to analyze and control proper distribution of PathFinder resources T Boom Box and Monitor Applications The Boom Box application allows you to create and edit voice prompt files used by PathFinder This chapter provides an introduction to this application and details on its installation as well as an introduction to the prompts that can be created and used in conjunction with the Boom Box application Boom Box Application 7 1 Boom Box Application Boom Box can be used on any machine that has either Dialogic voice ports configured or a WAV device with speakers and a microphone Boom Box is usually used on the same PC where PathFinder is running However Boom Box can be used on another PC that has another Dialogic voice port or a WAV device and then the prompt file s can be copied to PathFinder Boom Box can work on the following O Standalone single prompt files VOX or o Multiple voice prompts combined into one voice prompt file VOX with a matching index file VDX The VOX files used by PathFinder are in the Dialogic 8 bit ADPCM format at
252. king the corresponding Key Action button Fields in the resulting window can be configured as follows Table 5 1 Key Action Definitions Key Action Definition MAILBOX Sends the caller to a specific mailbox Ask for Mailbox PathFinder prompts the caller to enter a mailbox number For example if the 1 Key is set to Ask for Mailbox then callers press 1 they hear Enter the mailbox number of the person you are trying to reach Press zero for the operator Press the star key for the directory Start Key The first digit of the mailbox you are trying to access For example if the 2 Key is set to Start Key then when the caller presses 2 they will not hear a prompt and the system will wait for more digits NOTE If you assign 2 as the mailbox Start Key then you must have mailbox numbers that start with the digit 2 Specific Mailbox The caller is transferred directly to the mailbox indicated For example if Number the 3 Key is set to send to Specific Mailbox Number 4401 then when callers press 3 they are transferred directly to mailbox 4401 EXTENSION Sends the caller to a specific extension Ask for PathFinder prompts the caller to enter an extension number For example Extension if the 1 Key is set to Ask for Extension then callers press 1 they hear Enter the extension number of the person you are trying to reach Press zero for the operator Press the star key for the directory Start Key The first digit
253. l and are sold separately You can activate this option if you have purchased the Fax module s The following choices are available O May be left blank to have the caller select fax documents O May contain a document number O May contain ADMIN to allow the caller to access fax on demand administrative functions Run ActiveVex Runs an ActiveVex module ActiveVex is a proprietary development language used to create custom applications Operator Transfers caller to the General Operator Refer to Operators on page 5 9 for more information on Operator settings Invalid Option Plays the message Invalid option and repeats the instructions Disabled Key Pressing a key with this action has no affect at all It is as if the key were never pressed 5 92 Menu Settings Table 5 1 Key Action Definitions Instructions Record Prompts Key Action Definition Play Prompt Plays the indicated voice prompt file Alternatively you can select a prompt based on its directory location directory number listed below and the specific file name such as 4 help vox The available directories include 1 Modules 4 VOX 7 dBase 2 Prompts 5 Mailbox 10 Data 3 Messages 6 Menus 20 Data For example to have PathFinder play the mailbox greeting for mailbox 345 type 3 345 GRS as the prompt name Play Replays the instructions prompt such as To hear this menu again press Only the instr
254. l as possible to avoid menu conflicts Once you have generated a flowchart you are ready to begin creating your menus Please press For sales Y For Y 1 information 2 technical 3 l support transfer to the Technical Support y Hunt Group Thank you for contacting the sales department Please press For the For the Eastern region Western region Thank you for calling the Balagunda Corporation If you know the extension of the party you are trying to reach Figure 5 46 Sample Flow Chart for Menu Design 5 86 Menu Settings A menu must be created before you can add commands to it or make changes to it To work with menus click on Menu on the tool bar The following window displays Select Menu to Edit Done Help Create Delete Figure 5 47 Select Menu to Edit Window From here you can create a menu delete a menu or select a menu to edit Creating a Menu To create a menu perform the following steps 1 Inthe Select Menu to Edit window click on Create 2 Enter a name for the menu up to eight characters 3 Select from the Template field s drop down list a template menu upon which the new menu can be based For example if a menu called Day already exists and you want to create a new menu called Night that is similar to the Day menu select Day as the template me
255. la e ix E Microsoft Mail Shared Folders E G Personal Folders KA Calendar Contacts Deleted Items E Deleted a Inbox 2 Items Archive 4 Sample 4 Trash Figure C 38 Archive Folder Setup in Outlook Create an archive folder by clicking on Inbox in the left pane and then selecting the New Folder option from the File menu in Exchange or by selecting Folder gt Create Subfolder from the File menu in Outlook When you are finished with a new message archive it by dragging it from the Inbox folder to the Archive folder If you want to copy the message instead of moving it you can hold down the Ctrl key before dropping it into the Archive folder Files in the Archive folder are never synchronized However if you delete a Onelook message from the Archive folder Onelook will delete it from the voice mailbox if it still exists there This technique can be used to keep your important messages in Outlook or Exchange indefinitely It is also recommended that you change the Subject and From fields in the messages you want to archive so you can find a message quickly C 72 Onelook Unified Messaging Troubleshooting Service Provider window keeps displaying The server name mailbox number or password is not correct and could not be validated This may also be caused by the network being down or the server not running PFMAIL Is the server name correct There are two utilities on your system that ca
256. ld files played N A AAHOLD 0 Please hold We AAHOLD 999 when the system appreciate your patience needs to put a AAHOLD 1 Please continue to caller on hold and hold the COS says use hold files AACALLFO VOX Announcesthatthe H XX0 VOX Call for extension has a call AaCallFor PathFinder Monitor Application Table 7 4 Non Indexed Customizable Prompts Continued Replaces File Name Description Indexed File Sample s AASCNASK VOX Prompt asking HIXXO VOX O Whom may I say is calling callers to say their AaScreenAsk names AAXFRMSG VOX Prompt telling H XX0 VOX O Please hold while transfer you callers you are AaTransfer1 and to going to be AaTransfer2 transferred PathFinder Monitor Application The PathFinder application is run and monitored via a Monitor application window This chapter discusses the PathFinder Monitor application its available options and its operation The PathFinder Monitor application is designed to allow the Administrator to view PathFinder status and settings Monitor also allows you to connect to local on the same machine engines and remote engines via TCP IP connections The Engine is PathFinder s workhorse The MAINT application defines how the engine operates the engine receives the incoming telephone calls and performs the actions defined in the MAINT application Startup amp Orientation After installing Path
257. le tones have zero values for Frequency 2 dual tones have non zero values On Time For cadences enter the length of time in 10ms units tone is on For continuous tones enter 1 2 of debounce time in 10ms units x10ms For cadences enter the plus or minus deviation in for On Time 10ms units for on time For continuous tones enter 1 2 of debounce time in 10ms units Telephony Settings 5 29 Field Description Off Time For cadences enter the length of time in 10ms units tone is off For continuous tones enter 0 x10ms For cadences enter the plus or minus deviation in for Off Time 10ms units for off time For continuous tones enter 0 NOTES O Continuous Tones have zero values for On Time and Off Time deviations O To debounce leading edge continuous tones to prevent talk off Set the On Time to 1 2 of the desired debounce time in 10ms units and the On Time deviation to 1 2 of the desired debounce time in 10ms units O Cadence Tones have non zero values for On Time and Off Time deviations Tone Events Check On to activate this tone template Check Off if you need to disable this tone Options Unless otherwise instructed by Vodavi Technical Support ensure that the Set Wait check box is cleared and that the Set Hang Up check box is selected O Set Wait determines whether a tone occurrence should generate events to wait function O Set Hang u
258. left hand portion of the window allow you to do the following Print a current facsimile message x Delete a facsimile message Goto the next message Go to the previous message 9 Show a version information window in Exchange or Outlook The four fields tell you From From whom the message has been sent Sent When the message was sent To To whom the message was sent Subject The subject of the message You can move the image within the window by dragging the mouse on it This is especially useful when zoomed in on a facsimile The Fit to Window button can be used to resize the image to the window after zooming or moving The Full Screen button allows you to look at a facsimile in full screen mode This mode is best for reading facsimile messages on screen On multi page facsimiles the Next Page and Prev Page buttons let you navigate through pages The Subject and From fields can be changed to reflect what the message is about and who the message was from These fields are saved in Exchange or Outlook when you close the form This process helps make it quicker and easier to locate an important message Onelook Unified Messaging C 71 Archiving Messages using Onelook A good way to archive voice mail messages and facsimiles is to create an Archive folder under the nbox folder as shown in the following window is Archive Microsoft Outlook File Edit View Go Tools Compose Help Bye gt F
259. lication will run if a caller elects to go back or exit HomeworkRunCodeOnExit Mn100 To run Mn 1007 To go to mailbox 123 use Vm123 To disconnect use Hg This variable defines what the application will run if it detects an error Similiar to values used in HomeworkRunCodeOneExit HomeworkRunCodeOnError Hg When the homework assignment is played you can select whether to play back the date and time the assignment was recorded The default setting is set to NO do not play the date HomeworkPlayDate Y A B N Play Date settings are YorA Plays date AFTER the assignment B Plays date BEFORE the assignment N NO does not play a date C 24 Chalk Talk Edit Registry Item HomeworkPlayD ate HomeworkPlayD ate N Play date for homework hotline Figure C 12 Edit Registry Item MAINT App Chalk Talk C 25 Prompts used within the Homework Hotline are non indexed prompt files and are stored in the Homework Prompts directory After shutting down PathFinder you can use BoomBox to re record any of the application prompts Table C 3 Homework Hotline Default Prompts Prompt Prompt Dialog 100 Thank you for calling the homework hotline Please enter the teacher ID number 101 Teacher ID 102 does not exist 103 No assignment has been recorded for teacher ID 104 To hear assignment again press 1 To enter a new teacher ID press
260. line number Use Review this report to check on daily PathFinder activity This report should not be confused with the Error Log There are instances however when both are used together for diagnostic purposes Logs Reports 6 33 Maintenance Log The Maintenance Log report tracks all activity within MAINT Report 402 Notepad _ x File Edit Search Help Maintenance Log Page 01 Date Range 06 13 96 to 86 13 96 Time Range 08 00 00 to 10 00 00 INFO Cos Delete Name TEST2 INFO Cos Add Name TEST2 INFO User Delete Mbx 1655 Ext 655 DEBUG Going to add Mbx 1655 Ext 655 DEBUG Using old record 1 DEBUG d4recall ENTRY DEBUG daflush ENTRY DEBUG cbUserClose ENTRY INFO User Add Mbx 1655 Ext 655 INFO Cos Delete Name TEST2 INFO Cos Add Name TEST2 INFO Registry Delete YmLocalAddress INFO User Delete Mbx 1655 Ext 655 DEBUG Going to add Mbx 1655 Ext 655 DEBUG Using old record 1 1 24 37 DEBUG d4recall ENTRY Figure 6 24 Maintenance Log Report Example Data Any time a report is run a mailbox is created or a menu is modified a line is added to the Maintenance log Use Review this report to see what changes have been made in MAINT Each line of the report lists a specific action or activity initiated during a MAINT session This can be used to track system administration functions and to verify who is accessing MAINT and what they are doing This can be very helpful in tro
261. m and select the Onelook Point to Point Server option Once installed Onelook Point to Point Server is made up of the following files o HELLONT HNTMAIL HNTMAIL EXE This is the Onelook Point to Point Server program This program sends and receives point to point messages for the local PathFinder server and sends and receives messages for Onelook Unified messaging clients O HELLONT HNTMAIL HNTMAIL INI This is the Onelook Point to Point Server settings file It contains all the configuration settings that control how HNTMAIL EXE operates O HELLONT HNTMAIL LOGS LOG Onelook Point to Point Server creates a log file of operations for each day beginning at midnight Setup amp Configuration Once the software is installed configuration changes may be made to Onelook Point to Point Server by editing the HELLONT HNTMAIL INI file no configuration program currently exists The following are the Onelook Point to Point Server sections and settings along with their defaults that can be configured in the HNTMAIL INI file Be sure to create a backup of your HNTMAIL INI file before making any modifications as an incorrect modification can cause PathFinder to behave erratically POP o Port 10710TCP IP port that Onelook Point to Point Server listens for inbound Onelook connections o Enabled TrueWhether POP service is enabled o MaxConnections 5Maximum simultaneous POP connections allowed C 76 Onel
262. m will play the designated question and answer survey A recorded prompt to be played when message has been delivered and call is ready to disconnect Start Date Run Time Delay mins Before Call Backs No Answer O Max Attempts Busy O Max Attempts No Confirm O Max Attempts Protect O Password O Re enter Activate on completion When to start calling mmm dd yy Time to start and stop calling hh mm military format Period of time between attempts to recall a previously dialed number Separate delays for each condition Maximum number of call backs allowed Numeric password 1 9 digits to control access to a specified Call List Verification of the password entered Call List is automatically activated when the Call List Entry screen is completed Select members to call To select members from a group plect memben local Master List The number of members is unlimited Load Template Call List To use template settings Load Template Call List selected to create another call list Cancel Change To accept new settings associated with a Call List reflects on Master List Cancel To ignore current information entered Chalk Talk C 13 4 Click the SELECT MEMBERS TO CALL button to access the Master List from the Select Members screen 1 Select Group 2 Select Members 3 Move names to Call List Select members to call Carrabetta Mar
263. mands CallResult OffHook Sleep DialExtension CallExtension Dials global mailbox Calls the global extension Using the Dial command is like using blind transfers in the Auto Attendant PathFinder only dials the global mailbox number and execute the next command It does not listen on the line to check if the call was connected Related Commands Sleep Dial Using the Call feature is like using supervised transfers when transferring an Auto Attendant call to an extension The voice mail system remains on the line and listen to the Call Result NOTE The Call command works in conjunction with the CallResult command Related Commands CallResult OffHook Sleep Debug lt On Off Turns CommFile debugging on and off This writes debugging information to the daily log files CallMailboxWhere Calls the number in the Notification Number setting of the global mailbox Using the Call feature is like using supervised transfers when transferring an Auto Attendant call to an extension The voice mail system remains on the line and listen to the Call Result NOTE The Call command works in conjunction with the CallResult command Related Commands CallResult OffHook Sleep DialMailboxWhere Dials the number in the Notification Number setting of the global mailbox Using the Dial command is like using blind transfers in the Auto Attendant PathFinder only dials the number and e
264. mation applications with a single PathFinder installation To program system partitioning perform the following procedure for each line o Select the line O Select a module to install on the line o Define parameters if any that regulate how the installed module functions Setting Up Phone Lines Each phone line must be set up to run an initial module when PathFinder Starts This is the process of selecting a starting function for each line and assigning any needed parameters to that line You can selectively define separate functions for every phone line Line Settings 5 103 To set up phone lines perform the following steps 1 Click on the Line icon in the toolbar A window similar to the following displays Line Settings Event Block PBX Line Action Group Group Name Default Time Control 8109 ee Le VRINNE enu 19 4 Menu 168 4 3 Time Control 8T05 4 4 Time Control 8T05 4 5 Default Time Control 8To5 6 Default Time Control 8To5 7 Default Time Control 8To5 8 Default Time Control 8To5 exe LEI Cancer ue Figure 5 54 Line Settings Window 2 Default PBX Name field Allows you to specify the PBX name to be used for any lines that do not have a PBX name explicitly defined In most configurations you can leave this value blank or set it to ANALOG 3 Highlight the line to configure in the Line field then click on Next The following window displays Line Edit 1 of 4 What to run on t
265. me type select the default 802 3 then click OK When prompted for the location of the NT Distribution Files type or browse to select the location Click on Continue then follow the on screen instructions When installation is complete the Network Settings window displays Click OK to add the adapter information to the Registry When prompted to restart select Don t Restart Now Install Adapter Windows 2000 1 2 3 4 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel Double click Add Remove Hardware Click Next Select Add Troubleshoot Device then click Next Install and Configure Operating System 2 19 so door pa 9 Select Add New Device then click Next Select No want to select the hardware from a list then click Next Select Network Adapters then click Next Select Microsoft in the left window pane select Microsoft Loopback Adapter in the right window pane then click Next Click Next 10 Click Finish Install Streams Environment Install Streams Windows NT To set up the streams environment when using Windows NT perform the following steps I Double click on the Network icon When prompted to install Networking click No Click on the Protocol tab Click Add In the window that displays click on the down arrow to the right of the Apple Talk Protocol entry for a list of choices Select Streams Environment then click Continue When prompted for location of NT
266. meantime the following guidelines will help you determine the proper hardware configuration We also recommend that you consult with your Vodavi sales representative and technical support staff They can provide valuable insight when determining resource requirements Hard Disk Storage Size Voice processing can require a large amount of disk space Many applications are disk intensive meaning they continually access information on the hard drive For this reason it is vital that you incorporate quality components in your system especially in the case of the disk drive 2 4 Perform a System Analysis The size of the drive depends on two factors the application and the number of users On average one hour of message storage can support about thirty users A general rule of thumb is that one hour of voice storage requires about 10 MB of disk space Storage Size Factors Factors affecting the amount of storage you need include the following O Number of extensions and mailboxes required O Number of messages received and accessed per day o Average message length o Message retention period You can also control disk use by encouraging users to delete messages as soon as they are reviewed Another factor to consider is the quality level of the voice prompts PathFinder s voice recording sampling rate should be set at 6 KHz Any other sampling rate will cause problems when playing the prompts At this rate PathFinder can f
267. menu then set key 8 up to go to custom module HITELEO SUB and for the parameter enter CSRMAINT When the caller presses 8 we play the prompt VOX TQGETCSR VOX You should record something like Enter your CSR extension number followed by pressing pound Once the CSR enters an extension we then play the prompt VOX TQGETSTA VOX You should record something like Enter your status 0 for available 2 for out to lunch 3 for personal time After PathFinder receives a single digit it changes the CSR s status and hangs up If at the TQGETCSR VOX prompt the caller enters a queue number followed by amp then we generate a report of all CSRs status in that queue The queue number entered before the must be valid After generating the report PathFinder will hang up The following is an example of the report 12 20 01 03 HIT Report Start Oueue 1234 CSR 7401 marked CSR 7402 marked CSR 7403 marked CSR 7404 marked 7405 marked 7406 marked TeleQueue C 101 Tq0000AlwCllir Default Action Stays in Queue This field controls what happens when we ask a caller in any position to press 1 to continue to hold or 0 for the operator Normally if the caller does nothing TeleQueue assumes the caller has hung up or does not want to stay in the queue This is what TeleQueue does when there is a0 on line 12 If a 1 is placed on line 12 then TeleQueue will allow the caller to stay in the queue even if no DTMF key is rec
268. module Time Control Loads a time control file and takes the menu action specified in the current time period Command File Runs the specified command file Refer to Appendix A for information on command files Company Sends the caller to the company directory in your choice of mailbox mode or extension mode Fax On Demand Provides a choice of entries including blank caller select document to be faxed a document number to be faxed to the caller or ADMIN allow caller to access Fax on Demand administrative functions The Fax On Demand option is available only if you have purchased the optional Fax On Demand module and have enabled it on your software key 8 Once you have selected the module and clicked on OK you are returned to the Edit Line Settings window Line 1 Event Group 6 Available Block Group PBX Name ANALOG 4 Figure 5 59 Edit Line Settings Window Line Settings 5 107 9 Address the remaining fields as needed according to the following guidelines O Event Group Select the group whose action is managed by this line Multiple lines can be assigned to an event group enabling any available line in that group to be used for the action Note that at least one channel must be assigned to any event group you specify for Auxiliary Tasks for Class of Service and for outgoing faxes Block Group Blockage detection determines when all lines assigned to a block group ar
269. ms Onelook Fax Form FI Onelook Voice Form Figure C 35 New Form Selection Window C 68 Onelook Unified Messaging A blank message window displays ff Onelook Voice Message Viewer Ml x File Edit View Compose Help x alse ole 2 From fi 256 esivmail Sent Friday August 22 1997 14 54 30 To Subject Figure C 36 Onelook Voice Message Viewer Window Fill in the From and Subject fields 5 Address the message lt mailbox gt lt server gt 1234 esimail com for example 6 Press the Record button ej to record a message with a microphone 7 Press the Send Message button and the message will be sent Onelook Unified Messaging C 69 Facsimile Messages In order to receive facsimile messages via Onelook you must have the facsimile option enabled within Onelook Once you launch a facsimile message by double clicking on it in Outlook or Exchange the following window displays By Unified Messaging Fax Onelook Fax Message Viewer File Edit View Compose Help From f 225 esihello Sent Thu 6 Mar 1997 09 33 34 To fi 225 Subject United Messaging Fax BAYER Un OON TROM DE lede kirange n ETA copes rgh sms Bear am EE Fit to Window fia Zoom In Zoom Out Full Screen Rotate i pp iih tet Masai ER ge Prev Page Figure C 37 Onelook Fax Message Viewer C 70 Onelook Unified Messaging The buttons in the top
270. n Alternately select from the menu bar Edit gt Users gt Show List User Settings 5 47 2 Highlight the subscriber to edit and click on Select The following window displays Edit User s Settings Mailbox 1232 Extension 232 First Name DAVID Help Last Name BECHOR Delete User Cancel e Delete User Password 888 ii Department cos coso2 xl Tutorial mi Figure 5 33 Edit User s Settings Window 3 Complete the fields for this subscriber as follows Extension The extension to associate with this mailbox This option allows you to change the extension associated with a mailbox without affecting the mailbox message signature or greeting First Name and Last Name Change as needed Information in these fields is used to create the company directory Password Enter the number to be entered by the mailbox subscriber to retrieve mailbox messages Initially it should be set to some easy to remember code like 1111 the subscriber can change the password later depending on their COS settings Department Enter the department or area in which the employee works this field is used to provide additional information in reports 5 48 User Settings Class of Service COS From the drop down list select the COS to associate with this mailbox Refer to Templates on page 5 57 for specific information on COS options If the Class of Service field
271. n monitor and maintain various PathFinder applications While PathFinder is easy to use and administer this manual will help you use PathFinder to its fullest potential Introduction C 1 Introduction PathFinder Hardware Components All PathFinder hardware components should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function Optional Software Modules The following features are available only as optional software modules sold separately used to enhance the functionality of PathFinder s foundation software Except for the Language Prompt Files each of these modules is discussed in more detail in a separate section in this Appendix O Chalk Talk Fax Support Internet Fax Delivery Onelook Onelook Point to Point Server Point to Point 00000 0 TeleQueue Language Prompt Files allow languages other than English to be defined and used on PathFinder When you purchase an alternate language module all PathFinder prompts have been recorded in that language One additional language is provided with each option To activate optional language prompts simply activate your software key No additional installation or configuration is required C 2 Chalk Talk Chalk Talk The PathFinder Chalk Talk module is an automated information system to assist schools w
272. n CD by selecting the Point to Point component If you did not install Point to Point along with PathFinder it may be necessary to run the PathFinder installation program and select Point to Point Configuration To configure the Point to Point voice mail system follow these steps 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt Hello Voice Processing gt MAINT 2 From the menu bar select Configuration gt Point to Point Settings Point to Point Settings IX Enable Point to Point Messaging Area Code Length e r Remote Locations 7 Cancel 132 Netherlands z 602 Vodavi Edit Help 770 Enhanced Systems r Advanced System Control Parameters Mailer Address and Port ocalmachine 10725 Event group 6 Available M Retry Delay 16 minutes Figure C 44 Point to Point Settings Window Point To Point Messaging C 87 3 Configure this window as follows Enable Point to Point Messaging Check to enable outbound Point to Point messaging Even when not enabled the system can still receive inbound messages The Onelook Point to Point Server needs to be running in order for any messaging to occur Area Code Length Enter the length in digits that area codes will be on this system A typical value is three If you only have nine sites you can use a one digit area code Maximum area code length is seven Remote Locations This list box contains the rem
273. n help you find this information Ping and Telnet Ping Go to a DOS prompt and type ping lt servername gt for example ping esivmail o If Ping returns the message Bad IP address then the server is not known You can get the correct Onelook server name from your network administrator n Ifthe response from Ping is Request timed out then the network or server may be down Telnet The second utility will help you if the first one was completed successfully At the DOS prompt type telnet exe lt servername gt 10710 Watch for the following line within a few seconds OK UMP POP3 VPOP Server ready Version 24 UMP 0 10 If this line does not display then you may have a problem with the Onelook Point to Point Server The most likely reason for this is that the Onelook Point to Point Server is down Talk to your system administrator for further assistance Why don t I receive any Onelook messages in Outlook The server is down See the How can find out if the server name is correct question above Onelook Point to Point Server C 73 My messages are not synchronized The server is down See the How can find out if the server name is correct question above Outlook or Exchange Locks Up In other words when you open Outlook or Exchange and then click on the Tools menu item Outlook or Exchange locks up for a few seconds This is normal Outlook or Exchange launches all message services when
274. n individual user subscriber from PathFinder This might be necessary for people who have left the company or who have been transferred to another location To delete a mailbox perform the following steps 1 Select from the menu bar Edit gt Users gt Delete User 2 Enter the mailbox number or extension number that you would like to delete 3 Click Delete User 4 Confirm the deletion Alternatively you can delete a user by performing the following steps 1 Click on the Users icon in the toolbar the leftmost icon to display the Select User to Edit window 2 Scroll through the list to highlight the subscriber to delete 3 Click on Select When the subscriber s settings display click on Delete User 5 56 Class of Service Settings Deleting a Range of Mailboxes Delete Range is used to delete multiple mailboxes from PathFinder Use this function to delete a large contiguous block of mailboxes All settings and parameters are deleted as are the individual mailbox numbers To delete a range of mailboxes 1 Click on the Users icon in the toolbar the leftmost icon to display the Select User to Edit window 2 Click on Delete Range 3 Select the Start and End Mailbox or Extension depending on the delete criteria from the appropriate pull down menus 4 Click on Delete User Class of Service Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the Class of Service func
275. ncel to exit these questions Don t run wizard at startup Cancel Help Figure 4 3 First Time Questions Window 4 Click on Next to proceed to the second First Time Questions window Ifyou do not need to answer First Time Questions anymore select the Don t run wizard at startup checkbox Configuration Preparation In the Voice Lines field of the next First Time Questions window indicate the number of voice lines on your system First Time Questions r Voice Lines In order to properly setup your system MAINT needs to know the number of voice lines installed in the system This number is usually divisible by 4 Each D 4x card is 4 channels Each D 12x card is 12 channels The key shows you have 16 licensed channels Cancel did Voice Lines r Default Digit Lengths In the boxes to the right enter the default lengths for your mailbox extension and Mailbox Length e password mumbo oe a tpg adel iz usually determined by your ilbox 4 length is commonly the same as the extension Extension Length b length Password length is usually 4 You may change these values at any time by selecting Password Length Configuration Module Settings Digit Lengths Figure 4 4 First Time Questions Window In the default digit lengths pane of the First Time Questions window indicate the required parameters in the Mailbox Length Extension Length and Password Length f
276. nd file Related Commands DialMailboxBeeperFile if new voice messages exist DeleteAllNewMessages Deletes all new for the global mailbox messages WaitForEvent Waits the specified An event is defined as an incoming call hangup lt Seconds gt number of seconds for interline message etc an event Command Files A 9 Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String WaitResultX lt Command gt Action Uses WaitResultX to break out the message Description Waits for the result of the event in the WaitForEvent and execute the lt Command gt based on the result The WaitResultX has a similar function to CallResult Related Commands WaitForEvent NewMessagesXXX XXX lt Command gt Executes the command based on the new message count Indicates different commands to be executed based on the number of new messages DialNewMsgCount DialSavedMsgCount DialNewOnlyMsgCount DailUrgentMsgCount GlbMailbox lt mailbox number gt Dials the DTMF digits Changes the global mailbox to a new mailbox representing the New or Saved voice message counts for the global mailbox Normally when command files are used to do mailbox notification or in paging systems GlbMailbox is set to the mailbox number doing the notify This command could be used to change the global mailbox This is common for cascaded pagers
277. nd much faster The format in the registry for extension entries is as follows Name Value Tq0000 01 1111 Tq0000 02 1112 So that in the above example Queue 0000 has two extensions associated with it TeleQueue C 103 If you are using CSR Control features then you must add a line for each of the extensions to hold the status of the CSR The format of the CSR entries for the above example follow Name Value TqCSR 1111 0 TqCSR 1112 0 The value of the CSR entry will change when the CSR checks in or out Setup Items The following items are involved in the setup of TeleQueue Attaching TeleQueue You can link TeleQueue to the rest of PathFinder through a menu or by directly associating a queue to a line To link TeleQueue to a menu go into MAINT and select Modules gt Menu gt Edit Menu and pick the menu that you answer the phone with Then select the key that you will want to take the caller to TeleQueue select for its action Run Module and enter H ITELEQ 0000 where 0000 is the queue number For CSR MAINT the entry would be HITELEQ CSRMAINT To send all calls coming in on a particular line to a queue select Setup Lines from the MAINT main screen select the line you want to send to the queue select Run Modules as the action for that line and follow the preceding instructions to run the TeleQueue module with your queue Because of PathFinder s very powerful Time Control f
278. nder Monitor Application iss see sees sense sek Gee ee RR ee Gee ee Re 7 13 Startup amp OrientatiON ie ea GE Ee EG 7 13 Configure Host Information uses sesse sen seks eke ee Re oek Gee eek ee 7 14 Monitor Display WindOWS uses seeks Gee Roe GRA Roe ee RR ek Gee Re 7 15 Back Ups Logs Errors and Troubleshooting Backing Up PathFinder ies ee ee Ge ee ie eN 8 1 Log Files amp Error Messages mi esse eie RR dee ees ese ee 8 2 Systemi Error LOG EE EE ENE EE N 8 2 System Maintenance Log esse sesse sesse ser sen oe oe Bee Boe Bee Bee Roe eR ER ER ER DEEG 8 3 System Activity LOG ok ee oe ee De N i 8 4 Menu LOOS as ER N EE ual a SAREE iae 8 9 PCE Ed Eog EE tusnsceni iesssannannlooccsanvncesanatonaqaesnudatannsodennesoens 8 9 Auto Attendant LOS ER EE kes Ge RE Re GRE 8 9 TOU IES HO DUNG ss SG Ge ee 8 11 aal el N EE ags Eai EaR siii 8 11 QUESTIONS Se ANSWEFS iese ss ER eke Geek OE eek EE EE 8 12 Command Files amp Notification Scripts Command FILES ss EG Gea tts A 1 Guidelines oe A E E ie ee A 1 Command Descriptions ES EE GE GE Ge A 2 Quick COMMANA S sies ige Ee ede eek Oe eg GE A 10 Quick Command Descriptions uses see see ee eke Ge ee ee Re Reeks A 10 BE jie AO EE N ER N A 11 Combining CommandsS EO EE A 11 Technical NOTES SG EG GO Ge GN Ge muna A 11 Pre Defined Command Files ecesssesssssessscsssssscssessecsessnccssesscsscssecseesneescsnees A 12 Sample Pager Files iese see ees Are eken EE ese ee ee A 12 Modifying Command Files os s
279. ne OPX box per VM port can be used Each OPX box decreases DKT ports by one o One DTMF receiver module must be installed on the 2 x 4 SLT card This provides one DTMF receiver OPX boxes contain their own DTMF receiver internally One ring generator unit is needed when using the 2 x 4 SLT card A 48 volt power supply is needed if using the OPX box to connect to PathFinder Each OPX box draws 500 ma of current Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS SPD 612 include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting on off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 11 Table 3 4 Starplus SPD 612 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0i
280. nelook Point to Point Server C 81 SMTP Out Click on the SMTP Out tab to see the following window Connection Status Build 37 ME x SMTP Dut Status Queue 0 Port 10725 Enabled Vv SENT B1 18 98 14 14 1 MmMwies4 AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent m m rmMwi2s4 i gt QUIT Response lt 256 Command Accepted SENT 61710798 14 15 1 MmMw1254 AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent MmMwi22es 1 gt QUIT Response lt 256 Command Pooggied SENT 61 11 98 69 26 1 MmMw1223 AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent rm e e iawii 1 gt QUIT Response lt 256 Command focspted SENT 61 11 98 69 21 1 MmMwi2es AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent MmMwi22es 1 gt UIT Response lt 250 Command Pooggied SENT 61 11 98 69 21 1 MmMw1223 AddHNTEvent 23 lt Addevent m MmMwi22a 1m v Fo 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 a 6 DOODO RA RA ER A ER ER ER ER pa RR BR MR N NON NON ON NON ON ON ON ON N OR N ee EET EET HEER ER ER ER BR BR PR HR Pe be LL EO HE WOUOWOOOOOD OOD fa fa Fa 4 S 5 S Hz Hz As 1 1 1 1 1 1 ics rd QUIT Response lt 256 Command Accepted A Figure C 41 Connection Status SMTP Out Window The SMTP Out tab of the Connection Status window allows you to view all outgoing SMTP activity including outgoing mail messages and login attempts The SMTP Out service is used to deliver messages that Onelook Point to Point Server has received to mail to a
281. nfigure and control PathFinder The following menu options are available in MAINT o File O Configuration o Edit O Reports O Help This chapter gives an overview of the entire configuration procedure describes how to prepare PathFinder for configuration introduces MAINT and provides a summary of this configuration program s features and options A detail description of the menu options mentioned above are also provided in this chapter Module Settings 5 1 Module Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the module settings functions available in the Configuration menu in MAINT The Configuration menu provides access to module settings configuration a group of functions used to control how PathFinder modules interact with the user To access the module configuration options select Module Settings from the Configuration menu The following buttons display near the top of the window Digit Lengths Record Playback Logging Figure 5 1 Module Settings Toolbar Click on any of the buttons on this Module Settings toolbar to access the corresponding configuration options Digit Lengths The Digit Lengths settings determine the number of digits used in mailboxes extensions and passwords PathFinder uses this information to determine how many digits to expect when asking a caller for a mailbox extension number or password Module Settings Digit Lengths Def
282. ng General Settings Figure C 20 Internet Fax Delivery Administration amp Reporting Window C 48 Internet Fax Delivery Settings Guidelines oO jul jul Both the Fax Delivery Server settings and the Voice System Server settings should use the same local machine name Fax Delivery should use IP Port 24 while Voice System will use IP Port 23 Logging settings control how much information is logged and if it is logged to a file Transport settings control frequency and retry interval The defaults are usually the correct setting Reports The first item is Reports Double clicking on Reports results in the tree expanding to show two more items IFD is shipped with two reports Usage and Settings These reports provide basic information about IFD Subscribers The second main item is Subscribers Before users can call in and leave facsimile messages you must add the subscribers as follows 1 2 Double click on Subscribers to expand the tree Click on Add Subscribers to add a new subscriber The following window will display Subscriber Add Ea Number ME Name Scott Kelly ET COS BASIC Send Receipt to 770 555 1234 Figure C 21 Subscriber Add Window Internet Fax Delivery C 49 3 Enter the information about the new user Number This field indicates the subscriber number that will be entered by the originating caller Name Th
283. ng From Previous Version 2 40 UPS 2 5 Urgent 5 67 5 71 Urgent notification 5 51 Usage 6 10 C 54 Use of Hunt Group C 103 Use Perfect Call 5 31 User Type 5 60 User Edited Features 5 55 Users 5 40 Users Settings 4 6 5 40 Using a Traditional Fax Machine C 40 Using Fax Software C 41 Using Point to Point Messaging C 89 V VDX 7 1 VFX 40ESCplus 2 5 VFX4OESC plus 2 33 Voice 5 64 voice attachments C 37 Voice Bridge 3 1 3 5 Voice Cards 2 2 voice channel jack 2 11 Voice Description of a fax document C 42 voice I O channels 2 7 Voice Insert 5 62 Voice Lines 4 6 5 21 Voice Mail 4 6 5 7 5 11 Operator 5 10 Owner 5 7 Time Periods 5 19 Voice Menu Button 4 8 Voice Messages C 62 Index Voice Network Attachment 2 12 Voice Notify Options 5 75 Voice Port Menu Boom Box 7 3 voice ports 7 1 voice processing boards 2 25 voice prompt file 7 1 voice prompts 1 1 voice recording sampling rate 2 4 W Wait For Transfer C 106 WAV device 7 1 WAV based Troubleshooting 7 9 What To Debug 5 8 What To Log 5 6 When Notify Fails 5 76 Why am I not receiving any Onelook messages in Outlook C 72 wildcards C 51 Windows NT Hardware Compatibility List HCL 2 1 Work Hours 5 19 Index
284. ning on call queueing causes PathFinder to hold the calls in a queue until they are answered Queued calls are answered in the order received Refer to Auto Attendant on page 5 4 for more information on Call Queue Intervals and the like Call Holding must be enabled in the subscriber s Extension settings for Call Queueing to function properly Refer to Extension Settings on page 5 51 for more information Screen Length This option determines the amount of time by which a caller must respond with a name when prompted to do so through Call Screening The time is measured in seconds with a maximum value of 999 seconds Class of Service Settings 5 81 Play Call Source Activating this option means that if a message is left in a mailbox to which an extension was forwarded the originally dialed extension is identified at the start of the message with a prompt e g Message from John Smith if the call was originally intended for John Smith s extension which was forwarded to the extension from which the message is retrieved Transfer Strings Default transfer strings are typically configured in the telephony settings Refer to Transfer Settings on page 5 30 for more information Any setting configured here overrides the default configuration Configure the transfer prefix and postfix for any subscriber using this class of service Creating a COS A class of service provides an easy way to modify an entire gr
285. nnections 0 Port 10725 Enabled V Status SMTP Out Queue 0 Port 10725 Enabled Vv Status Connections Te pmo mar 0 Port 10710 Figure C 39 Main Mailer Window These services should normally all be started Onelook Point to Point Server C 79 Guidelines O Click on the Enable Disable check boxes to enable or disable service s O The Red Green indicators for Messages or Logs indicate whether disk space is available Other informational fields indicate the current status of each service To watch the operation of an individual service SMTP In SMTP Out POP select File gt Status from the menu bar to bring up the Connection Status window Refer to Connection Status on page C 79 for more information Connection Status The Connection Status window has tabs in which you can select the service you want to look at SMTP In SMTP Out POP or all service operations interleaved together chronologically Master These log windows combined or separate can be used to monitor or troubleshoot the operation of Onelook Point to Point Server C 80 Onelook Point to Point Server SMTP In Click on the SMTP In tab to see the following window Connection Status Build 37 Figure C 40 Connection Status SMTP In Window The SMTP In tab of the Connection Status window allows you to view all incoming SMTP activity including incoming mail messages O
286. nother system The SMTP Out queue is where message delivery requests are queued up until successfully delivered The purpose of this display is to allow an operator to observe if messages are arriving and being delivered effectively or if they are backing up because of delivery problems To access the SMTPOut Queue window go back to the main menu and select SMTP Out gt Queue from the menu bar C 82 Onelook Point to Point Server POP Click on the POP tab to see the following window w Connection Status Build 37 e x SMTP In SMTP Out POP Master POP Status Connections Port 10710 Enabled Vv OOOOOOOOOOOOOM ee Ee Ee Ee Ee e e He Ee He Ee lte o Ea Tin Ts NN NN NN NN N HEER EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE PPPN A User 1243 Done ER 1255 User 1255 PASS 5519 User 1255 STAT User 1255 User 1255 Done User USER 1283 Figure C 42 Connection Status Pop Window The POP tab of the Connection Status window allows you to monitor activity on incoming and outgoing messages from the Onelook client systems Onelook Point to Point Server supports PathFinder s Onelook unified messaging optional module The POP service handles Onelook client requests for current message status inside PathFinder and delivers the body of messages to the Onelook client programs for use on the client systems Onelook Point to Point Server controls the number of users that are authorized to use Onelook
287. ns that still have messages waiting O If your phone system does not periodically clear message waiting indicators but instead leaves message waiting indicators illuminated until users subscribers retrieve their messages then leave this field blank 5 12 Module Settings Field Description QuickJump Specify the touch tone key a caller can press to bypass leaving a Key message once a mailbox greeting has begun When a caller presses the defined key PathFinder jumps to a menu of alternate options e g Press 1 to try another mailbox Pager Mailbox Delay Specify the amount of time PathFinder delays when dialing a pager number for notification This value defines the delay after dialing the pager number and before dialing the mailbox number If using a command file for notification this value is not used O Refer to Appendix A for more information on command files O Refer to Notification Settings on page 5 73 for more information on pager notification Password Attempts Enter the number of times a caller is allowed to try entering a password to gain mailbox access After this number is exhausted the caller is prompted to enter a different mailbox number The range for this field is 1to9 PathFinder keeps track of such attempts in its logs which can help determine if an unauthorized user is attempting to gain access to PathFinder Notification On some integrated systems Path
288. nsfer On most phone systems this feature is accomplished through a flash hook and pause If this is the case enter amp the comma provides the pause in this field PathFinder will automatically dial the extension number after dialing the prefix Telephony Settings 5 31 Postfix Enter the flash hook and or tone dialing sequence needed to end a call transfer usually this entry is not required Connect Enter anything required to connect a transferred call Most phone systems do not require anything for this feature Recall Caller On Fields These settings are only used in Supervised Transfers A typical transfer prefix is amp If you are not using Supervised Transfers leave these settings as they are Complete the Recall Caller On fields as follows Busy Enter the value needed to abort a transfer to a busy number and reconnect the caller to PathFinder The typical value for this field is amp which is a flash hook Sometimes a tone dialing sequence is needed in addition for example amp 1 No Answer Enter the value needed to abort a transfer to an unanswered number and reconnect the called party On most phone systems this value is the same as for Recall a Caller on Busy Reject This feature allows PathFinder to retrieve a call if the extension to which the call was transferred rejects it This feature is used during Auto Attendant call screening It can be viewed as Abort a Connected Transfer Typ
289. nt number being assigned to this facsimile o The final 1 tells PathFinder to start accepting the facsimile transmission As an example suppose PathFinder is at extension 400 your facsimile ADMIN access key is 8 and your facsimile ADMIN password is 9999 You need to add to the facsimile database a new facsimile document and assign to it document number 1200 A typical dialing string might look like this 400 8 9999 1 1200 1 A dialing prefix could be added to the front of the string if needed You might find it handy to save this string as a number in your facsimile program s phone book When you are ready to create a new facsimile document simply edit the document number portion of the string to give each facsimile document a unique number Adding a Voice Description to a Facsimile Document Once you have entered the document in the facsimile database you can go back and add a brief description of the document To add a description to a document in the facsimile database 1 Make sure that PathFinder is online 2 Call into PathFinder and access the facsimile menu 3 Press the key designated as the facsimile ADMIN option Fax Support C 43 als 4 Press and enter the ADMIN password PathFinder plays the following menu Press one to create a new document press two to delete a document press three to change a document s description press nine when finished 5 Press 3 to change add a description Ent
290. ntered dialvox call lt amp 6 260 gt result 8 8 1 0 drvrst Idle H AUTOA Debug Transfer Call Result 8 H AUTOA Debug Connect 8 No Answer H AUTOA Debug HangUp 0 H AUTOA Debug HangUp Type H0 H AUTOA Debug Processing Call Result 8 H AUTOA Debug Telephony Type H AUTOA Debug gFncResult 8 Log AutoA 260 Call 260 NoAnswer Ca Log AutoA 260 To mailbox 1260 H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt Vm1260 gt 487 Log VMail 1260 Take message 22 394 dialvox DialVox record HELLONT MESSAGES 0 6 V1260 L01 8302 180 s 300 m 0 result 0 oh 5 sh 5 08 22 604 Log VMail 1260 Voice 00 01 41 K 08 22 044 H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt Aa gt 08 22 655 Log AutoA 999 does not exist 08 22 186 Log Stop Call 08 19 54 H7 08 22 644 H KERNEL Debug wait 0 1 08 22 18 644 Log Start Call 08 22 654 Debug Event Queue 3 lt 0 1 gt 08 22 664 H KERNEL Debug get event 10 06 998 08 18 MmNmVT1260 NJ9 0 08 22 674 6 H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt MmNmVT1260 NJ9 gt 08 22 704 6 Log MsgMan Nm VT1260 NJ9 08 22 744 6 H DBASE Debug Mbx 1260 Set Online lt Ft No00 1 gt 08 22 764 6 Log Stop Call 08 22 18 985 796 796 876 853 347 347 357 357 367 367 Ad sa TT 201 211 211 HEBHHHBHBHHHBHHHHHBHHHBHBHRHE OOOOAOHHHH C C C C Cc C C C E E C C C C C C C Cc C C C E D C C C C C C C C 1 C C C C Figure 8 4 Supervised Transfer Log w debugging 8 8 System Ac
291. nu You may also choose to leave the Template field blank 4 Click on Create Menu to return to the Select Menu to Edit window highlight the new menu name and click on Select to move to the Edit Menu window Menu Settings 5 87 Deleting a Menu To delete an old or unneeded menu 1 In the Select Menu to Edit window highlight the menu to remove 2 Click on Delete then click on OK when the confirmation prompt is displayed Prompts that are associated with the deleted menu remain on PathFinder so that other menus can use them Eventually PathFinder clean up procedures delete unused prompts Editing a Menu The Edit Menu function is used to edit both new and existing menus To edit a menu perform the following steps 1 In the Select Menu to Edit window highlight the desired menu then click on Select The following window is displayed Edit Menu 101 General Name 101 Password B i Cancel Description Time Out 5 secs Help Time Control NONE Retries Em Delete r Voice Prompts Introduction Loo e EE Body EE Instructions 101 VOX Eed r Actions Key Play Instructions 4Key Company Directory Aa Key Mailbox 5 Key Company Directory Ym 0 Key Operator 6 Key Invalid Option 1 Key Extension START 7 Key Mailbox 2 Key Extension START 8 Key Record Prompts 3 Key Extension START 9 Key Hang Up Max Retries Operator Time Out Operator
292. nuous tone or silence to tell the voice processing system the call should be disconnected The tone or silence disconnects are not as reliable as Loop Current disconnects and may cause a line to remain connected longer than necessary or result in false hang ups and callers being disconnected Re Order Tone Still other telephone systems send Re Order tone to the voice processing system for disconnect Re Order Tone disconnect is a reliable method for disconnect but require some configuration in the PathFinder voice processing system General Tone Detection Some telephone systems send a tone that is not continuous and is not a Re Order Tone In this instance you would use General Tone Hang ups This General Tone can be learned via PBXpert and will generate disconnects as reliably as Re Order disconnect Telephony Settings 5 25 Determining Tone Type To determine what type of disconnect your telephone system provides pleaseconsultyourtelephonesystemmanual lfthemanualdoesnotprovide this information follow the steps below to determine your hang up type 1 Have someone call an extension 2 Answer the extension 3 Have the caller hang up 4 Listen to the system If you hear Then your telephone system silence provides Silence Hang Ups a continuous tone provides Tone Hang Ups re order tone may provide Loop Current supervision or Re Order Tone detection Refer to your telephone system documenta
293. nus All menu selections Voice Mail Owner Mailbox owner activities Directory Track Messages Message Manager Accesses of the company directory Complete logging of message file names and when messages are deleted created saved etc Used to track complaints of lost messages etc Turns on logging of message manager activities Notification PathFinder notification actions Time Controls Fax Support Actions controlled by time control files All fax support activities Integration Tracks information received from the phone system Default The Default button activates the Log Option settings indicated with an asterisk 5 8 Module Settings What To Debug The Logging settings also include debugging options Module debugging is a sophisticated diagnostic tool used to resolve problems with PathFinder DO NOT run PathFinder with Module Debugging on as it can slow performance Use debugging only as needed Once debugging has been activated it generates large amounts of data that can potentially fill up the disk drive Select specific module debugging options only at the request of Vodavi Technical Support Module debugging parameters include the following Field Description Basic Foundation Tracks basic information from the system including which modules are loaded into memory Voice Mail Tracks all voice mail activities including lengt
294. oOkK AR EE N nunni C 61 TROUDIESROOLING ss Re i C 72 Onelook Point to Point Server ou sesssessssecseecssceseessscsscecseesecsecessecseeeseesseess C 73 Requirements OE OE OE EE EN C 74 installation ER EG GE GE C 75 Setup amp Configuration sees is sies ese Gee ee eed ke C 75 SAO ee ER tera ue iaean aids C 78 viii Contents TROUDIESAOOUING ss RS ie ee se ee ee C 83 Point To Point Messaging sms eken ss REKE nd ee ede C 84 Features se ee Ge ane ear one EG C 85 Requirements es Ee Ge Ee bee eo Ge Ge Ge Ee ee C 85 DWV Gea cess EE N NE N OR ET EA EE C 86 Biel gh ie 0 ele AE EE EE aee TENANE C 86 Using Point to Point Messaging sesse see see see sek Ge ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eg C 89 Troubleshootind ses ee ei Se el Se Ge ee C 90 jy eli ORE Ee N C 95 Requirements sissa EE EE C 95 Getting Started us ES EG EE ected ec ee C 96 TeleQueue Registry seeks tee ie edele eed Ng C 96 Setup EMS ioe darters nieces ee ee io oe ee ee C 103 Prompt Names and Description see sense ee oek Gee ee ee ee RR C 105 Troubleshooting Testing uses ses see seke eek ee Ge Gee ee ee RAAR C 107 Figures Figures Model Dialog 4 ee Ee Re 2 8 Run VEER Ge GR EE EG Ra A NREN 2 22 PathFinder Start Mer ee Ere RGN EG GE GN ee 2 52 Program Group for PathFinder see de ee kg SG Ge 4 2 Loading Key Tee AE ER OE EE EE Ee 4 3 First Time QUESTIONS WinAOW uses en se sek Gee ee ee Re ee RR ARE Gee ee ee RR eek ee 4 3 First Time Questions WindOW is Re ee ee N Ge e
295. oblems include incorrect Time Control and Menu settings Compare your Time Control and Menu settings with the default Time Control and Menu settings described in this manual Use the defaults described in this manual as a template for configuring your Time Control and Menu settings Q Call transfers are not working correctly A Follow the steps below to troubleshoot call transfers 1 Verify the transfer is works properly with either a single line telephone or test set then attempt the transfer If the transfer does not work properly with the single line telephone verify the telephone system settings then retest If this does not work the problem is within the telephone system 2 Check to make sure that you have the correct prefix settings to perform a transfer Select from the menu bar Configuration gt Telephony Settings gt Transfer Settings Make sure the Transfer Prefix and Transfer Postfix are set correctly Consult your telephone system documentation for the correct settings 3 Check the flash hook length setting is correct To check this setting select from the menu bar Configuration gt Telephony Settings gt Transfer Settings The setting should match what is configured in your telephone system Q Caller hears DTMF during an attempted transfer A The flash hook setting is probably too short To check this setting select Configuration Telephony Settings Transfer Settings The setting should match what is configured
296. odekey manager must unlock features in order for you to use them Contact your dealer for further information Install PathFinder Software Install Pathfinder Software Windows 2000 1 10 11 12 18 19 20 21 Make sure the software key is installed Refer to Software Security Key on page 2 13 for more information Insert the PathFinder CD into your CD ROM drive From the Start menu select Run In the Open field type lt Your CD ROM Drive Letter gt setup exe and click OK Example CD ROM drive letter E type E setup exe In the Welcome window click Next If dialogic drivers were installed in a previous installation attempt skip to Step 10 Windows 2000 will inform you that Dialogic drivers have not been installed Click Next to install the drivers The installation will continue automatically Select Yes want to restart my computer now Click Finish After computer restarts begin at step 1 again Select Skip Dialogic driver install then click Next Click Yes Click Next to check Sentinel Driver installation 13 14 15 16 17 Click Next do not select First Run codekey manager Select each item to install recommend selection of all components Click Next to select the default destination folder Click Next to select the default program folder for PathFinder Click Next to acknowledge that you have enough information to continue For startup folders click
297. of the extension you are trying to access For example if the 2 Key is set to Start Key then when the caller presses 2 they will not hear a prompt and the system will wait for more digits If you assign 2 as the extension Start Key then you must have extension numbers that start with the digit 2 Menu Settings 5 91 Table 5 1 Key Action Definitions Key Action Definition Specific The caller is transferred directly to the extension indicated For example if Extension the 3 Key is set to send to Specific Extension Number 123 then when Number callers press 3 they are transferred directly to extension 123 Menu Executes the selected menu Owner Access Gives access to mailbox owner menus This is used with in band integration or to provide access through a hidden key on a menu Run Module Runs other modules that PathFinder supports Time Control Command File Enter the time control to run This option takes actions based on time date and day of the week settings Refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 for more information on time controls Runs the command file script Refer to Appendix A for additional information on command files Company Directory Provides a company directory listing for either mailboxes or extensions Fax On Demand Refer to the Fax related sections of the Optional Modules manual for more information on this option Fax modules are optiona
298. of voice storage storage storage Motherboard Typically one ISA expansion slot per 4 voice or fax ports consult your sales representative Drive CD ROM Display VGA or higher resolution display adapter Voice Cards Refer to Telephony Hardware Compatibility on page 2 5 Peripheral O Microsoft Mouse or compatible pointing device Miscellaneous O0 Keyboard Software O Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Server Windows NT 4 0 Workstation or Windows NT 4 0 Server O Windows NT Service Pack 5 Refer to Appendix C Optional Modules for information on additional system requirements if any for any Optional Modules you have purchased Perform a System Analysis 2 3 Optional PC Equipment The following optional equipment is not required for the proper functioning of PathFinder but it may be useful Table 2 2 Optional PC Equipment Network Interface Card Must be listed on the Windows HCL Remote Diagnostics O PC Anywhere 32 bit O Modem on the Windows HCL 33 6 bps or faster Backup Tape Drive on Windows HCL Backup Power Supply An un interruptible power supply from the Windows HCL Surge Protector A device to protect against electrical spikes Determining System Size The size of PathFinder can be measured in two ways o Amount of disk storage O Number of ports Once PathFinder is up and running it generates a number of reports that allow you to accurately monitor use In the
299. og on to Windows NT each time the system reboots do the following From the Start menu select Run In the Open field type Regedt 32 then click OK Select HKey_Local_Machine Double click Software Double click Microsoft Double click Windows NT Double click Current Version Double click Winlogon ME Install and Configure Operating System 2 17 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 Double click DefaultUserName Type in the username you created in Log On Windows NT on page 2 15 then press Enter when you finish typing Click Edit Choose Add Value In the Value Name field type Default Password then press Enter when you finish typing In the String field type the password for the user name you created in Log On Windows NT on page 2 15 then press Enter when you finish typing Click Edit Add Value In the Value Name field type Aut oAdminLogon then press Enter when you finish typing In the String field type 1 then press Enter when you finish typing Click the Close button in the upper right corner to close the window Auto Log On Windows 2000 To allow the system to automatically log on to Windows 2000 each time the system reboots do the following l 2 3 9 From the Start menu select Run In the Open field type Regedt 32 then click OK Select HKey_Local_Machine Software Microsoft Windows NT Current Version Winlogon DefaultUserName Type in the username P
300. oice Mail Voice Mail settings are used to configure the voice mail module Module Settings Voice Mail r Message Clean Up Time Day of Week X Monday X Thursday X Saturday EE X Tuesday X Friday X Sunday X Wednesday Next r MWI Refresh r Quick Jump Key Previous Time __ DTMF Key Help r Pager Mailbox Delay Password Attempts Delay seconds Attempts r Notification Notify Send Keys OoOO O Figure 5 7 Module Settings Voice Mail Window Field Description Message Specify when PathFinder is to delete messages that have exceeded the Clean Up retention period Refer to Message Retention on page 5 65 PathFinder performs this housekeeping function at the time specified in this window for each day of the week selected Message cleanup can be set for a specific day of the week or for every day and should occur when the phone system is inactive such as between midnight and 3 00 a m MWI Refresh Some phone systems clear all message waiting indicators at a specific time each day The MWI Refresh setting should be set for a time after such a phone setting has cleared all message waiting indicator lights O Ifyou have a phone system that clears all message waiting indicators at a specific time each day then in the Time field in the MWI refresh pane enter the time of day when PathFinder should re light any message waiting indicator lights for extensio
301. ollowing are hardware requirements for the infinite DVX PLUS IV in band integration O One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides twelve ports o One DTMF A installed on the SLIB DTMF A provides four DTMF receivers O One RGU ring generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX PLUS IV include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 43 Table 3 20 infinite DVXPlus IV Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s
302. on PathFinder is to use when a message has been left in the mailbox Notification options include the following o No notification Disables message notification completely o Immediate notification Sends notification immediately upon receiving messages O Timed notification Sets a time to notify mailbox owner of new messages o Urgent notification Instructs PathFinder to send notification but only when new messages are marked Urgent o Phone number Enter the phone number to dial for notification Do not type dialing prefixes for long distance numbers outside line access and the like e g 9 and or 1 Ifyou have an integrated system do not set notification to call an internal extension because the notification message could end up being left in the extension owner s mailbox This would cause PathFinder to send another notification message creating a loop O Pager notification When choosing any method of notification you see a Pager Notification checkbox Select this checkbox if the notification number you have indicated is a pager Extension Settings Extension Settings allow you to edit the actions for a mailbox number as well as change transfer options To edit Extension Settings click on 5 52 User Settings Extension Settings from the Edit User s Settings window refer to General User Settings on page 5 46 The following window displays Name KELLY JONES Time Control Extension 2343 H Ma
303. on Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial gt and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 press HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed
304. one systems use 0 as the first digit for extensions Make sure that this option is selected unless you have such a phone system O If None is indicated in the Voice Mail Operator field PathFinder uses the General Operator setting for any 0 dialed NOTE Most phone systems do not allow extension numbers to start with 0 Typically the digit 0 should only be used for operator assistance The Auto Attendant Operator determines what actions are taken when a caller presses 0 while in the auto attendant module If an operator is designated a time out or 0 keypad entry transfers the caller to the designated operator The operator then provides caller assistance O If None is indicated in the Voice Mail Operator field PathFinder uses the General Operator setting for any 0 dialed O As with the Voice Mail Operator the 0 as First Digit is Operator parameter is allowed here because some phone systems use 0 as the first digit for extensions Make sure that this option is selected unless you have such a phone system Personal Mailbox Operator The Personal Mailbox Operator functions are defined in the Mailbox Settings options for each user subscriber To configure Personal Mailbox Operator options O Select from the MAINT menu bar Edit gt Users gt Edit Users O Click on Mailbox Settings then edit the Operator field Refer to Mailbox Settings on page 5 49 for more information Module Settings 5 11 V
305. onth and date of the message as well as the time it was received Oldest Message First If this option is selected messages are played in chronological order starting with the oldest message in the mailbox If this is left off the newest message in the mailbox is played first when a subscriber checks the mailbox with remaining messages played in the reverse of order received Subscribers typically prefer that this option be left off 5 70 Class of Service Settings Owner Play Options Mailbox owners can be given several options for processing played messages making mailbox management as simple or as sophisticated as desired Detailed instructions on using these options are included in the PathFinder User s Manual and on the Quick Reference Card The following options are available Field Save Msgs Description Allows subscribers to save messages for later retrieval Confirm Deletes Requires subscribers to press the key after pressing 3 to delete a message as a safeguard against accidental deletion Forward Msgs Allows subscribers to forward messages to other mailboxes or to an outside number Reply To Msgs Dial Source Allows subscribers to press 5 while listening to a message and reply to the message Allows the subscriber to connect to the person responsible for sending the message This can also include outside numbers if the originating phone number is known
306. ook Point to Point Server O OO n ao n 8 ag LogEnabled TrueWhether POP logging is enabled in general master log switch LogCommands FalseWhether POP commands are logged LogSocket FalseWhether POP socket operations are logged LogUserLogin TrueWhether POP user logins are logged LogUpdt TrueWhether POP updt commands are logged LogDele TrueWhether POP dele commands are logged LogRetr TrueWhether POP retr commands are logged LogUIDL FalseWhether POP uidl commands are logged LogTop FalseWhether POP top commands are logged Logs Oo MaxLogAgeDays 45Max age days before old log files are purged at midnight SMTPIn Oo Port 10725TCP IP port that Onelook Point to Point Server listens for SMTPIn connections Enabled TrueWhether SMTPIn service is enabled MaxConnections 5Maximum simultaneous SMTPIn connections allowed ResponseTimeout 30Maximum time for SMTPIn command response before disconnect LogEnabled TrueWhether SMTPIn logging is enabled in general master log switch LogSocket FalseWhether SMTPIn socket operations are logged LogMessage TrueWhether SMTPIn message file operations are logged LogQueue TrueWhether SMTPIn queue operations are logged Onelook Point to Point Server C 77 SMTPOut Oo DefaultRemotePort 10725 Default TCP IP port used for send to remote system Enabled True Whether SMTPOut service is enabled QueueDirectory c HELLONT hntmail Directory for local SMTPOu
307. ormat about fifty minutes of voice data per 10 MB of disk space PathFinder software and its database use about 10 MB of disk space Therefore if you need three hours of voice storage it is recommended that you make a hard drive allocation to voice mail storage of at least 40 MB Number of Ports The number of ports required depends on several factors such as Application size Time of day Average length of a transaction Average traffic and peak traffic loads OO 00 0 Grade of service the number of acceptable busy calls received l general each port supports about twenty five users Install and Configure Hardware 2 5 PC System Placement When choosing the location for the PathFinder PC consider such factors as convenience security and environment Oo oO Oo Place the PathFinder PC in the same room or close to the area where the phone system is located Provide a clean relatively dust free space with adequate ventilation The room should have a stable temperature and comply with the manufacturer s specifications Systems with RS 232 hookup for telephone integration or host connection must be located less than 50 feet from the source equipment A short haul modem is required if the distance spanned by the RS 232 hookup is greater than 50 feet The PathFinder computer needs to be connected to a reliable source of power Fluctuations in line voltage and power surges can impede operation and dam
308. ormation on how to configure individual optional modules 5 36 Other MAINT Settings Registry The PathFinder Registry is a database of parameters Changes settings and parameters set through Configuration menu options are stored in the Registry To display the Registry select Registry from the Configuration menu PathFinder displays a window with all the current Registry parameter entries This provides a helpful overview of all PathFinder settings should troubleshooting be required NEE Ed Name Value Engine BlockGroup Line2 1 Eie Engine BlockGroup Line3 1 Engine BlockGroup Line4 1 Done Engine Debug DIls No Engine Debug General No Engine Debug Instructions No Help Engine Debug Modules No Engine Debug Stacks No Engine Debug Suspend No Engine Debug Variables No Add Engine EventQueue Line1 z 6 EER ere Ee Engine EventQueue Line4 6 Engine EventQueue Lined 1 Add File Figure 5 25 Registry Window Registry Maintenance Buttons in the Registry window provide you with the ability to modify various Registry parameters both for hardware and software Ifyou need to make changes directly to items in the Registry you should contact Vodavi Technical Support These options ifused incorrectly can cause serious problems Delete Registry Item The Delete function of the Registry window provides you with the ability to select a specific item from the Registry list and
309. orward Unforward Park Unpark Pickup Secure EET Paice 2 46 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 6 Leave the TAPI PBX strings set to None Click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 4 of 10 Select a Board xj Select from the list the board which PBXpert 32 can use to learn and test PBX tones The boards available in your system are listed in numerical order Which Dialogic board do you want to use Board Board Type Number of channels D Channels 4 If the list above is empty please verify that the Dialogic boards have been started successfully Press Help for more information GG gte lt Back Cancel Help Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 47 7 Choose the Dialogic Board Type to match the board you are going to use for testing then click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 5 of 10 Select the Calling Resource E xj Dialogic Voice Board The configuration information for Line includes a channel number and extension number that will be used by PBXpert 32 during learning and testing to isten to call progress tones The Channel field will contain a list of valid channels depending on the Dialogic voice board chosen in Step 4 Select a channel Then type in the Extension Number of the line plugged into that channel Line A Calling Channel Select the Channel fe 124 E 101 Phone Number cmo Ms 8 Select the first channel to u
310. ote locations to which this system can send messages Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to maintain this list Mailer Address and Port Enter the IP address and port where the Onelook Point to Point Server application is running This is usually the same system The port number for the Onelook Point to Point Server s SMTP services is usually 10725 If you wish to change this for firewall reasons make sure that you change the settings in the PFMAIL INI file and the remote locations that are going to send messages to this machine Enter the machine name plus a colon followed by the port lt machine gt lt port gt Event Group This is the event group that the voice mail system will use to send messages to the Onelook Point to Point Server The typical group is 6 Make sure that at least one channel is set to handle these messages Retry Delay When the voice mail module can not connect to the Onelook Point to Point Server this field indicates how long before it retries C 88 Point To Point Messaging 4 Select Add to add locations The following window displays Point to Point Location Settings Description Enhanced Systems Area Code Cancel Mailbox Length N IP Port 10725 Figure C 45 Point to Point Location Settings Window 5 Configure this window as follows Description For each location enter a descriptive title Area Code For outbound messages this is the prefix area code that
311. ou may also specify Save Delete or Kill to act on the message New leaves the message as new in the mailbox Save marks the message as saved in the mailbox Use Kill or Delete to remove the message after playing The person receiving the call is not able to manipulate the message after listening to the message In other words they are not able to save delete or forward the message Related Commands Dial Call DoMessageRetrieval lt Mailbox gt Allows message retrieval Allows the caller to retrieve and manipulate messages as if they were calling into PathFinder accessing their voice mail box as an owner A 4 Command Files Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String CommandFile lt NewCommandFile gt lt Path gt Action Runs another command file Description The lt NewCommandFile gt variable is the name of the alternate command file The lt Path gt variable tells the exact path to find the lt NewCommandFile gt The command typically is typically called by CommandFile CFILES 000 CF 0 The lt Path gt is anumeric value and matches the path settings in the Registry The command file listed in lt NewCommandFile gt executes all commands and terminates It does not return control to the originating command file Say lt FileName gt lt Path gt Says a file Plays the prompt file listed in lt FileName gt The lt Path gt variable tells
312. oup of mailboxes or extensions By supporting multiple COSs PathFinder provides you the ability to provide subscribers with options to features on an as needed basis To create a new COS perform the following steps 1 Click on the COS icon the second button on the PathFinder MAINT tool bar The following window is displayed Select COS to Edit E z Done Help 7 Delete Figure 5 44 Select COS to Edit Window 5 82 Class of Service Settings Click on Create in the Select COS to Edit window If you are using a template COS select the template from the drop down list Enter a name for the COS twenty characters maximum using any combination of alphanumeric characters Choose a name that describes the group of users in this COS Click on Create to return to the Select COS to Edit window Highlight the COS you created and click on Select The following window is displayed from which you can begin defining the COS Category to edit Message Types Mailbox Caller Delete Mailbox Owner Notification Auto Attendant Figure 5 45 Edit COS Window for the COS named General 7 Edit the parameters for this COS There are seven edit categories listed at the left of this window Once you have selected a category you can reach another by clicking on the page controls that display at the bottom of the window Refer to the following topics for more information on each c
313. p determines whether a tone occurrence should set hang up H7 and terminate Dialogic operations 5 30 Telephony Settings Transfer Settings Transfer Settings function provides control over call transfer activities Telephony Settings Transfer Settings Number Length to Edit 3 H Transfer and Recall cme Transfer Recall Caller on Next Profix GE Busy Bo Previous Postfix No Answer amp Connect Reject f Ma Use Perfect Call Blind Transfer Delay sec r Flash Hook Flash hook length 59 x10msec Figure 5 20 Telephony Settings Transfer Settings Window When addressing the following fields refer to your phone system manual as needed for the appropriate codes Number Length to Edit Number Length to Edit shows the defined extension length you are editing If you are using multiple extension lengths and need to view or change a different length select it here For example if there are subscribers on the voice processing system with four and five digit extension lengths you will have to modify the transfer settings for both 4 and 5 Transfer Fields Transfer Prefix and Postfix settings can be controlled by the Class of Service Refer to Transfer Strings on page 5 81 for more information A typical transfer prefix is amp Complete the Transfer fields as follows Prefix Enter the flash hook and or tone dialing sequence that starts a call tra
314. plate drop down list Once all the information is entered click on Add User to List Repeatthis process for any additional subscribers you need to establish When you have identified the last subscriber you need to create click on Create Users to return to the Select User to Edit window To further define mailbox parameters for a subscriber refer to Editing User Setups on page 5 46 User Settings 5 45 Multiple Mailboxes The Create Range option provides you with the ability to set up multiple subscribers without the need to set them up individually To create a range of subscribers perform the following steps If you created a mailbox for use as a template all settings and parameters from the template are copied to the range A template mailbox is highly recommended when creating a range of mailboxes Refer to Template Users Subscribers on page 5 41 for details 1 Click on the Users icon in the toolbar the leftmost icon Alternatively select from the menu bar Edit gt Users gt Edit User 2 Inthe Select User to Edit window click on Create Range The following window is displayed Create Range Start Mailbox Create Range Cancel Start Extension sk al Help Template Mailbox Oo H Number to create Figure 5 32 Create Range Window 3 Inthe Start Mailbox field enter the first mailbox number to be used in the mailbox range 5 46 User Settings 4 Inthe
315. portunity to hold on the line in the event the called party is busy This option works only with Supervised Transfer The caller hears the following prompt I m sorry lt extension name gt is busy If you would like to hold press 1 To try another extension or leave a message for this extension press 2 User Settings Forward to Extension Forwards calls to the specific extension entered in the Extension field Forward to Mailbox Forwards calls to the specific mailbox entered in the Mailbox field Usually this is the called extension s personal mailbox Forward to Menu Forwards calls to the specific menu entered in the Menu field Refer to Menu Settings on page 5 83 Forward to Module Forwards callers to a custom script module e g pharmacy refill debit card Forward to Time Control Runs the designated time control file and takes the actions designated for the current time Refer to Time Control Settings on page 5 93 After selecting the desired Action 1 complete any fields to the right of the Action 1 field When Supervised Transfer is selected in the Action 1 field the Action 2 field becomes active and can be edited When Action 1 is set at Supervised Transfer and the transfer results ina busy or no answer situation the setting in the Action 2 field specifies what should happen next You may conditionally invoke Action 2 when the following conditions existed after the Action 1 transfer o
316. pplications Before going into a detailed description of the menu module two terms must be defined o Menu A list of actions executed through touch tone keys For example Press 1 for sales 2 for support 3 for administration A menu can invoke up to fourteen actions with each action corresponding to a key ona standard telephone keypad including and plus two actions as defaults ao Action An instruction that is selected from the Menu Action List It tells PathFinder how to respond when a specific key is pressed An action can invoke another module transfer a call to an extension through the Auto Attendant or perform a special feature play a prerecorded message Before setting up complicated multi level menus read through the information in this section It is important that you understand the mechanics of building a menu before you begin Designing a Menu A good way to begin creating a menu is to draft it on paper Initially ideas may not seem sufficiently organized to warrant flow charting if this is the case just jot them down Don t worry about the specific order of menu items at this stage it is more important to get all the ideas down so that alternatives won t be forgotten Once this is done begin the process of building a menu flow chart Menu Settings 5 85 The flowchart below illustrates the design of a typical multi level menu As you create your own menu you should include as much detai
317. ps Window uses seek see eke gee Rek ek Gee AR ee Gee Rae 7 15 Monitor Event Counters WindOW uususes sesse seen ee oek Gee GER Ge ee ee RARR Gee ee ee 7 16 Monitor Line View WINDOW ss se Ge ee ee Ge ee ie 7 17 Error Log Example seel eie seek ede eke ee ede be GN 8 3 Typical Blind Transfer Call LOG ies eise Ese dog See kes ede Re gee Re eek 8 5 Typical Supervised Transfer Call Log sssssssssssssecssecssesssessscssccsseesssessscssceseeseessees 8 6 Supervised Transfer Log w debugging sssessssssessssssecsscsscesecsessnscsessncescessceneenss 8 7 M ltiple Line Call L09 EE RE EG ee Re ee ie 8 8 Menu Selection LOg sesse Ee EER GREG RE EG ee ER OE ee ER Eg 8 9 No Answer LOg se GE Ge ND cee n aai 8 9 Auto Attendant Log Single Call oc esse see eke Ge Gee ER ee ee ee RR eek eek AR 8 9 Auto Attendant Log Main Menu No Action eens see sek sen eek ee eek ee Ge 8 10 Auto Attendant Log Operator Call Blind Transfer essens ses gese ese ee 8 10 Auto Attendant Log VM Directory sees see seekos Roe Geen oe ee Rek Gee ee 8 10 Command Files Sample GE Re Ge Oe ee Ge ee id A 14 Call kist Admin Screen ie ei ed de ee ee Oe C 7 Call kist Process FIGQW use ee N de ues ate eg ennai C 8 RE ele dee OE N ON OE N OE ONE C 9 Edit Call List EMUI ES See EENS N see N eek Se er Ee ER N ee an GE C 10 Select Members to Call Screen sees eek RR GER Ge ER RR AR ek RA Gee ee Ge RAAR C 13 koad template EG ee ee ei C 14 Reports M ster LISE GE Ge ee ie is C 1
318. pts the caller to enter the selected extension number If there are one hundred matches all one hundred names and extensions are played The caller can enter the desired extension or mailbox number at any time during the list playback NOTE List mode can reveal the entire list of extensions and or mailboxes O Single Mode Provides the caller with a list of all matching entries one at a time Callers must press a key to indicate whether they want to select the most recently read name or hear the next matching entry Single mode presents only two options to the caller for each match Maximum Keys This is the maximum number of digits that the caller can enter before PathFinder begins to look up directory entries The range for this field is 1 to 999 Maximum Wait This is the maximum amount of time that PathFinder waits for the Maximum Keys while a caller is entering numbers to spell the user subscriber s name on the keypad The range for this field is 1 to 999 5 6 Module Settings Logging PathFinder continuously generates detailed information on its operation Module Settings Logging What to Log IK Call Begin End IK Voice Mail Owner X Notification GE IK Voice Mail Directory Time Controls Default IK Auto Attendant Track Messages FAX Support Next IK Menus IK Message Manager Integration Previous What to Debug Help Basic Foundation Voice Mail Owner X Notif
319. r Configuration menu provides access to System Settings configuration a group of functions used to maintain the PathFinder directory structure identify communications and printer ports and define the use of non voice channels To access the module configuration options O Select System Settings from the Configuration menu o Click on any of the buttons on this System Settings toolbar to access the corresponding configuration options Auxiliary Tasks LPT COM Posts Figure 5 10 System Settings Toolbar Directories The Directories function defines paths so that PathFinder can locate system files if they are placed in directories other than the defaults System Settings Directories Cancel Path 1 MODULES Next Previous dadd Help Edit Path Clear Path Figure 5 11 System Settings Directories Window DONOTalter these subdirectories unless instructed to do so by Vodavi Technical Support System Settings 5 17 Auxiliary Tasks The Auxiliary Tasks function provides for definition of auxiliary channels Auxiliary channels are used to pass non voice data as in a telephone integration setting Message Manager or SMDI integration controller x Auxiliary Task Settings Task Name Description eee Bone EE Message Manager task im 1 xl Previous ra Delete Lis Cancel Figure 5 12 Auxiliary Task Settings Window Making Chang
320. r double click on the entry b To add anew Call List click the ADD button The Edit Call List Entry screen will display Edit Call List Entry List ID 3 List ID is used to record prompts on line Description 2001 Priority 5 Low High Start Date 05 24 2001 I Supervised Cal I Blind Cal Delay secs f8 punima os 00 is fiers Reset Dates Times V Introduction Prompt Times to play im Delay mins Before Call Backs I Pl mber ID ETE My sede h No Answer E Max Attempts 3 IV Confirmation Use ID Wait secs 5 Busy 5 Max Attempts 5 Max Attempts 3 No Confirm 5 Max Attempts 5 IV Accept Stop after fi accepts Wait secs 5 IV Protect Password Accept keys fi Max Attempts 3 Re enter WA i IV Message Optional I Mailbox fioo Max Length fis Go to O84 a Load template Call List core Figure C 4 Edit Call List Entries 3 Add or change the parameters for the Call List as described in the following field definition table Chalk Talk C 11 Description Name given to a Call List that identifies its purpose or function Priority Setting is used to select which list will be Supervised Call Blind Call Introduction Prompt Play Member ID Confirmation Accept Oo Oo Delay secs Times to play Times to play Use ID Wait secs Max Attempts Stop after x accepts Wait secs Accept keys Max Attempts
321. r specific needs and hard disk storage capacity The maximum value for this field is 999 Record Key Leave this off if you want PathFinder to automatically begin recording a voice message When this is turned on the caller must first press a key to start recording 5 66 Class of Service Settings Mailbox Caller Settings Mailbox caller options are choices given to a caller when leaving a message These options are available only after the caller presses a key to terminate recording a message Click on Mailbox Caller in the Edit COS window to begin defining mailbox caller options for the COS The following window displays Edit COS BASIC Voice Mail Caller Record Stop Key 8 Urgent Send di Caller Record Options X Help Caller Send Options Urgent Confidential Last Options off On Menu Last Options Menu 100 E Figure 5 40 Edit COS Voice Mail Caller Settings Window Record Stop Key Select this option to activate the one key urgent message send feature With this option turned on if an outside caller presses 8 to end the recording of a voice message the message is marked as urgent sent and the caller proceeds to Last Options Class of Service Settings 5 67 Caller Record Options If this option is selected and the caller presses a key after leaving a voice message the caller hears the following menu of options Press 1 to send the message Press 2 to play the mess
322. r which your PathFinder installation is configured Voice lines are those that can be dialed Telephony Settings Voice Channels Number of Voice Lines Cancel The key is licensed for 16 ports Next Previous aadd Figure 5 16 Telephony Settings Voice Channels Window The number of voice lines that are displayed is the number of active voice lines on your PathFinder implementation The text below the Number of Voice Lines field The key is licensed for X ports indicates how many ports the software key allows MWI Notification The MWI Notification function provides for control over message waiting indicator and message notification functions Telephony Settings MWI Notification gt lt Number Length to Edit 3 gt Message Waiting Previous Set A22 Ext NewMsgCnt 03 T Help Cm AE Notification Prefix Prefix Figure 5 17 Telephony Settings MWI Notification Window 5 22 Telephony Settings Number Length to Edit Number Length to Edit shows the current length you are editing If you are usingmultiplenumberlengthsandneedtoviewadifferentone selectithere Message Waiting MWI sequences can be controlled by COS Refer to Message Waiting Indicator MWI Strings on page 5 74 for more information There are several methods for notifying a station of anew message such as MWIs or a stutter dial tone The Message Waiting Set and Clear s
323. ransfer Out Allows the mailbox owner to transfer to other extensions or mailboxes This option should be turned off in a service bureau application or when the Auto Attendant is not used Delete Unheard Allows the mailbox owner to pull back messages that were sent to another local mailbox PathFinder prompts the owner for the destination mailbox and then check to determine if any unheard messages from the owner are still in the mailbox PathFinder plays each message and allows the owner to selectively delete them Notification Settings PathFinder has a variety of notification options that are used to tell mailbox owners when they have received a new message Click on Notification in the Edit COS window to display these options The following window is displayed Edit COS BASIC Voice Mail Notification Message Waiting Off On First Message On Every Message HWI Strings On DOO O Help ol Event Handler Group E Voice Notify Options X Password Required X Msg Pickup Allowed di Message Cascading Off Immediate When Notify Fails F n higen finis Original Message Leave as New O Save Message O Delete Message Notification im mins e attempts Retry Pager Notify Script EF ee lt Page Page 6 of 7 Page gt gt gt Figure 5 42 Edit COS Voice Mail Notification Settings Window 5 74 Class of Service Settings Message Waiting PathF
324. re moved to the Deleted Items folder You will not be able to recover the deleted message in your voice mailbox but if the message was deleted by accident you will be able to move it from the Deleted Items folder back to another folder Marking a message as either read or unread in Exchange or Outlook will cause the message to be marked as respectively saved or new in your mailbox Installation amp Configuration There are two parts to the Onelook installation process the server installation and the client installation The system administrator will install the server portion of Onelook while the end user will need to install only the client portion Server PC Onelook software is installed along with your PathFinder software You also must configure the Onelook Point to Point server before using Onelook C 58 Onelook Unified Messaging Installation To install Onelook run SETUP EXE as described in the System Administrator Manual If Onelook Point to Point Server is already installed then installation is not required Ifyou have Point to Point messaging installed you do not need to perform the server installation described in this section Do not try to install the server portion of Onelook on a system that already has Point to Point messaging installed Configuring the Onelook Point to Point Server 1 Use notepad exe to edit the HELLONT NTMAIL INI file 2 Make sure the follo
325. ription If the network is backed up periodically and PathFinder is a node on the network then network backups are sufficient Consult your network administrator for more information Tape If there is a tape drive on the PathFinder PC Windows NT supports periodic automatic backups of PathFinder Consult your Windows NT manual on how to perform tape backups Manual PathFinder can be backed up when there is a change made to PathFinder in order to protect the data Typically these backups are performed manually and are described below You can manually back up PathFinder at three levels O Level One To back up all of the vital programming of PathFinder Back up the HELLONT DBASE directory by the method best suited to your application Be certain to back up all subdirectories under these main directories O Level Two Includes the first level and subscriber greetings menu greetings and other static voice prompts Back up the HELLONT DBASE HELLONT VOX HELLONT MESSAGES SIG and HELLONT MESSAGES GR directories by the method best suited to your application Be certain to back up all subdirectories under these main directories O Level Three Contains the first and second levels and all mailbox messages This is a complete backup of PathFinder and depending on the number of messages on PathFinder it could involve a large amount of data Back up the HELLONT DBASE HELLONT VOX and HELLONT MESSAGES B
326. rol window 2 Enter a name of up to eight characters in the Time Control Name field 3 Click on Create to return to the Select Time Control to Edit window Edit the new template time control refer to Editing a Time Control on page 5 96 Time Control Settings 5 95 Creating a Time Control A time control must be created before it can be edited Creating atime control is the process of assigning the time control aname and entering a description To create a new time control perform the following steps 1 In the Select Time Control to Edit window click on Create The following window displays Create Time Control Time Control Name Template Time Control Ss Figure 5 50 Create Time Control Window 2 Enter a name of up to eight characters in the Time Control Name field 3 If you want to use an existing time control as a template for the one you re creating select it from the Template Time Control pull down list If no template is selected the Time Control will be blank Click on Create to return to the Select Time Control to Edit window 5 You can now edit the new time control refer to Editing a Time Control on page 5 96 5 96 Time Control Settings Editing a Time Control The edit time control function is used to edit both new and existing time controls If the Select Time Control to Edit window is not displayed click on the Edit Time Control Records icon on the toolbar To edit
327. rs should be small so as not to damage either the card or jumpers Work Table The worktable should be sturdy located in a well lit area with adequate space to remove the computer chassis It should also provide adequate space to unpack and inspect the voice cards An anti static floor mat in the area in front of and under the worktable is highly recommended Overall Hardware Setup Procedure The steps necessary to set up system hardware depend upon the number of telephone lines ports your telephone system is designed to support and any additional software modules such as fax support that have been purchased with PathFinder Some of the information contained in the rest of this chapter may not be applicable to you or your specific system setup Check the section headings to determine which information in this chapter pertains to your specific hardware configuration All cards are configured with default settings at the factory However you must confirm these settings prior to running PathFinder Install and Configure Hardware 2 7 Dialogic Products Refer to Telephony Hardware Compatibility on page 2 5 for more information on compatible voice cards Current Drivers PathFinder 8 2 uses Dialogic System Release 5 0 drivers The default location of SR5 DNA drivers is C Program Files Dialogic Telephony Hardware Configuration The following are instructions for configuring the Dialog 4 the most commonly s
328. rtest allowable length of a recorded message A value of 2 seconds is recommended as the minimum message length The range for this field is 1 to 999 Truncate Recording This parameter determines how much time PathFinder trims from the end of a mailbox message whose recording was terminated by a silence or tone detection PathFinder automatically removes trailing tone and silence at the end of a message so it is recommended to leave this value at 0 seconds Increase this value if the end of your messages contain dial tone noise or excessive silence NOTE This setting is only used if PathFinder relies on silence or non silence for hang up detection and is not used for phone systems that employ loop current hang up Record Tone Length FF and REW Speed This setting determines the duration of the beep tone that PathFinder gives callers before recording a message The information in the FF and REW Speed field sets the time intervals that are skipped in a message when the designated REW 7 or FF 8 keys on the telephone key pad are pressed The recommended interval is 50 to 100 tenths of a second The range for this field is 0 to 999 tenths of a second 5 4 Module Settings Auto Attendant The Auto Attendant settings provide access to caller related Call Queue Interval and Directory configurations Module Settings Auto Attendant r Call Queue Interval Interval between call attempts se
329. rts O One APL card There are two DTMF receivers built on the APL card O One SLU module The SLU is installed on the APL card The SLU provides four additional DTMF receivers for a total of six O One Ring Generator RGU Unit is needed Supported Features O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs mn Outdial to pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 9 Table 3 3 Starplus 96EX Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 2366 or dial gt and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX press Btn 13 then press HOLD Press Flash 36 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into VM group 690 Press Flash 36 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 0 0 TRANS 7 HOLD First 0 is the table number assigned Second 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 37 b Enter 1 0 TRANS 7 HOLD lis the table number assigned 0 is a prefix di
330. rvice Provider option is selected Reminders Spelling AutoArchive Preview Manage Forms Internet E mail General E mail Sending Reading Calendar Tasks Notes Journal Check For new mail on Iv Internet E mail Mindspring m Internet E mail Enhanced Systems Inc EOnelook Service Provider When new items arrive IV Play a sound T Briefly change the mouse cursor Display a notification message r Settings For automatic processing of mail IV Process delivery read and recall receipts on arrival IV Process requests and responses on arrival I Delete receipts and blank responses after processing Use Microsoft Word as the e mail editor Template Email dot Cancel Apply Help Figure C 30 Outlook Options Window Using Onelook In Onelook you can choose to not dial into the voice mail system whenever you have a new message waiting most PBXs have a flashing New Message light on the phone Instead wait for Onelook to automatically download all new messages or press F5 in Outlook or Ctrl M in Exchange to have them downloaded immediately C 62 Onelook Unified Messaging In both situations you will get a New Mail icon in the taskbar shown below letting you know that there are unread or unheard messages waiting Ge Ee Figure C 31 New Mail Icon Voice Messages Once you launch a voice message by double clicking on it in Outlook or Exc
331. ry Registry Items The following registry items assume 0000 as the queue name TeleQueue C 97 Ta0000Desc A description line Not used by the system but provided for clarity This is a mandatory item and it must be included for each gueue TqOOOOLstExt The last extension PathFinder transferred to This allows the callers to be sent to the extensions in a linear order so that all extensions will have an equal chance of receiving the same number of calls When setting up a queue just leave this line blank This is a mandatory item Tq0000HldTyp Hold type While a person is waiting to be moved to the front of the line you can do three things with the call First you can do nothing and just tell TeleQueue how long to do it This is called sleeping and is designated by an S followed by the number of seconds to sleep before checking the position in the queue 10 would check the queue and confirm that the caller wants to stay every 10 seconds A number like 30 is probably more reasonable Another type of holding is to do a hold using the phone system s hold features If TeleQueue is told to hold then PathFinder would dial a transfer start then sleep for the designated number of seconds and then dial the ring no answer abort sequence The letter H is used followed by the number of seconds to hold For example H30 would tell TeleQueue that the caller should be put on a phone system hold for 30 second
332. s The final method of holding is for TeleQueue to play hold files If a P is specified and there are not any files recorded TeleQueue plays the canned message TQ_MUSIC VOX You can record any number of consecutive prompt files The file names for our test queue 234 would be TQ234 1 TQ234 2 TQ234 3 and so on When TeleQueue gets to the end it replays the first message Tq0000HlpFls Are help files allowed Help files allow the caller to enter a four digit prompt number while listening to other prompt files For example if a caller was listening to TQ234 2 he could then press 4567 and TeleQueue would play TQ4567 VOX C 98 TeleQueue If these help files are recorded with the correct information you could help the caller without ever sending them to an extension Set the fourth line to a 0 to turn this ability off or to a 1 to allow it If it is turned off then TeleQueue ignores the keys Ta0000Menu Name of the menu to run when the caller presses 0 Make sure the menu exists If it does not PathFinder will disconnect the caller In PathFinder Release 5 0 the menus can Branch to other menus time controls etc Tq0000LstRsrt Last resort extension This is an extension number that must exist in the Auto Attendant database After TeleQueue goes through all extensions and finds them all ring no answer it will transfer control to this extension If you do not have an extension on this line or it is invalid then T
333. s Number Prompt Dialog 100 vox Installation of this questionnaire is incomplete To record prompts press 101 vox Enter the password for questionnaire followed by pressing 102 vox You are currently editing question number 103 vox To hear currently recorded question press 1 104 vox To record question press 2 105 vox To re record question press 2 106 vox To accept newly recorded question press 4 107 vox To go back to previous question press 7 108 vox To go to next question press 8 109 vox To disconnect press 9 110 vox To edit anew questionnaire press 111 vox Enter the questionnaire ID you wish to edit followed by 112 vox That is an invalid password 113 vox That is an invalid questionnaire ID 114 vox You have selected an option currently not available Please make another selection 115 vox Unable to access system file Please contact your system administrator 116 vox Questionnaire was incomplete 117 vox After the tone record the new question Press to stop recording 118 vox Thank you for calling Chalk Talk C 33 Conditions o The QA module is not controlled via the key O The administrative module allows creating deleting and editing of the QA lists The administration can either be done over the phone or via a GUI interface A GUI interface is the preferred method O
334. s Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 press HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button NOTE You can adjust the volume level on each SLT port by using the volume up or down code This provides additional control for both internal and external calls into PathFinder fev Subscribers are def
335. s C 103 Troubleshooting Testing C 107 Wait For Transfer C 106 Telequeue Registry Items C 96 TqOOOOAIwCllr C 101 Tq0000Desc C 97 TqOOOOExitExt C 102 TqOOOOExtLog C 99 TqOOOOHIdTyp C 97 TqQOOOOHIpFls C 97 Tq0000Loops C 98 TqOOOOLstExt C 97 TqOOOOLstRsrt C 98 Tq0000Menu C 98 TAOOOOMStrO C 101 TqOOOONoRBBfrHu C 101 TqOOOONTmTOAsk C 99 TAOOOOPlayTm C 98 Tq0000PsudoSup C 101 Tq0000ShwCntrs C 101 Tq0000StrtAtTp C 101 TqCsrCntl C 99 Use of Hunt Group C 103 Template Class of Service 5 57 Template Users Subscribers 5 41 Templates 5 57 Test Point to Point C 89 Testing C 107 Time Control 5 7 5 49 5 52 5 59 5 88 5 91 5 100 5 106 Button 4 9 Settings 4 6 5 93 Index Time Control Settings Report 6 25 Time Out 5 88 Time Periods 4 6 5 18 Timed notification 5 51 Time Out 5 92 Tone Events 5 29 Tone ID 5 28 Tone Interval 5 25 Tone or Silence Disconnect 5 24 tone set file 2 25 Tone Template Add or Edit 5 27 Tone Type 5 25 Toolbar MAINT 4 8 Track Messages 5 7 Traditional Fax Machine C 40 Transfer Fields 5 30 Transfer Out 5 73 Transfer Settings 4 6 5 30 Transfer Strings 5 81 Troubleshooting 7 8 8 11 C 55 Troubleshooting Point to Point C 90 Troubleshooting Testing C 107 Truncate Recording 5 3 Trunk Access 6 12 Tutorial 5 48 U UDDU 2 26 2 54 Uninstall 2 26 Un interruptible Power Supply UPS 2 5 Universal Dialogic Diagnostic Utility UDDU 2 26 2 54 Unlimited Supervisor Access 4 11 Upgradi
336. s Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Enter 9 9999999 HOLD 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 Btn 6 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button N
337. s a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Enter 9 9999999 HOLD 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 Btn 6 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all CO lines 9 Program CO line ringing assignments a Press Flash 40 to enter CO line programming b Enter the CO line range then press HOLD c Press Btn 11 to program ringing assignments d Enter 440 7 on the dial pad then press HOLD 440 is the voice mail group 7 is for day and night ringing 10 Perform the following at each station a Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button N 3 12 Phone System Set Up Starplus SPD 1428 Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirement
338. s allow you to manipulate PathFinder settings based on day time of day and day of the week The Select Time Control to Edit window allows you to create edit or delete a time control Line Settings Button Exit Button Clicking the Line Settings button is the same as selecting Edit gt Line Settings from the menu bar Clicking this button causes the Line Settings window to display From this window you can assign modules or applications to different phone lines Clicking the Exit button exits you from the program the same as selecting File gt Exit from the menu bar If you click on this button you exit MAINT Special Characters amp Strings The special characters and strings supported throughout MAINT are Table 4 1 Special Characters amp Strings Character String Character Name Definition amp ampersand Flash hook f comma Pause asterisk gt DTMF star number sign DTMF pound Ext At an extension 0 through 9 numbers 0 through 9 DTMF keys 4 10 Access Levels amp MAINT Passwords Access Levels amp MAINT Passwords The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This chapter describes the functions available in MAINT s File menu which includes options for configuring MAINT logins MAINT Logins In many installations more than one person interacts with PathFinder Some people only generate system reports while others perform high end maintenance acti
339. s ede ee Ne eie eie eke 2 20 Prerequisites amp Preparation use sesse sese see ee Seg oe e ge ee ee ee Re ge ee ee ae 2 20 Software Installation ceases ete acerca eect cece eee 2 21 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert sessssssescseesssecssecseecseestecsecenseess 2 25 Dialogi SOMWALE osse isi N ie kg ee ee 2 25 PEN ELE oe ee Re EN ER Ke Ek ed ER ee ee N ee atest 2 42 SOM Wale OvervieW isi ese ee Re es oiie 2 51 Installation Troubleshooting u esse sen seek RR ER RR GER Ge ee ee ee RAAR 2 53 Phone System Integration and Setup Contents Phone System Integration Protocols sscssesseccssecsscsccssecssseesecsceseecsseesees 3 1 SIVIDI EE N 3 1 RG ORATION iese es se ie ee ee Ee ee ed RE 3 2 Customization Parameters se Ee Re gee 3 3 SMEER ENE ee ie ie ee Ge Ge De DE ie ee eed 3 4 Problem Diaenosis RE EE N ns 3 5 RS 232 Connie OS N eie ee ee ee De Ge 3 5 Other POLO COIS ER Es teen EO eect Ge aS aAa 3 3 5 Phone System Set US escssssccascessenzceusscercuacetseecestesactenttvacasnccensuechoavesstewctanrestansiccess 3 6 Starpl s SYSTEMS RE EE EE N EE 3 6 ifite SYSTEMS Ge ee Ge ee Ee 3 28 Configuration Overview ds Ik EE EE EE N EI ER EA 4 1 Overall Configuration Procedure sesse en eek Rae Gee ee eek ee Gee 4 1 Configuration Preparation ss N EG Ge or Ge Gie 4 2 Defining Parameters iss or tee eel te el See N ee 4 2 MAINT OVERVIEW eeste ee ke Ge ke De ee elke 4 5 File Mee eo GE EE EE RE 4 5 Configuration Menu ER G
340. s for the STARPLUS SPD 1428 digital in band integration O One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each 2 x 4 SLT card provides four ports o One DTMF Receiver module The DTMF is installed on the 2 x 4 SLT card The DTMF provides one additional DTMF receiver for a total of two If the phone system has an expansion KSU and 2x4 or 4x 8 card installed an additional DTMF receiver can be installed on these This would bring the total to four DTMF receivers OPX boxes contain their own DTMF receiver internally A 48V power supply is needed O One Ring Generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS 1428 SPD include O Station forward to a personal greeting O Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations transfer caller directly to mailbox mn Outdial to pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up Table 3 5 Starplus SPD 1428 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table a
341. s have the correct TCP IP name or address for the HELLONT HNTMAIL system o Make sure enough Onelook leases are enabled on software controller key for active Onelook clients Point To Point Messaging This section of the manual contains material related to the optional Point to Point messaging capabilities of PathFinder With Point to Point messaging two or more PathFinder systems can transport messages using any TCP IP network This capability allows low cost messaging between multiple sites Since PathFinder does not use voice lines for delivery there is relatively little cost involved with sending the messages regardless of the destination While PathFinder serves very well as a stand alone voice processing unit it also can be networked with other PathFinder implementations over any TCP IP link including the Internet With the optional Point to Point messaging module PathFinder is able to use store and forward to deliver messages intended for remote mailboxes effectively extending its operations anywhere in the world Point To Point Messaging C 85 Features Features of Point to Point messaging include Voice messages anonymous originate subscriber originate forward and reply Facsimile messages anonymous originate subscriber forward Multiple remote sites Limited only by length of area code chosen Easy to remember area code metaphor used for addressing remote sites Multiple COS settings for ea
342. s of the STARPLUS Triad S include oO jul jul Station forward to a personal greeting Message waiting On Off LEDs Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call Outdial to a pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 21 Table 3 9 Starplus Triad S Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD Q is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select
343. s specified in Tq0000HIdTyp Tq0000ExtLog Extended Logging Flag This field should be either a 1 extended logging turned On or a 0 Extended logging turned off Extended logging generates simple SMDR type log lines in the PathFinder system log It also allows tracking of the CSR status see TqCsrCtl below A typical log line for extended logging would look like the following 13 30 02 13 30 02 13 31 12 Position 13 31 12 13 31 13 TqCsrCntl Answered 13 31 14 Answered 13 31 14 7404 Caller Out Caller In 7401 is 3 7402 Busy 7403 Caller Out CSR Status Tracking Flag Note This is a system wide parameter and thus does not need to have the queue specified This field controls whether TeleQueue should support the CSR status files A value of 1 turns on CSR Status tracking and a 0 turns it off The CSR Status files allow the extension owners to mark themselves as busy for 1 of 9 reasons and then to mark themselves as not busy While a CSR is marked as busy no other calls will be sent to that extension C 100 TeleQueue A CSR can call into the system and set the status to 0 Available or 1 9 Not Available Assuming you are answering the phone with a menu when the caller presses 1 you send them to the custom module HITELEO SUB and for the parameter you enter 1234 This sends any calls into queue 1234 If you would like the CSRs to change their status by pressing 8 from the main
344. s your voice mail number For example extension 1256 has the mailbox number 1256 Next enter your password This is the same as your voice mail password for example 1234 Enter an interval time The interval time is the delay between successive checks by Onelook for new messages C 60 Onelook Unified Messaging It is recommended that you choose a value of 300 seconds or higher If you set the interval too small your system will check for mail all the time and will slow down significantly 8 When you have entered the required information the Onelook Service Provider window displays It should look something like this Onelook Service Provider Ea Onelook Service Setup r Server Name Jesivmail m User Information Mailbox fi 256 Password 300 Seconds Interval Ghenge Mallon Fasswerd Reset Last Msg Date m Server Connection Using Local Area Network LAN Using Remote Connection i Cancel Apply Figure C 29 Onelook Service Provider Window complete 9 Click on OK to close the Onelook Service Provider window Configuration 1 After the setup program is complete open Outlook the Inbox icon on your desktop If you are only running Exchange and not Outlook you can skip this step 2 From the Tools menu select Options Onelook Unified Messaging C 61 3 Inthe Options window click on the E mail button Be sure that the Onelook Se
345. scriber receives a new message at 4 00 p m Both new messages will be cascaded O Set to Save Message to cause the message to be saved in the original mailbox once the forwarding is completed O Set to Delete Message to cause the original message to be deleted from the original mailbox once the forwarding is completed Class of Service Settings 5 77 Notify Interval This parameter determines the time interval between each notification attempt until the owner retrieves the message The time is measured in minutes with a maximum interval of 999 minutes Notify Retries This parameter determines how many times PathFinder attempts to notify a mailbox owner after receiving a new message The maximum number of attempts is 99 Retry Pager This option only applies to pager notifications It allows notifications to a pager to be repeated if PathFinder detects a busy or no answer when calling a paging company In other words if PathFinder detects a busy or no answer PathFinder does not consider that an attempt to notify the paging company has been made and retries the attempt later Notify Script This powerful feature allows complex notification scripts to be created on a per COS basis This option can only be used if a notification script has already been written Refer to Appendix A for instructions on creating notification scripts Auto Attendant Settings These options determine the handling of several automated operations
346. se for testing 9 Type in the extension number that this channel is using 2 48 Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 10 Click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 6 of 10 Select the Called Resource 4 x Dialogic Voice Board The configuration information for Line B includes a channel number and extension number that will be used by PBXpert 32 during learning and testing to listen to call progress tones The Channel field will contain a list of valid channels depending on the Dialogic voice board chosen in Step 4 Select a channel Then type in the Extension Number of the line plugged into that channel g aun Line B Called Channel Select the Channel 2 a Ext 102 Phone Number fi25 pT EST 11 Select the second channel to use for testing 12 Type in the extension number that this channel is using Configure Dialogic Software amp PBXpert 2 49 13 Click Next PBXpert Wizard Step 7 of 10 Settings Confirmation 1 xj Dialogic Voice Board Below is a summary of the settings you entered during steps 2 through 7 If you need to change any of these settings click the BACK button as necessary to return to the appropriate step PBX Information PBX Man Model Vodavi 192 384 TAPI Dial Strings File Name m Resources Dialogic Board Number 1 Line A Calling Channel Channel Number 1 Extension Number 124 Line B Called Channel Channel Number 2 Extension Number
347. sers icon in the toolbar the leftmost icon Alternatively you can also select from the menu bar Edit gt Users gt Show List The following window displays Select User to Edit Mailbox Extension Name Select DOE JOHN JONES MARY Done SMITH BOB WRIGHT KIM Help BINKS ZACHARY BLACK JANET Create Range Delete Range Sort by Name Extension Mailbox Figure 5 30 Select User to Edit Window 5 44 User Settings 2 3 Aus Click on the Create Users button The following window displays E Create Users Mailbox Extension sd FirstName __ LastName Add User to List Greate Users Bemoye User Cancel Help Mailbox Template Figure 5 31 Create Users Window Enter the following information about this subscriber Mailbox Enter the subscriber s mailbox number This can be the same as the subscriber s extension or it can be different as needed Extension Enter the extension to which this mailbox is linked First Name Enter the first name of the subscriber Information in this field will be use to create the company directory Last Name Enter the last name of the subscriber Information in this field will be use to create the company directory Mailbox Template If you have already created a subscriber whose mailbox definition can serve as a template for this subscriber select that mailbox number in the Mailbox Tem
348. sessssssesssessecseeseeeseess 5 58 Edit COS General Settings WindOW sssssssecssscssscsnscssecssecssccssecssecseecsscesseeseecseess 5 59 Edit COS Voice Mail Greeting Settings WindOW sssssssssseessesesssssssssssssceeserssssssss 5 61 Edit COS Voice Mail Message Settings WindOW uue sesse se sen eek ee ee ee Ge 5 63 Edit COS Voice Mail Caller Settings WindOW iese sense sense sek Geek ee ee ee Ge 5 66 Edit COS Voice Mail Owner Settings WindOW uses sesse se sen eek ee ee ee Ge Ge 5 68 Edit COS Voice Mail Notification Settings Wind OW uuee sesse sen see see Gee ee ee 5 73 Edit COS Automated Attendant Settings WindOW uuuuses see see seen see ee ee RR 5 78 Select COS to Edit WiNdOW ies ee le Ge ev se ee ee Gee ss 5 81 Edit COS Window for the COS named General i esse seen see seen ee ese ee 5 82 Sample Flow Chart for Menu Design uses sees sek Ge Gee ee ek ee GER Ge ee ee RARR 5 85 Select Menu to Edit WindOW ssssssssscsscssscssesseccsecensecssesuscescessccsscenseeseecsscessesseeess 5 86 Edit Menu Window for a menu named Banking s sessssssesseceecseeseeseeseessees 5 87 Select Time Control To Edit WindOW uses sees ee oek Gee ee eek RR Ge Gee ee Ge RAAR 5 94 Create Time Control Window sd RR EG ee 5 95 Edit Time Control WiNdOW sets Ee ee ee AE ee Gee ed 5 06 Edit Time Control Line Item WINDOW ses essens ses ee eg Gee ee ee 5 97 Edit Time Control WiNdOW se ie oe oe ee nnn anes ities do nesd 5 99 Line Settings WiNdoOW ei R
349. shold Switches to set the off set address amp default hook switch state Jump Board Configuration Configure your voice cards to match the following table Refer to the documentation shipped with Dialogic boards for specific instructions on configuring each card Install and Configure Hardware 2 9 Table 2 3 Jump Board Configuration Configuration Board Address IRQ JP7 Four Port with 1 Dialog 4 1 Dialog 4 DOOOO 5 Installed Eight Port with 2 Dialog 4 1 Dialog 4 D1000 5 Installed 2 Dialog 4 D2000 5 Removed Twelve Port with 3 Dialog 4 1 Dialog 4 DOOOO 5 Installed 2 Dialog 4 D2000 5 Removed 3 Dialog 4 D4000 5 Removed Sixteen Port with 4 Dialog 4 1 Dialog 4 DOOOO 5 Installed 2 Dialog 4 D2000 5 Removed 3 Dialog 4 D4000 5 Removed 4 Dialog 4 D6000 5 Removed Four Port with Four Port Fax 1 VFX 40ESC plus D0000 7 Installed Eight Port with Four Port Fax 1 Dialog 4 D0000 5 Installed 1 VFX 40ESC plus D2000 7 Installed Eight Port with Eight Port Fax 1 VFX 40ESC plus D0000 5 Installed 2 VFX 40ESC plus D2000 5 Removed Twelve Port with Four Port Fax 1 Dialog 4 D0000 5 Installed 2 Dialog 4 D2000 5 Removed 1 VFX 40ESC plus D4000 7 Installed Twelve Port with Eight Port Fax 1 Dialog 4 D0000 5 Installed 1 VFX 40ESC plus D2000 7 Installed 2 VFX 40ESC plus D4000 7 Removed Twelve Port with Twelve Port Fax 1 VFX 40ESC plus D0000 7 Installed 2 VFX 40ESC plus D2000 7 Removed 3 VFX 40
350. sing the Internet as a transport the cost and quality of the transmission are improved This is especially true for international facsimile deliveries Internet Fax Delivery uses standard facsimile machines to send facsimile documents into the PathFinder system Upon receipt the IFD module determines where the closest server is located It transports the facsimile over the Internet to the destination server The destination server then dials the local facsimile machine A return receipt can then be sent back to the originating machine C 46 Internet Fax Delivery Internet Fax Delivery delivers standard facsimile messages using the Internet It does not require any equipment attached to the facsimile machine and runs with other PathFinder applications including voice mail and automated attendant Requirements IFD requires the following before operation Oo O Oa n Installation PathFinder Release 6 or higher Dedicated Internet access used for transport to other PathFinders Facsimile support on each of the PathFinder systems VFX 40s Internet Fax Delivery activation code for the software controller key Facsimile Support activation code for the software controller key All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hard
351. ss of Service Settings Oo Refer to Original Message on page 5 76 for selecting options to decide what happens to the original message in the primary mailbox O Set it to When Notify Fails to allow the message to be copied or forwarded to another mailbox or other mailboxes only when the notification has failed and a mailbox owner has not retrieved the message As an example if the Message Cascading option is set to When Notify Fails then the following process occurs jul jul Mailbox A gets a message Mailbox A has notification activated and the complete notification takes 30 minutes If the owner of Mailbox A does not save or delete the message after 30 minutes then the message will cascade to Mailbox B Refer to Original Message on page 5 76 for selecting options to decide what happens to the original message in the primary mailbox O Select the On Urgent Only checkbox to activate either When Notify Fails or Immediate cascading only for messages marked Urgent Original Message These options are available when Message Cascading is set to Immediate or When Notify Fails o Leave as New leaves the original message as a new message in the original mailbox Remember that all new messages in the original mailbox will be cascaded As an example Oo n n jul A subscriber receives a new message at 9 00 a m and that message is cascaded The mailbox owner does not save or delete the message The sub
352. ssage First 5 69 On Every Message 5 74 On First Message 5 74 On Urgent Only 5 76 Onelook 2 53 Archiving Messages using Onelook C 71 Creating a New Voice Message C 66 Fax Messages C 69 Forwarding a Voice Message C 65 Installation amp Configuration C 57 Replying to a Voice Message C 63 Index System Requirements C 56 Troubleshooting C 72 Unified Messaging C 55 Using C 61 Onelook Point to Point Server C 73 Guidelines C 79 Installation C 75 Requirements C 74 Setup amp Configuration C 75 Troubleshooting C 83 Usage C 78 Only on busy 5 54 Only on no answer 5 54 Opening Prompts C 104 Operators 4 6 5 9 5 49 5 91 Optional Modules 5 35 Optional modules C 1 Optional PC Equipment 2 3 Optional software modules 1 2 4 6 Original Message 5 76 Other MAINT Settings 5 34 Other Protocols 3 5 Outbound Calling via Call Lists C 4 Outlook or Exchange Locks Up C 73 Outside Numbers 5 71 Overall Procedures Configurationn 4 1 Hardware Setup 2 6 Owners 5 60 Access 5 91 5 100 5 105 Edit Options 5 72 Play Options 5 70 Retries 5 15 Send Options 5 71 P Page 5 64 Paged Mode 5 5 Pager Files samples A 12 Pager Mailbox Delay 5 12 Pager notification 5 51 Passwords 4 12 5 47 5 72 5 88 Attempts 5 12 Length 5 2 Required 5 75 PathFinder Components 1 2 PathFinder Monitor Application 7 13 PathFinder Won t Start 2 53 Pause 4 9 PBX 2 11 Attachment 2 12 Integrations 4 6 5 34 Name 5 107 Voice Bridge 3 5 PBXpert 2 21 2 25
353. ssenseasenseassassaee 6 21 Extension Settings Detail sesse sense sek ee ee ee Rek Ge RR eek RR eg Ge Gee 6 22 Class Of service SetNnAs aie see ese Ne Es ee ei 6 23 Men SettihgS se EE Gee ee ee Ee ee ee need 6 24 Time Control SEIING S sees eie N en ee ee Re iriie 6 25 Registry Settings SUMMER susse seksies Rese Ses ie is RE RR Reekse 6 26 Registry Settings Detail uuusses essens seek see eek oek Gee eene eek eke EG 6 28 System Distribution ISIS EE N ee 6 29 Directory REPOT tS EE N eE OE N 6 30 DIFECTONY Report is Ri ee oe EO 6 30 beds REDOFS ees es ee se ee GE ee eo RE GE os 6 31 dIE a EE N EE DE EN 6 32 Maintenance Loer ER ei Re ie RA Se KG need aS 6 33 Error ees OE EE ERRA 6 34 Messages Reports ed ee ER DE eens 6 35 Message SUMMAary siese ies sei ie RE GR ek Ee ie eg 6 35 Messag Detail sie N ee ani 6 36 Greetings amp Signatures isi ES Red Ne Re ee eg ee EE 6 37 Customized REDOFS ii es Ne se ee ee see ke ee 6 38 7 Boom Box and Monitor Applications Boom Box Application vi GEE GE ee EG ie ee 7 1 Requirements es es Ode ee Ge GR N eed 7 1 installation uas ee eg ke Ge 7 1 Menu Bar Options sees skeer ee ee 7 2 elf ure RA N EE N EE OE 7 5 Contents File ini GR Ee Ge Ng 7 8 Ns Eed Ee ee ee RE OE OR rin 7 8 Boom Box System Prompt uses sesse sense oe goe oeR ERGER ERROR RR ER ER ER ER 7 9 Indexed vs Non Indexed Prompts ussse see see see seek ee Ge Gee ee ee RR 7 9 Non Indexed Prompts ei ek ee ee RE teeter 7 10 PathFi
354. stem default greeting is used 5 62 Class of Service Settings System The System greeting is a generic message used when no personal greeting has been recorded If both the Personal and System greetings are activated PathFinder plays the personal greeting when one has been recorded System Add on The System Add on is a smaller version of the System default greeting that follows a personal greeting This greeting plays Begin recording at the tone To stop recording press any key and so on whereas the regular System greeting plays The person you have tried to reach is unavailable Begin recording and so on Class of Service The Class of Service greeting plays a single greeting for all mailboxes that share the same COS This is done to conserve disk space by eliminating the need for each mailbox to have its own greeting prompt For example Balagunda Corporation has a COS called SUPRT for all technical support staff The COS greeting file SUPRT GRT might sound like this The technical support representative you are trying to reach at Balagunda Corporation is not available Please leave a message at the tone Only one COS greeting can be recorded for each COS Its file is stored in the HELLONT VOX directory By default the greeting file is called lt COS Name gt GRT where lt COS Name is the name given to the COS and GRT is the COS greeting identifier file extension Voice Insert A Vo
355. steps 1 From the Start menu select Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click Users and Passwords Control Panel 3 Click Advanced tab 4 Click Advanced button 5 Click Users Folder in left explorer window pane 6 Click Action gt New User 7 Type Pathfinder in the Username field 8 In the Password field type the serial number for your PathFinder software then re enter the serial number a second time in the Confirm P W field Clear the User must change password at next logon check box 2 16 Install and Configure Operating System 10 Select the Password never expires check box 11 Click Create 12 Click Close 13 Click Groups Folder in the left explorer window pane 14 Double click Administrators group in the right explorer window pane 15 Click Add 16 Select the local domain in the look in bar if not already selected 17 Double click the Pathfinder account 18 Click OK 19 Click OK 20 Close the Local Users and Groups window 21 Click OK on Users and Passwords window Automatic Administration Logon Create an Emergency Repair Disk before creating the Automatic Administration Logon account It is highly recommended that you set up the system to automatically log on to Windows If you do not create an Automatic Administration Logon account the system may not function correctly when shut down unexpectedly Auto Log On Windows NT To allow the system to automatically l
356. sts Refer to Chapter 6 Lists and Reports for creating automatic distribution of voice messages to lists of specific users MAINT Overview 4 7 Reports Menu The Reports menu provides access to a configuration of a complete range of administrative and management reports on PathFinder operation Reports are grouped according to the immediate selections shown in the menu Highlighting a menu item with an arrow to the right of it shows the types of reports which you can configure Refer to Chapter 6 Lists and Reports for more information on these report options o Activity Reports Settings Reports Directory Reports Logs Reports Messages Reports Oo n n 0 Greetings amp Signatures Reports Help Menu The Help menu provides access to standard help functions If you re unsure of screen selections or any aspect of PathFinder operation go to the Help menu s Contents option for general orientation or use the Search for Help on option for help related to a specific word term or search key i Activity gt Settings gt Directory Logs gt Messages gt Greetings amp Signatures Customized Report Setup Reporting Search for Help on About Maintenance You can also click on the Help button in the MAINT toolbar or press F7 in most windows to display context sensitive help 4 8 MAINT Toolbar MAINT Toolbar The MAINT toolbar provides access to some of the most o
357. sure to assign a line to service this event group Refer to the Line Settings chapter of the System Administrator Manual for more details FAX ID for this Enter an identifier for your company s facsimile system This Callers must call from FAX machine system identifier is sent in the header of the facsimile document Typically this is the telephone number of the Fax On Demand system Allow voice If this option is selected PathFinder will allow a caller to append a attachments voice attachment to a facsimile message If this option is deselected PathFinder will simply accept the facsimile message without the option to append a voice message Maximum Enter the limit for the number of documents a caller can access documents a caller during one phone call Typically this value is set to 3 can select Select this option if you want to disable PathFinder s outbound facsimile capabilities for Fax On Demand Callers must call from a facsimile machine and will be prompted to turn control over to the facsimile machine to receive the facsimile making the caller responsible for any long distance charges File to send as cover sheet Type the name of the file to be sent as a cover page with each facsimile document The cover page file must be in TIF format and must exist on the PathFinder computer for this option to function properly Retry attempts for failed sends Enter the number of times PathFinder should try to r
358. t queue database files o LogEnabled True Whether SMTPOut logging is enabled master log switch o LogSocket False Whether SMTPOut socket operations are logged o LogRequeue True Whether SMTPOut message requeue operations are logged o LogMessage TrueWhether SMTPOut message operations are logged o RetryMaxTries 100Maximum number of retries to send a message to remote system o RetrylInterval 00 05HH MM retry interval after failed attempt to send SMTPOut message an SleepSeconds 300Seconds to sleep after end of outbound message send cycle o ResponseTimeout 30Maximum time for remote SMTP system to respond before disconnect HELLONT o LocalMessagesDirectory c HELLONT messagesDirectory for local PathFinder message store o LocalDbaseDirectory c HELLONT dbaseDirectory for local PathFinder database store o EnginelPAddress Name address of PathFinder if PathFinder and Onelook Point to Point Server are not running on the same system o TelnetPort 23TCP IP port to connect to local PathFinder C 78 Onelook Point to Point Server o Login PathFinder telnet login name to use o Password HNTELNET telnet login password to use Usage Once started Onelook Point to Point Server has a main status display window that indicates which services are started SMTP In SMTP Out POP v Hello NT UMP Mailer Build 37 Bile eo File POP SMTPIn SMTPOut Help Messages Logs MasterEnable Disable V SMTP In Status Co
359. t Exchange or Microsoft Outlook Instead of having to dial into a phone system to retrieve messages the messages will appear in your desktop Inbox You can archive messages and keep them indefinitely without having to keep them in your voice mailbox With Onelook you can also read facsimile messages that were received in your voice mailbox through Onelook Onelook has full synchronization which means that when you mark messages as read in your desktop Inbox they will be marked as read in your voice mailbox as well In addition if you delete a message in your Inbox it deletes it from your voice mailbox automatically In order to received facsimile messages via Onelook you must have the facsimile option enabled within Onelook C 56 Onelook Unified Messaging System Requirements All system components both required equipment and optional equipment should be listed in the Microsoft Windows Hardware Compatibility List HCL which can be found on the Internet at http www microsoft com hwtest hcl The HCL is a database of hardware classified by function Server These are the minimum requirements for the server PC to run Onelook jul jul jul PathFinder Release 6 or higher Onelook capability in the software key Onelook Point to Point Server active on your Windows NT based voice processing computer Valid IP addresses Ability to run Ping between the clients and the server Network Network Interface
360. t TCBTOS 00 00 00 00 00 07 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 gt Ed Line 002 Wait Te8TOS 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 8 Line 003 Wait Tc8T05 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 Line 004 Wait Tc8TO5 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 BLine 005 Wait Tc8T05 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 Line 006 Wait Tc8T05 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 Wait Tc8T05 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 Wait TcBTo5 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wed Nov 15 13 03 02 2 MsgMan Wait 0 Call Stop 00 00 01 1392939 00 00 01 Tue Nov 21 13 35 38 20 Figure 7 8 Monitor Line View Window You can also restart a line via the line detail or via the right mouse click menu Displays totals for inbound calls You can view today s totals as well as totals for the entire application 7 18 PathFinder Monitor Application Back Ups Logs Errors and Troubleshooting 8 This chapter contains the information needed to help you maintain the PathFinder system by providing a system back up procedure statistical logs and answers to the most common system problems Backing Up PathFinder Backing Up PathFinder PathFinder allows you to back up important files in case of a catastrophe Backups can be very important and we recommend backing up often There are several ways that PathFinder can be backed up Table 8 1 PathFinder Backup Methods Method Network Desc
361. t digits are not sent for internal calls They are only sent for disconnecting CO calls when Loop Supervision is enabled Phone System Set Up infinite DVX I Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the infinite DVX in band integration Oo Oo One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each 2 x 4 SLT card provides four ports One DTMF Receiver module The DTMF is installed on the 2 x 4 SLT card The DTMF provides one additional DTMF receiver for a total of two If the phone system has an expansion KSU and 2 x 4 or 4 x 8 card installed an additional DTMF receiver can be installed on these This would bring the total to four DTMF receivers OPX boxes contain their own DTMF receiver internally A 48V power supply is needed One Ring Generator unit is needed Supported Features The supported features of the infinite DVX include Oo O n n o0 Station forward to a personal greeting Message waiting On Off LEDs Stations transfer caller directly to mailbox Outdial to pager or specific number Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 31 Table 3 14 infinite DVX I Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial gt and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3
362. t have to go back to group the wait state If the next event is a notification event then PathFinder can process it much more quickly than if the command file did a Quit and returned to the main loop If no events are due for this channel then the next instruction in the command file after ProcessNextEvent is executed AbortlfNoPages Aborts Ouits the if no paging messages exist command file PreDialDelay xx PostDialDelay xx Uses the pre and post dial delays to pause between taking the phone off hook and dialing These statements are only useful if OffHook Delayed is also used Normally these are only used when the execution of the command file is progressing too slowly to use the Sleep X command Related Commands OffHook Sleep LoadMailboxBeeperFile Loads the next page message into memory when DialMailboxBeeperFile is called PathFinder does not have to hit the disk Helps speed up the notification process Related Commands DialMailboxBeeperFile PreventMboxAsPage RestartlfNewMessage Prevents the mailbox number from being sent as a page message Restarts this command file with the same global mailbox If a page message is left in the mailbox and the pager notification is initiated you typically would want the page message sent If the caller didn t leave a page message but left a voice message then you can use this command to continue the execution of the comma
363. t time questions and set up basic voice functions in order to prepare PathFinder for configuration 1 From the Start menu select Programs gt PathFinder Voice Processing gt Defining Parameters Maint ie Windows Update oor Programs m Accessories fr Adobe Acrobat 4 0 A Documents fF Dialogic System Software eg PathFinder Voice Processing Eh Settings m Startup a Search gt E Internet Explorer ee Outlook Express 2 Help m Administrative Tools Run Cy Shut Down DY orbaeakh Boombox Call List Admin CodeKey Manager Internet Fax Admin Internet Fax Server Maint Onelook Point to Point Server PathFinder Q amp A Admin Release Notes TeleQueue Reports Figure 4 1 Program Group for PathFinder Configuration Preparation 4 3 2 The Loading Key window displays to tell you that your software key is being loaded Loading Key Loading key please wait Figure 4 2 Loading Key Window If your software key is not installed the Software Key Not Found error message displays If this happens you must make sure that your software key is installed properly Refer to Chapter 2 Installation for more information 3 Inthe First Time Questions window click on Edit Settings First Time Questions You have started MAINT 34 times If you have already filled out the following settings screen and do not want to see this screen again select the box below Select Next to continue or Ca
364. tall helper applications such as Adobe Acrobat Reader and Dialogic drivers Prerequisites amp Preparation Before you attempt to install the PathFinder software ensure that you perform the following tasks o Install the software key and install and configure the voice cards Refer to Install and Configure Hardware on page 2 5 for details o Install and configure Windows NT for Streams service if using Windows NT Refer to Install and Configure Operating System on page 2 14 for details Windows 2000 installs streams automatically Once you have performed these tasks you are ready to install PathFinder software Do not run other applications on the voice processing machine If you do PathFinder may react erratically Install PathFinder Software 2 21 Dialogic Drivers Any new PathFinder installation requires the Dialogic drivers installation If you are upgrading an existing PathFinder application you must first disable and uninstall the existing drivers to install the new Dialogic drivers Sentinel Drivers It is recommended that you always install or upgrade the sentinel drivers This ensures that the latest drivers are always loaded Existing drivers do not need to be uninstalled prior to installation PBXpert If you have a non standard PBX this utility can train PathFinder for your phone system by learning tones such as busy ringback disconnect etc This program operates only on Windows
365. te messages simultaneously to groups of mailboxes In addition to mailbox numbers system lists can contain other list numbers making it possible to create unlimited distribution lists Creating a System List To create a system distribution list 1 Select System Lists from the Edit menu MAINT Release 8 2 0 Build 236 File Configuration Edit Reports Help EE Users gt Class Of Service Menus Time Control Line Settings System Lists Figure 6 1 Edit gt System Lists 6 4 Distribution Lists The following window displays System Lists Figure 6 2 System Lists Window 2 Click on Create List to display the following window Create a System List Figure 6 3 Create a System List Window Distribution Lists 6 5 3 Assign anumber for the list and type a description to describe the list s purpose Click on Create to return to the System Lists window Donotenteranumber that is also used as amailbox number Doing so will cause any message intended for the distribution list to be sent instead to the mailbox 4 Inthe System Lists window highlight the name of the list you are creating then click Edit to display the following window Edit System List 222 gt i List Members 1623 BO ALEXANDER Help Delete Member Add Member Maibox Add Mailbox Other Lists Add List Figure 6 4 Edit System List Window 5 You have created a s
366. tem Integration Protocols 3 1 Phone System Integration Protocols SMDI The software required to configure the Simplified Message Desk Interface SMDI integration is included as part of the standard PathFinder package SMDI is a special integration module used in particular telephone systems especially larger telephone systems such as CENTREX Fujitsu 9600 and NEC2400 SMDI integration requires an RS 232 connection between the telephone system and PathFinder The following procedures apply only to integrating PathFinder they do not apply to setting up your telephone system Prerequisites To integrate PathFinder with an SMDI protocol you first must have a functioning PathFinder application with at least one available COM port Switch Requirements The telephone system must support the SMDI protocol Certain phone systems require additional hardware such as Voice Bridge Consult your sales representative regarding any additional hardware requirements 3 2 Phone System Integration Protocols Integration Configuration Process To configure the SMDI integration follow these steps Is O 0 N D 11 Configure the phone system switch PBX to send all calls to the PathFinder ports based on Busy and or No Answer conditions If you are using a Voice Bridge follow the Voice Bridge instructions to configure the device Connect the SMDI link or Voice Bridge to the PC s COM1 port The default is 1200 E71
367. tension was busy Connect Call was connected No Ring Back Extension did not respond Blind Transfer Call transfer type The Extension Usage report describes the results of a call transfer initiated by PathFinder The call can either be connected or dropped A dropped call either a busy or unanswered extension may route to a mailbox operator or menu Use A review of the Extension Usage report can help with the following n Scheduling agents or operators more effectively O Determining a need for additional phone lines o Identifying subscribers who miss a large number of calls Menu Activity The Menu Activity report identifies user traffic within menus indicating what information callers are most interested in by the number of times specific menus are accessed This can help determine a menu s usefulness and whether the number of channels that allow access to it are sufficient to support the traffic Activity Reports Report 130 Notepad olx File Edt Search Help Menu Activity 06 14 96 15 27 42 Page 01 Date Range 66 13 96 to 06 13 96 Time Range All Menu Range 1MENU to 6FLHOURS 643MENU 06 13 96 643NENU 08 11 55 04 Log Menu 643MENU 08 11 42 Keys 2 0m1643 08 40 40 64 Log Menu 643MENU 08 40 22 Keys 2 0m1643 13 59 37 04 Log Menu 643MENU 13 59 13 Keys T Hu Figure 6 9 Menu Activity Report Example Data The Menu Activity report documents the following o Date The selected reporting period
368. the lt Command gt field is executed if the CallResult lt 07 12 gt is true You can enter a block of commands to run if a specific call result is met For example you can have the following commands executed if the CallResult is a connect CallResult10 DialMailbox CallResult10 OnHook CallResult10 Quit If the call is connected then we dial the mailbox number go on hook and quit the file NOTE CallResult does not work when used in conjunction with the Dial command You must use the Call command Related Commands Refer to example below for additional information LogCallResult Logs the results of the call in the daily log file The log line looks similar to this Related Commands CallResult Dial lt DtmfString gt Dials the number in the lt DtmfString gt Using the Dial command is like using blind transfers in the Auto Attendant PathFinder only dials the number and immediately execute the next command It does not listen on the line to check if the call was connected NOTE The Dial command does not work with the CallResult command Related Commands Sleep Dial Sleep lt SecondsToSleep gt Pauses for the specified seconds Allows PathFinder to wait for a number of seconds before performing the next command Related Commands Dial Call PlayFirstMessage New Save Kill Delete Plays the first message Without a parameter the message is left as a new message Y
369. the STARPLUS SPD 4896 in band integration o One SLT port per PathFinder voice port Each SL12 card provides twelve ports One DTM4 installed on the SL12 DTM4 provides four DTMF receivers In lieu of a DTM4 a 6 X 6 Combo card can be installed This provides six DTMF receivers O One Ring Generator unit and a 48V power supply are needed Supported Features The supported features of the STARPLUS SPD 4896 include O Station forward to a personal greeting o Message waiting On Off LEDs O Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call o Outdial to a pager or specific number O Multiple Return to Operator Phone System Set Up 3 17 Table 3 7 Starplus SPD 4896 Configuration Setup From Station 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXxX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause
370. tion 100 enter the Admin code of 3 226 or dial E and your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0 is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Press Flash 40 enter the CO line range press HOLD press Btn 6 dial 4 on the dialpad then press HOLD to enable Loop Supervision for all
371. tion for more information You must know the type of hang up detection your phone system supports before you alter any hang up detection parameters Refer to your phone system documentation if necessary Loop Current Drop If the telephone system provides Loop Current Supervision enable this option in the telephone system PathFinder will automatically recognize a drop in loop current as disconnect with no configuration The minlcoff parameter in the Registry can be adjusted for PathFinder to reliably detect loop current disconnects Tone Interval Specify a number between zero and ninety nine that represents the detection interval This interval defines the length of time in seconds for the tone that sounds before PathFinder disconnects or hangs up a call Telephony Settings EXAMPLE Entering 5 for the Non silence interval instructs PathFinder to listen for a steady tone that is five seconds long and upon detection to treat the call as a disconnect O If the interval is set too short any pause could be interpreted as a tone signaling a false hang up O If the interval is too long PathFinder can be tied up longer than necessary The recommended interval for both silence and non silence intervals is five to seven seconds Silence Interval Specify a number between zero and ninety nine that represents the detection interval The silence interval defines the length of time in seconds for the silence that
372. tions available through the Edit menu in MAINT Definition To understand Class of Service COS think of an airplane Some passengers fly first class others fly business class and some fly economy class each with different amenities and services PathFinder can do the same for subscribers defining a virtually unlimited number of different classes of service Each subscriber or mailbox and extension pair is associated with a COS that defines its attributes Grouping mailboxes and extensions into classes of service lets you change options for all the mailboxes and extensions in the same class simultaneously simply by editing the COS record This section instructs you how to create edit and delete a COS Instructions are also provided for creating a COS template which can come in handy if you are creating a number of COSs that are similar in definition Class of Service Settings 5 57 Templates If you are creating several classes of service you probably have many parameters that are the same for each Using a template class of service is a convenient way to create identical classes of service each having the same settings You can then select the class of service when creating subsequent classes of service that should share these settings To create a template class of service 1 Click on the COS icon the second button on the PathFinder MAINT tool bar The following window displays Select COS to Edt BB cos Select
373. tivity Log Multiple Line Calls There may be several telephone calls active on PathFinder with each line behaving differently Below is a log line indicating telephone calls on lines one two and three This complete log shows a call placed on line three with several calls placed before the call on line three was completed 474 123 234 274 324 364 690 690 641 252 254 254 383 383 796 815 318 328 723 723 964 838 838 303 319 758 758 999 894 950 950 942 391 Log Start Call Log Start Call Log VMail 1230 Take message Log VMail 1230 To operator mailbox 0 Log VMail 0 To time control OPERATOR Log AutoA 00 Access Log Menu MAIN9711 09 50 34 Keys 8 Vm H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt Vm gt Log Menu MAIN9711 09 50 28 Keys Aa Log AutoA 160 Access Log AutoA 00 Blind Bl Connect 0 Log Stop Call 09 49 36 Log AutoA 160 Blind Bl Connect 160 Log Stop Call 09 50 27 Log VMail 1249 To owner Log Owner 1249 VN 0 VS 5 PN 0 PS 0 FN 0 FS 0 H KERNEL Debug wait 0 3 Log Start Call Log Menu MAIN9711 09 51 19 Keys 2 AaSTART H KERNEL Debug gRunCode lt Aa gt Log AutoA 212 Access Log AutoA 212 Blind Bl Connect 212 Log L 09 51 19 Log L Log Start Call Log Menu MAIN9711 09 52 22 Keys Pi Pi 9 Hu Log Stop Call 09 52 22 Log VMail 1260 To owner Log Owner 1260 VN 0 VS 21 PN 0 PS 0 FN 0 FS 0 Log Menu MAIN9711 09 52 11 Keys Pi Pi 9 Hu Log l 09 52 11 Log Log 09 5
374. to be used to activate deactivate a call list through the telephone 4 Select RunActiveVex 5 Enter CallListPrompter Main 6 Click OK 7 Click OK 8 Click DONE 9 Close the MAINT application when finished Chalk Talk First Time Programming Setup Once the PathFinder system has been completely installed a Call List Startup Wizard will automatically open to allow you to Set up a Group One or more Groups MUST be present before you can add call list members to the Master List or activate a Call List for the First Time When the Startup Wizard welcome screen displays 1 Click Next to continue The second Wizard screen will display a brief overview of the Call List process 2 Click Next to continue The third Wizard screen will show Students in the First New Group field The group name may be changed here if desired 3 To add the Students group click Next to continue The final Wizard screen will display Call List Admin Startup Wizard Step 4 The following groups will be added Students Select Next to add another group Select Finish to add these groups and start the Call List Admin Select Previous to go back Select Cancel to skip the wizard and run the Call List Admin Cancel lt lt Previous Finish 4 Click Next to add another group the third Wizard screen will return for additional entries Or 5 Click Finish to accept the group s shown
375. to the top connector 2 Connect line three and four to the bottom connector Lines one and three are inside pairs and lines two and four are outside pairs 2 12 Install and Configure Hardware Voice Network Attachment PathFinder is flexible in the way it can be incorporated into the telephone network or telephone system of most locations When considering how to attach the system you should keep the following concerns in mind o Accessibility for maintenance and administration O Type of connection needed between PathFinder and the phone system or host n The need to handle a variety of voice processing functions Direct Attachment to the Central Office In this configuration PathFinder is connected directly to the telephone company s central office Users can reach PathFinder by dialing directly This common setup is used with toll free access to an information hotline However with this configuration PathFinder is unable to transfer callers to other extensions Since PathFinder is connected directly to the central office in front of the phone system there is no way to transfer to an operator or other person for assistance The one exception is a Centrex Essex connection PathFinder can be connected to the central office using any of the following lines Analog Line Analog lines are standard telephone transmission lines that use an RJ 14 connector Centrex Essex Line A Centrex Essex line is a business tel
376. tringing together multiple voice prompts to form sentences Basic Process In order to prepare set up and use PathFinder the following three steps are required 1 Install and configure all hardware and install all software Refer to Chapter 2 Installation for instructions on how to do this You must work through every chapter in the order presented before you can move on 2 Configure PathFinder Refer to Chapter 2 Installation for instructions on how to carry out the initial configuration of PathFinder You must work through this entire configuration procedure before moving on 3 Start up and run PathFinder Refer to Chapter 7 PathFinder Monitor Application for more information on running PathFinder Even though you may want to jump right in and begin using PathFinder immediately it is strongly recommended that you carefully review this manual before proceeding This will help orient you with the many features and options available as you work through the setup and operation of PathFinder 1 2 Overview PathFinder Components PathFinder is made up of four components o Foundation Software The platform from which application modules run e g Auto Attendant Voice Messaging etc O Optional Software Modules Purchased separately e g Point to Point Messaging Internet Fax Delivery etc Telephony Hardware Voice cards etc Personal Computer PC P Installation This chapter describes the
377. try 20 Press FEAT dial 70 7 then press SAVE O Press NEXT to go to the XFR PREFIX O Press CHG at the XFR PREFIX entry O Press FEAT and dial 70 7 then press SAVE Press NEXT until the ICM SUFFIX entry is shown Press CHG at the ICM SUFFIX entry Dial x then press SAVE Press NEXT until DIS DGT appears Press CHG dial 9999999 then press SAVE Press HOLD twice Press BACK twice until 4 RESOURCE appears Press SHOW Press CHG until Ring Scheme shows 1 then press CLEAR Assign a VM flexible buttons on each station as follows O Press FEAT 3 O Press flexible button to program O Press CHG soft key FEAT soft key O Press FEAT 64 Press SAVE soft key 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 NOTE If Call Screening is used with the DHS then the transferred to party must go on hook after either rejecting the call or transferring the caller to another extension Phone System Set Up Starplus Triad S Hardware Requirements The following are the hardware requirements for the STARPLUS Triad S in band integration Oo One SLIB port per PathFinder voice port Each SLIB card provides six ports One DTRU installed on the SLIB DTRU provides two DTMF receivers One RGU ring generator unit is needed This can be an internal or external RGU Supported Features The supported feature
378. tting Up Time Control Parameters uses se ses see see esse Ge eke 5 94 Creating a Template Time Control sssssscsssscsessssesssccseesssesssceseesseeses 5 94 Creating a Time Control sisie es ed de Ne 5 95 Editing a Time Control iese ee Re EE Ee 5 96 Deleting a Time Control ss ese es Ge EG NN 5 101 Line SettiNgS ER EE EE N s 5 102 Assigning Port Modules siese EE Se Re Re eN EG See ie 5 102 Setting Up Phone Lines esse EG se Ee Re Gee AE ede 5 102 Suggested Initial Module Settings ou sesse sesse see ee Re Gee Re 5 107 6 Listsand Reports Distrib tior LiStS N Ee ee 6 3 Creating a System LIST asie eN eN ee ee ene ig 6 3 Editing a Systemi EISE oes GE Oe Ge es GE id 6 6 Deleting a System List oie eed eli dee ed ede 6 6 System ele HE EE e i EI R 6 7 Reports COVER VIG W ae aac Ee ee Ee ee 6 7 Reports Criteria se ee eg ee ee eg 6 7 Setup REDOFUME sesse ee RR RE Ke ee eg eed 6 9 Contents Activity Re pars SR De Ge De 6 10 OE o NE RE A EEN Ne 6 10 Mailbex Usage Re Re ke ai 6 11 Extension UEaae ee ee ee de ee Ge Ge ei ee 6 13 ES ed ie SE EE iii iisi 6 14 Fax DIO CUIIGIICS esse ie ee ee Ge ee Ge Ge 6 16 Notification Sde sie ed een eek ee ee 6 17 Setting Reports sade Se ge GR aai 6 18 Mailbox Settings SUMMALSY uses sesse sesse seek Gee Rea Rae eek Gee Rae eek ee RE 6 19 Mailbox Settings Detail ssssssscssssecssecssecssccssscssecssecssccssessseessecsseeses 6 20 Extension Settings SUMIMALY ssssssessessecsessesscesesesessesse
379. ubleshooting PathFinder problems 6 34 Logs Reports Error Log The Error Log report lists any error messages resulting from the operation of PathFinder Report 403 Notepad jol File Edit Search Help Error Systen Log 06 14 96 15 54 47 Page 61 Date Range 86 13 96 to 66 14 96 Time Range 08 00 00 to 10 00 00 gt gt No Data Found gt gt Used date range 06 13 96 to 66 14 96 gt gt Used time range 68 60 68 to 10 00 00 Figure 6 25 Error System Log Report Example Data Both hardware and software malfunctions are reported Use Review this report to check on errors in PathFinder activity Each line of the report specifies a specific error condition that has occurred Each error condition is listed by time of occurrence Messages Reports 6 35 Messages Reports The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the Messages reports functions available through the Reports menu in MAINT Message reports provide the system administrator with a means to determine the current status of messages in PathFinder mailboxes Message Summary The Message Summary report summarizes various status conditions for PathFinder mailboxes Report 501 Notepad Ox File Edit Search Help Message Summary 06 14 96 15 55 32 Mailbox Range 1626 to 1665 Mailbox Msg Type New Saved Size MIKE FORD Voice F 40 Saved 2 6 meg 895 7 sec FAX n 5 Saved 6 6 meg 0 8 sec
380. uction prompt associated with the menu is played Allows a caller to re record prompts for a menu The caller after pressing the key associated with this action is prompted for the menu password The Introduction Body Instructions or any play prompt file attached to a particular key can then be recorded or edited Change Changes the prompt files that are used to those recorded in the selected Language language Only languages that you have purchased are available Hang Up Plays the hang up message Thank you for calling prior to disconnecting the caller For example a menu might include this option at the end of a list Press 1 for sales 2 for support to return to the previous menu and 9 to hang up If the caller presses 9 the hang up message plays Max Retries This field determines the number of incorrect attempts that callers are given when entering key presses Time Out The amount of time the caller has in which to enter a response after all menu prompts have been played PathFinder executes the Time Out action once this time limit has been exceeded 5 seconds is usually sufficient The maximum value for this field is 999 Time Control Settings 5 93 Time Control Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes the time control functions available through the Edit menu in MAINT Time controls are settings that allow PathFinder to activate or disa
381. uded in the PathFinder User Guide and the Quick Reference Card The following options are available Field Description Password Enables the mailbox owner to change the mailbox password This is typically turned off when a mailbox is for temporary use as with hotel guests Greeting Allows mailbox owners to edit their own greetings this option typically is enabled Name Allows the owner to change the mailbox name which is used in prompts associated with the mailbox Notification Allows the owner to change such notification settings as the extension or phone number to call and the time of notification such as for a pager Mailbox State Allows the owner to turn the mailbox off set it to greeting only forward calls to an extension forward calls to a mailbox or forward calls to menu Typically not used when a simple mailbox is desired Personal Lists Allows the subscriber to create up to ten personal lists and maintain them over the telephone Guest Mailboxes Allows the owner to communicate with a guest who does not have a mailbox on PathFinder Auto Attendant Allows the mailbox owner to edit extension settings Note Pad Grants the mailbox owner access to a personal voice note pad The voice note pad is similar to a note pad referenced with an index The index can be any eight digit number with an associated voice file Class of Service Settings 5 73 Field Description T
382. uentially starting at item 1 Item Number Start Time Mark active days for these hours MO TU WE TH FR SA SU EndTimes cl CU Ct 0 0 O O O Action the menu or mailbox calls are to go to Time Period Number enter 1 to 9 for users to select time sensitive greetings Item Number Start Time Mark active days for these hours MO TU WE TH FR SA SU EndTimes 00 2 0 0O ODO O Action the menu or mailbox calls are to go to Time Period Number enter 1 to 9 for users to select time sensitive greetings Item Number Start Time Mark active days for these hours MO TU WE TH FR SA SU End Time oo Mm oa ee Action the menu or mailbox calls are to go to Time Period Number enter 1 to 9 for users to select time sensitive greetings Item Number Start Time Mark active days for these hours MO TU WE TH FR SA SU End Time O OUUUU Oo Action the menu or mailbox calls are to go to Time Period Number enter 1 to 9 for users to select time sensitive greetings Up to 10 items can be assigned to a Time Control use additional sheets for more items Installation Forms B 9 VOICE LINES SETTINGS Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Action To Perform When Calls Ring In Additional Parameters Installation Forms B 10 Optional Modules This chapter is an instructional tool for system administrators and others who work with PathFinder It describes how to install set up desig
383. uidelines apply O Leaving the Start field blank will cause PathFinder to assume the lowest value i e 01 01 or 00 00 O Leaving the End field blank will cause PathFinder to assume the highest value i e 12 31 or 23 59 O Leaving both fields blank will cause PathFinder to assume all dates or times i e 01 01 to 12 31 or 00 00 to 23 59 O The Start date time must always be earlier than the End date time A Start Time of 17 00 and an End Time of 08 00 i e 5 00 p m to 8 00 a m is INVALID and may cause PathFinder to behave erratically In the day of week fields select the checkbox for each day to which this line item in the time control applies and clear the checkbox for each day to which this line item in the time control does not apply In the Time Period field enter a number from 1 to 9 to distinguish different time related events within a time control Time Period is most often used to control what mailbox greeting is played when a mailbox is reached Typically PathFinder uses 1 for daytime 2 for evening and 3 for weekend If in doubt set the Time Period field to 1 Time Control Settings 5 99 8 Click on Edit Action to select the specific action to be performed during the indicated dates days of the week and hours during the day The following window displays Edit Time Control Menu Owner Access Run Module Time Control Command File Company Directory FAX On Demand Run ActiveVex Mailbox T
384. unctions Buttons The following buttons are available in the edit functions area in the Edit window Table 7 2 Edit Functions Buttons Button Definition Play Plays the current file non indexed or prompt indexed Stop Stops recording or playing Record Records the current file non indexed or prompt indexed Undo Undoes most of the changes made to the current file or prompt If you make a change that cannot be undone a prompt displays saying that you cannot undo this change unless you do not save Play Beginning Plays the first x seconds of current file non indexed or prompt indexed where x is the number in the text box Play Ending Plays the last x seconds of current file non indexed or prompt indexed where x is the number in the text box Cut Beginning Cuts the first x seconds of current file non indexed or prompt indexed where x is the number in the text box Cut End Cuts the last x seconds of current file non indexed or prompt indexed where x is the number in the text box The Step Size field at the top left of the screen determines the number of seconds of the file or prompt to play or cut from the beginning or end You can set the step size to larger or smaller values depending on how much you need to play or cut from the prompt Boom Box Application 7 7 File Functions Buttons The following buttons are available in the file functions are
385. use PBXpert to learn the tones Refer to PBXpert on page 2 42 for more information Telephony Settings Perfect Call DialTone Freq 1 Dev Fieq2 Dev On Dev Off Dev Cout Done ee 9 2 a toe N LILY EI LI ea DO a ut EE IERE EE IE EE Here me COOCOO Hu Ring Back 1 461 Jf27 B IE EE RingBack2 JE J TIETE JL EE EN EE HEEN isave these FAX2 CEOIL settings All frequencies in Hz All durations in msec Figure 5 22 Telephony Settings Perfect Call Window 5 34 Other MAINT Settings Other MAINT Settings The MAINT application allows you to configure PathFinder This section describes several miscellaneous configuration functions available in the Configuration menu in MAINT including PBX integrations optional modules INI files engine control and the Registry PBX Integrations This window is accessed by selecting PBX Integrations from the Configuration menu Also after you have started PathFinder for the first time and have gone through the First Time Questions window you are prompted to configure PBX integrations PBX Integration x Current PBX Selection 004 Generic PBX 2 Digit Supervised Xfer r PBX Integrations Available Default PBX 3 Digit Blind Xfer Generic PBX 1 Digit Blind Xfer 002 Generic PBX 1 Digit Supervised Xfer 003 Generic PBX 2 Digit Blind Xfer 004 Generic PBX 2 Digit Supervised Xfer
386. ussss sesse see eene eng Geek Gee ees 6 21 Extension Settings Detail Report Example sesse sense sek Geek ee ee ee Ge Ge 6 22 Class of Service Settings Report Example ou ccccsssesessecssessecsecssccsncsscessesseesseees 6 23 Menu Settings Report Example uuusse sesse see sesse Gee See ek ee ae Gee ae Ge ee ee RARR 6 24 Time Control Settings Report Example sesse sensasie geskakel 6 25 Registry Settings Summary Report Example sesse seek seen eene gese ese ee 6 27 Registry Settings Detail Report Example sesse sesse geskenk eek enge 6 28 System Distribution Lists Report Example qu sesse ses seeks eek Gee ee Renee 6 29 Directory Report Example essensies esse sek ae Ideas Goede RR eke sede eke 6 30 Daily Log Report Example se ED EE EG EER el aac 6 32 Maintenance Log Report Example ssscssssssecssecssccssesssecssecssccsseesscsssccseessecsscenseess 6 33 Error System Log Report Example sesse sees see eene gee eek eeR oek Gee Rek Gee AR 6 34 Message Summary Report Example sesse seen ses soeke Ge RR Gee ese eke ee RR 6 35 Message Detail Report Example ou ses sesse sense ee Sek Gee ee ee Rek ee Ge Gee ee ee RR ee 6 36 Boom Box Main WINdOW oes N ae ee ed ee es EO ie 7 2 Set Port WINDOW ee ee Ge De Eg 7 4 Boom Box Edit WIRAGW GE cies eco ieee cae ie 7 5 Add Prompt WTA OW se Ee RE Rd en ER Gen de Bee ee ER GN see ee 7 7 Monitor Application Window se iese ere oneer Ee Ge eke de Ng 7 14 xii Figures Monitor Blockage Grou
387. ve as New 5 76 Leaving a Fax in a Mailbox C 44 Level One Backup 8 1 Level Three Backup 8 1 Level Two Backup 8 1 Levels 1 through 5 Access 4 11 Levels 6 and 7 Access 4 11 Limited Administrator Access 4 11 Limited Supervisor Access 4 11 Line Settings 4 6 Button 4 9 Line View Status 7 17 LINKING A QUESTIONNAIRE TO A MENU C 29 Index List Mode 5 5 Log Files 5 6 8 2 Log On 2 15 Logging 4 6 5 6 Options 5 7 Logs Reports 6 31 Loop current disconnect 2 13 Loop Current Drop 5 25 Loop Current Supervision 5 24 LPT COM Ports 5 18 LPT COM Ports 4 6 M Mailbox 5 44 5 90 5 100 5 105 Action 5 50 Caller Settings 5 66 is Full 5 50 is Off 5 50 Length 5 2 Owner Settings 5 68 Settings 5 49 Single 5 43 State 5 72 Template 5 44 Mailbox Length C 88 Mailbox Settings Detail Report 6 20 Mailbox Settings Summary Report 6 19 Mailbox Usage Report 6 11 Mailer Address and Port C 87 MAINT 2 53 Application Overview 4 5 Logins 4 10 Passwords 4 1 4 10 Toolbar 4 8 Maintenance Log 6 33 Making Changes 5 17 Manual Backup 8 1 Max Retries 5 92 Maximum documents a caller can select C 37 Maximum Keys 5 5 Maximum Wait 5 5 Memory 2 2 Menu Activity Report 6 14 Menu Logs 8 9 Menu Settings Report 6 24 Menus 5 7 5 84 5 91 5 100 5 105 Creating 5 86 Deleting 5 87 Design 5 84 Multi Level 5 85 Settings 4 6 5 83 Time Periods 5 19 Message Cascading 5 50 Message Detail Report 6 36 Message Manager 5 7 5 17 Message Summary 6 35
388. vities MAINT Logins allow you to create a list of users that are authorized to perform PathFinder maintenance functions and assign an access level to each of those users Access Levels Assigning levels of access gives the system administrator the ability to grant only the access each individual needs By requiring a person to enter a name and password when starting MAINT PathFinder knows to whom complete access is granted and to whom restricted access is granted Access levels range from one to nine and have the following privileges Access Levels amp MAINT Passwords 4 11 Table 4 2 System Access Levels Access Level LEVEL 9 Unlimited Supervisor Access Privileges Level 9 users have access to all MAINT menus and options Level 9 users also can view and change mailbox and or extension passwords LEVEL 8 Limited Supervisor Access Level 8 users have access to all MAINT menus and options with the following restrictions O Cannot edit MAINT logins Cannot write or confirm INI files Cannot re index databases Cannot select phone system PBX Integrations Cannot configure Point to Point an optional module Cannot configure Engine detection Cannot edit INI settings Cannot edit the Registry Hoaadaaogo LEVELS 6 and 7 Administrator Access Users with Administrator Access have the same access privileges as level 8 with the following restrictions O Cannot modify any Module System or Tel
389. vity Reports Extension Usage The Extension Usage report identifies inbound call activity to a specific extension Report 120 Notepad File Edit Search Help Extension Activity 06 14 96 15 25 45 Date Range 66 13 96 to 66 13 96 Time Range All Extension Range 626 to 626 HIKE FORD 06 13 96 626 MIKE FORD 09 16 43 05 Log Auton 626 Access 09 11 63 05 Log AutoA 626 Call 626 Connect Ca 09 51 12 84 Log Auton 626 Access 09 51 28 64 Log AutoA 626 Call 626 Connect Ca 10 16 35 66 Log Auto 626 Access 10 16 38 67 Log AutoA 626 Access 10 16 56 07 Log AutoA 626 Call 626 Busy Ca 10 16 56 67 Log AutoA 626 To mailbox 1626 10 17 05 66 Log AutoA 626 Call 626 Nofinswer Ca 10 17 05 66 Log Auto 626 To mailbox 1626 10 29 58 04 Log futof 626 Access 10 30 28 64 Log futof 626 Call 626 Nofinswer Ca 10 30 28 04 Log AutoA 626 To mailbox 1626 10 33 61 64 Log futof 626 Access 10 33 19 04 Log AutoA 626 Call 626 Busy Ca Figure 6 8 Extension Usage Report Example Data The report sorted by date documents inbound calls and their results The report documents the time that the call was made as well as its duration Duration is defined as the elapsed time between the initial connection and the subsequent hang up from PathFinder In addition the report documents specific call activity 6 14 Activity Reports Possible data includes Answered Call was answered No Answer Extension did not answer Busy Ex
390. vmail esisys com Figure C 25 General Settings Window Facsimile Delivery Module Access The next step is to give callers access to the facsimile delivery module This is usually done using a menu key off of a main or secondary menu To administer facsimile delivery module access please follow these steps 1 Run MAINT 2 Select Edit gt Menus from the menu bar 3 Select amenu from the list that will be used to give callers access to IFD Internet Fax Delivery C 53 4 Double click on Key 4 The following window displays Key 4 Action Mailbox Run Module The system will Extension transfer control to the module selected below If the module requires a parameter enter it below Company Directory AIIFD SUB x FAX On Demand Play Instructions Record Prompts Change Language Figure C 26 Key 4 Action Window 5 Select Run Module 6 Select the module name A IFD SUB then choose one of the following situations o If you want the system to prompt for a subscriber number leave the Parameter field blank o If you wish to predefine the subscriber number type it in the Parameter field C 54 Internet Fax Delivery Usage The server is started by running the IFD_SRV EXE program The following window displays Internet Fax Delivery Server Build 6 ile x File Start Up PathsC HELLONTYFD 1241 16 10 55 Data Object Initialized 44 objects 12 1 16 10 55 Reportin
391. ware classified by function Internet Fax Delivery should be installed from the PathFinder CD ROM by selecting the Internet Fax Delivery component If necessary run the PathFinder installation program and select Internet Fax Delivery Once installed nternet Fax Delivery is made up of the following files Oo Oo HELLONT IFD IFD_ADMN EXE This is the administration and reporting program IFD_ADMN allows a user to configure and administer the subscribers classes of service routing tables etc HELLONT IFD IFD_SRV EXE This is the facsimile delivery server This program handles the inbound and outbound traffic It should be placed in your startup group so that it always runs HELLONT VOX VOX Contains voice prompts Internet Fax Delivery C 47 o HELLONT MODULES A IFD SUB This is the facsimile delivery module This module communicates with inbound callers and receives and delivers facsimiles Setup amp Configuration Once the software is installed select from the Start menu Programs gt Hello Voice Processing gt Internet Fax Admin Do not run the Internet Fax Server yet If the Fax Server is running select from the menu bar File gt Shutdown Server to exit the server Running IFD_ADMN EXE will cause in the following window to display Internet Fax Delivery Administration amp Reporting Oy x Subscribers Classes of Service Servers in Network Phone Number Translations Fax Routi
392. wing settings are correct HELLONT LocalMessagesDirectory C HELLONT messages TelnetPort 23 login HELLONT password hnttelnet 3 Place a shortcut to HELLONT NTMAIL EXE in your Start Up group Client PC As part of Onelook client installation the following components will be installed 00 Oo n no O Voice Form server O Facsimile Form server Installation To install Onelook on a client PC 1 Make sure all programs are closed 2 Run the program in the ONELOOK CLIENT INSTALL directory The name of this program could vary depending on what version of Onelook Client you have on your CD Onelook Unified Messaging C 59 3 After the installation program has finished copying the program files to your hard drive the following window displays Onelook Service Provider x Onelook Service Setup m Server Name m User Information Mailbox Password EEN Interval Seconds Henge Malbon Passwerd Reset Last Msg Date m Server Connection Using Local Area Network LAN sing Remate Connection F Cancel Apply Figure C 28 Onelook Service Provider Window blank Fill in the Server Name field You can get this information from your Network Administrator This is either a name served network system name e g xyz com or a numeric H port IP address e g 192 6 1 50 In the User Information section enter your mailbox number This is the same a
393. ws that the phone system sent the caller to mailbox 1624 AutoA 624 Call 624 Busy CaScHo AutoA 624 Hold Holding 1 AutoA 624 Call 624 NoAnswer AutoA 624 To mailbox 1624 Figure 8 8 Auto Attendant Log Single Call 8 10 Auto Attendant Logs Main Menu No Action Log This log shows that the caller reached the MAINMENU and did not do anything The menu took the Maximum Silence action which was to hang up 14 23 37 01 Log Stop Call 15 00 55 H2 Max Silence Figure 8 9 Auto Attendant Log Main Menu No Action Operator Blind Transfer Call Log This example shows that the caller pressed 0 at the menu and was transferred to the operator as a blind transfer 08 55 21 05 Log Menu DEMO 08 55 20 Keys 0 0p 08 55 24 05 Log Menu DEMO Transfer to Operator Figure 8 10 Auto Attendant Log Operator Call Blind Transfer Voice Mailbox Directory Log This line shows that the caller pressed V for a directory of voice mailboxes 11 07 23 04 Log Directory Run Vm Figure 8 11 Auto Attendant Log VM Directory Troubleshooting 8 11 Troubleshooting This section gives technical information on how to diagnose problems that could occur on PathFinder The information in this section is highly technical and unless the procedures are performed as instructed PathFinder may fail to operate A good working knowledge of Windows NT DOS and PC based systems is essential
394. x On Demand service Because the facsimile menu is the first one accessed when a caller reaches the facsimile service PathFinder plays a greeting prompt Balagunda then a body prompt faxlist followed by instructions for using the Fax On Demand system faxinfo If the facsimile menu had been accessed from another menu PathFinder would play only the body and instruction prompts without a greeting prompt o The 1 Key 1 sends facsimile directions on how to get to Balagunda s office document 100 o The 2 Key 2 provides a list of tech support facsimile documents for the company s widget product document 200 o The 3 Key 3 sends sales information on the widget product document 300 o The4Key 4 is pressed if the caller knows the specific number of the desired facsimile document After pressing 4 the caller is prompted to enter the appropriate facsimile document number which is then transmitted back to the caller O The 7 Key 7 is used to access the Fax On Demand administration options and requires a password 718293 Facsimile Mailboxes Once PathFinder has been configured for facsimile support facsimiles can be left in and retrieved from a PathFinder user s mailbox Leaving a Facsimile in a Mailbox In order for a subscriber to receive facsimile messages in their mailbox their Class of Service COS must be configured to allow facsimile messages Refer to the Class of Service chapter in the System Administr
395. xecutes the next command It does not listen on the line to check if the call was connected NOTE The Dial command does not work with the CallResult command Command Files A 7 Table A 1 Command Descriptions Continued Command String DialMailboxBeeperFile DialPagerFile Action Dials the digits found in the latest page or message Description Dials the digits left as a pager message in the mailbox For example if you call this command in the Command File and there was a pager message in the mailbox PathFinder would outdial the DTMF tones left as a pager message If no page message is sent then PathFinder dials the mailbox number Related Commands PreventMboxAsPage lt 0 6 gt lt Command gt Executes the lt Command gt Sunday 0 Monday 1 Saturday 6 if today s day of week matches Related Commands Time Time lt HH MM gt lt HH MM gt lt Command gt DeliverNewFax lt Dtmf String gt Executes the command Delivers new faxes if the current time falls between the times First time must be the lowest and you cannot wrap around to the next day For example Time10 00 00 30 DialMailboxWhere Is not valid To accomplish the same thing use Time10 00 11 59 DialMailboxWhere Time00 00 00 30 DialMailboxWhere to the number specified or to the mailbox Notification Number field if none specified Always uses the global mailbox Cancel
396. y Carter Dawn Carter Doug Carpenter Kevin Carpexo J R Carpina Maria Fatima Carpino Billee Luo Carpio Alexis Carr Dora Carra Adam Donaldson Patricia Dryden Daniel Dryfhout Art Dublak Ed Dubner James Harrision Kristal lannitelli lan zj kat Ihara Fwa Figure C 5 Select Members to Call Screen 5 Click on the drop down window to select the group All names stored on the Master List display in the left pane 6 Use the ARROW buttons to add or remove names in the Call List then click OK Chalk Talk 7 To load copy the parameters assigned to an existing call list click the LOAD TEMPLATE CALL LIST button The Load Template screen displays Load Template Call List d 2001 Created by AutoLogin on 05 24 2001 17 15 36 2003 Sub Math School Closing Teacher Conference Figure C 6 Load Template 8 Select the Call List with the desired parameters then click APPLY The following system messages will display to confirm your selection ETE 2 Do you wish to use the members From Teacher Conference to this list Note that existing members of this list will be removed i xf Do you wish to copy the prompts from Teacher Conference to this list Note that existing prompts For this list will be replaced Chalk Talk 9 From the Edit Call Entry screen click CHANGE when finished Follow the steps described earlier to activate the Call List To Record Prompts Place a
397. your password To disable the conference feature on SLT ports to be assigned to the VM group press Flash 50 enter SLT extension range to be assigned to the VM group XXX XXX then press Btn 3 Press Flash 65 Btn 1 to enter VM group programming for VM group 440 Press Flash 65 Btn 12 and enter the SLT ports into a VM group 440 447 Press Flash 65 Btn 10 to set the Leave Table as Table 0 and Btn 11 to set the Retrieve Table as Table 1 Leave Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 1 to select Table 0 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD 0is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus Retrieve Table Programming a Press Flash 66 then press Btn 2 to select Table 1 b Enter 0 TRANS 7 HOLD Q is a prefix digit TRANS indicates a pause based on the pause timer 7 is used in conjunction with PathFinder s 100 and 200 menus c Press Btn 2 to select Table 1 d Enter 1 HOLD 1 is a suffix digit is a digit that informs PathFinder that this is a subscriber e Press Btn 9 enter 9999999 HOLD Btn 9 is the disconnect table 9999999 is the disconnect code used by PathFinder 8 Perform the following at each station Press SPEED twice b Press the flexible button to be programmed c Dial 440 on the keypad d Press the ON OFF button N
398. ys to press The voice prompts are played in order from ntroduction to Body to Instructions If no voice prompt is defined PathFinder plays the next prompt in the sequence To the caller the sequential voice prompts appear as a single prompt Usually the first menu in a multi level structure has an introduction and possibly a body prompt file Almost all menus have instruction prompt files Additionally the introduction prompt is played only in the initial first menu and any subsequent menus will not play the introduction prompt However these prompt files are dependent on the application design Menu Settings 5 89 Configure the voice prompts pane as follows Introduction Type or select the prompt file to be played first This prompt should include something like Thank you for calling Widget Corporation Typically only the first menu accessed for a caller plays an Introduction prompt Body Type or select the prompt file to be played after the introduction prompt This prompt is not used in most menus A typical body prompt might be Widget Corporation is a company that specializes in high tech widgets Instructions Type or select the prompt file to be played after the body prompt if there is one The instructions prompt should contain information the caller needs to decide which keys to press A typical instruction prompt would be For sales press one for support press two
399. ystem list You can edit your new system distribution list to add mailbox numbers list numbers and other numbers 6 6 Distribution Lists Editing a System List To edit a system distribution list by adding or deleting mailbox users or system list numbers perform the following steps 1 From the main MAINT window select Edit gt System Lists from the menu bar 2 Select the system list that you need to edit then click Edit You must first create a list before you can edit it Refer to Creating a System List on page 6 3 for more information 3 For each mailbox user you want to add select the mailbox user from the Mailbox pull down menu and click on Add Mailbox Repeat this process for each mailbox user you want to add 4 For each previously created system distribution list you want to add select the from the system distribution list from the Other Lists pull down menu and click on Add List Repeat this process for each system distribution list you want to add 5 To delete a user from the list highlight that user in the list members pane at the top of the window then click on Delete Member 6 When you are finished editing the distribution list click on Done Deleting a System List To delete a system list perform the following steps 1 From the main MAINT window select Edit gt System Lists from the menu bar Highlight the list to be deleted Click Delete List When prompted to confirm the deletion

System Administrator`s Manual Voice Processing System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents